UC-NRLF

;'

N
\b
Nil.
 Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2008 with funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation

http://www.archive.org/details/conicsectionstreOObesarich
 :

CONIC SECTIONS,

TEEATED GEOMETEICALLY.

BY

W. H, BESANT, D.Sc, F.K.S.

TELLOW OP ST JOHN'S COLLEGE, CAMBRrDGB.

EIGHTH iEmTlON] REVISJ^jy,

CAMBRIDGE
DEIGHTON, BELL AND CO.
LONDON : GEOEGE BELL AND SONS.
1890
 'p
ift'

%'

PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. & SONS

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESa
 PREFACE.

In the present Treatise fbe Conic Sections are defined

Tvitli reference to a focus and directrix, and I have
endeavoured to place before the student the most
important properties of those curves, deduced, as

closely as possible, from the definition.

The construction which is given in the first Chap-

ter for the determination of points in a conic section

possesses several advantages ; in particular, it leads at

once to the constancy of the ratio of the square on the

ordinate to the rectangle under its distances from the

vertices ; and, again, in the case of the hyperbola, the

directions of the asymptotes follow immediately from

the construction. In several cases the methods em-

ployed are the same as those of Wallace, in the

Treatise on Conic Sections, published in the Ency-

clopcedia Metropolitana.

The deduction of the properties of these curves

from their definition as the sections of a cone, seems •

h priori to be the natural method of dealing with the

subject, but exprnep^g^ appears to have shewn that
viii Preface,

the discussion of conies as defined by their plane pro-

perties is the most suitable method of commencing an

elementary treatise, and accordingly I follow the
fashion of the time in taking that order for the treat-

ment of the subject. In Hamilton's book on Conic

Sections, published in the middle of the last century,

the properties of the cone are first considered, and

the advantage of this method of commencing the

subject, if the use of solid figures be not objected to,

IS especially shewn in the very general theorem of

Art. (150). I have made much use of this treatise,

and, in fact, it contains most of the theorems and

problems which are now regarded as classical propo-

sitions in the theory of Conic Sections.

I have considered first, in Chapter I., a few simple

properties of conies, and have then proceeded to the

particular properties of each curve, commencing with

the parabola, as in some respects, the simplest form

of a conic section.

It is then shewn, in Chapter YI., that the sections

of a cone, by a plane produce the several curves in

question, and lead at once to their definition as loci,

and to several of their most important properties.

A chapter is devoted to the method of orthogonal

projection, and another to the harmonic properties

of curves, and to the relations of poles and polars.
 Preface. ix

including the theoiy of reciprocal polars for the par-

ticular case in which the circle is employed as the

auxiliary curve.

Eor the more general methods of projections, of

reciprocation, and of anharmonic properties, the stu-

dent will consult the treatises of Chasles, Poncelet,

Salmon, Townsend, Ferrers, Whitworth, and others,

who have recently developed, with so much fulness,

the methods of modern Geometry.

I have to express my thanks to Mr R. B. Wor-

thington, of St John's College, and of the Indian
Civil Service, for valuable assistance in the construc-

tions of Chapter XI., and also to Mr E. Hill, Fellow

of St John's College, for his kindness in looking over

the latter half of the proof-sheets.

I venture to hope that the methods adopted in

this treatise will give a clear view of the properties

of Conic Sections, and that the numerous Examples
appended to the various Chapters will be useful as

an exercise to the student for the further extension

of his conceptions of these curves.

W. H. BESANT.
Cambridge,
March, 1869.
 PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION.

For this edition the text has been carefully revised,

some redundant examples have been removed, and

fresh examples, taken chiefly from recent examination

papers, have been inserted.

A book of Solutions of the Examples has been

prepared, in accordance with requests which have

been received from many teachers, and will be issued

with the present edition.

W. H. BESANT.
Sept, 1881.

PREFACE TO THE EIGHTH EDITION.

For this edition some slight alterations have been

made, and some additional examples inserted.

The Book of Solutions of the Examples has been

also revised, and has been made to be in complete
accordance with the present edition.

W. H. BESANT.
March, 1890.
 CONTENTS.

PAGE
Introduction 1

CHAPTER I.

The Construction of a Conic Section, and General

Properties 3

CHAPTER II.

The Parabola 21

CHAPTER III.

The Ellipse 50

CHAPTER IV.

The Hyperbola 90

CHAPTER V.

The Rectangular Hyperbola 132

CHAPTER VI.

The Cylinder and the Cone 144

xii Contents.

CHAPTER VII.
PAGE

AND Curvature .......

The Similabity of Conics, the Areas of Conics,
160

CHAPTER VIII.

Projections 174

CHAPTER IX.

Of Conics in General 182

CHAPTER X.

Harmonic Properties, Poles, and Polars . . 190

CHAPTER XI.

The Construction of a Conic from given conditions 217

CHAPTER XII.

The Oblique Cylinder, the Oblique Cone, and the

Conoids 233

Appendix 247

Miscellaneous Problems 252

 UNIV. W

CONIC SECTIONS.

INTRODUCTION.

PEPIXITION.

straight line and a point be given in position in

IF aa plane, and if a point move in a plane in such a
manner that its distance from the given point always bears
the same ratio to its distance from the given line, the curve
traced out by the moving point is called a Conic Section.

The fixed point is called the Focus, and the fixed line
the Directrix of the conic section.

When the ratio is one of equality, the curve is called a

Parabola,

When the ratio is one of less inequality, the curve is

called an Ellipse.

When the ratio is one of greater inequality, the curve is

called an Hyperbola.

These curves are called Conic Sections, because they

can all be obtained from the intersections of a Cone by

planes in different directions, a fact which will be proved

hereafter.

It may be mentioned that a circle is a particular case

of an ellipse, that two straight lines constitute a particular
2 Introduction.

case of an hyperbola, apd i/hat a parabola may be looked

upon as the limiting form of an ellipse or an hyperbola,
under certain conditions of variation in the lines and
magnitudes upon which those curves depend for their
form.

The object of the following pages is to discuss the

general forms and characters of these curves, and to de-
termine their most important properties by help of the
methods and relations developed in the first six books, and
in the eleventh book of Euclid, and it will be found that,
for this purpose, a knowledge of Euclid's Geometry is all
that is necessary.

The series of demonstrations will shew the characters

and properties which the curves possess in common, and
also the special characteristics wherein they difier from
each other and the continuity with which the curves pass
;

into each other will appear from the definition of a conic

section as a Locus, or curve traced out by a moving point,
as well as from the fact that they are deducible from the
intersections of a cone by a succession of planes.
 CHAPTER I.

PROPOSITION 1.

The Construction of a Conic Section.

1. rri AKE S as the focus, and from aS' draw SX

at right
-I- angles to the directrix, and intersecting it in the
point X.
Definition. This line SX, produced both ways, is
called the Axis of the Conic Section,
In SX take a point A such that the ratio of SA to
AX h equal to the given ratio ; then A
ia b. point in the
curve.

Def. The point A is called the Vertex of the curve.

In the directrix EX
take any point E, join EA, and
ES, produce these hues, and through S draw the straight

1—2
4 Conic Sections.

lineSQ making with ES produced the same angle which

ES produced makes with the axis SN.
Let Pbe the point of intersection of SQ and pro- EA
duced, and through drawP LPK
parallel to NX^ and
intersecting ES produced in Z, and the directrix in K.

Then the angle PLS is equal to the angle LSN and

therefore to PSL\
Hence SP = PL.
Also PL : -^aS^ :: EP EA:

v.PK'.AX',
:. PL : :: PK
^.S' AX-, :

and .-. SP : PK
:: AS AX, :

The point Pis therefore a point in the curve required,

and by taking for Esuccessive positions along the directrix

we shall, by this construction, obtain a succession of points
in the curve.
If E be taken on the upper side of the axis at the
same distance from X, it is easy to see that a point P will
be obtained below the axis, which will be similarly situated
with regard to the focus and directrix. Hence it follows
that the axis divides the curve into two similar and equal
portions.
 Conic Sections. 5

Another point of the curve, lying in the straight lino

KPf can be found in the following manner.

Through S draw the straight line FS making the angle

i^iS'ir equal to KSP, and let i^/S' produced meet KP pro-
duced in P\
Then, since KS bisects the angle PSF,
SP : SP :: P'K PK; :

/. SP' : P'K :: SP : PK,

and P' is a point in the curve.
2. Def. The Eccentricity, The constant ratio of the
distance from the focus of any point in a conic section to
its distance from the directrix is called the eccentricity

of the conic section.

The Lotus Rectum. If be so taken that E is equal EX
to SX^the angle PSN, which is double the angle LSN^
and therefore double the angle ESX^ is a right angle.
6 Conic Sections,

For, since EX=8X, the angle USX

= SEX, and, the
angle SXB being a right angle, the sum of the two angles
SEXy ESX, which is eqnal to twice ESX, is also equal to
a right angle.
Calling R the position of P in this case, produce RS to
R', so that R^S=RS; then R' is also a point in the curve.

Dep. The straight line RSR' drawn through the focus

at right angles to the axis^ and intersecting the curve in R
and R\ Latus Rectum,
is called the

It is hence evident that the form of a conic section is

determined by its eccentricity, and that its magnitude is
determined by the magnitude of the Latus Rectum, which
is given by the relation

SR : SX :: SA : AX.
3» Dep. The straight line FN (Fig. Art 1), drawn
from any point P of the curve at right angles to the axis,
and intersecting the axis in N, is called the Ordinate of
the point P.
If the line PN be produced to P' so that NP'=NP,
the line PNP' is a double ordinate of the curve.
The latus rectum is therefore the double ordinate pass-
ing through the focus.

Dep. The distance ANof the foot of the ordinate

from the vertex is called the Abscissa of the point P.

Dep. The distance SP is called the focal distance of

the point P.
It is also described as the radius vector drawn from the
focus.

4. Definition of the Tangent to a curve.

If a straight line^ drawn through a point P of a
curve, meet the curve again in P', and if the straight line
be turned round the point P
until the point P' approaches
indefinitely near to P, the ultimate position of the straight
line is the tangent to the curve at P.

Thus, if the straight line APP

turn round until the P
points P
and P' coincide, the line in its ultimate position
PTis the tangent at P.
 Conic Sections.

Dep. The normal at any point of a curve is the

straight line drawn through the point at right angles to
the tangent at that point.
Thus, in the figure, PG is the normal at P.
5. We have now given a general method of constructing
a conic section, and we have explained the nomenclature
which is usually employed. We proceed to demonstrate a
few of the properties which are common to all the conic
sections.
For the future the word conic will be employed as an
abbreviation for conic section.
Prop. II. If the straight line joining two points
P, P of a conic meet F, the straight line
the directrix in
FS will bisect the angle between PS and P'S produced.
8 Conies.

Draw the perpendiculars PK, P'K\ on the directrix.

Then SP : SP' :: PK : PK', (Fig. Art. 9)

w PF '.
P'F,
Therefore FS bisects the outer angle, at S^ of the tri-
:le PSP\ (Euclid, vi. a.)
Cor. If SQ bisect the angle PSP, it follows that FSQ
is a right angle.
Prop. III. The straight line, drawn from the
6.

focus in which the tangent meets the directrix,

to the point
is at right angles to the straight line drawn from the focus
to the point of contact.

In the figure of Art. 5, let the point P' move along the
curve towards P; then, as P
approaches to coincidence
with P, the straight line FPP' approximates to, and ulti-
mately becomes, the tangent at P. TP
But, when P' coin-
cides with P, the line SQ coincides with /SP, and the angle
FSPy which is ultimately TOP, becomes a right angle.
Or, in other words, the portion of the tangent intercepted
between the point of contact and the directrix, subtends
a right angle at the focus.

7. If a chord EAP
be drawn through the vertex, and
the point P be
near the vertex, the angle PSA is small,
and LSN
which is half the angle
PSN is nearly a right angle.
The angle ASE is therefore
nearly a right angle, and SEX
is a small angle, and is, AES
a fortiori^ a small angle, and "x,
vanishes when ASE is a right
angle.
As P
approaches to coinci-
dence with A, the angle LSN
becomes ultimately a right an-
gle, pnd therefore ASE is ulti-
mately a right angle.
Hence the angle EAX which
is sum oi the angles AES,
the
ASE^ is a right angle when P
coincides with A.
 Conies. 9

when
But, P
approaches to coincidence with A^ then
EAP approximates to the position of, and ultimately be-
comes, the tangent at A.
The tangent at the vertex is ther^ore at right angles to
the axis.

8. Prop. IV. No straight line can meet a conic in

more than two points.

Let P
be a point in the curve, draw any straight line
FP, join SF^ and draw SQ at right angles to SF. Draw
SP' making the angle QSP' equal to QSP\ then P' is
a point in the curve. For, since SF bisects the outer angle
at^,
SP' : SP :: P'F : PF
:: P'K' : PK-,
.-. SP' : PK' :: SP : PK,
and P' is a point in the curve.
Also, there is no other point of the curve in the straight
line FP,
For suppose if possible P' to be another point and
draw P
K" perpendicular to the directrix,
then SP' : SP :: P'K" PK ;

:: P"F PF] :

therefore FS bisects the angle between PS and P"S pro-

duced.
10 Conies.

But FS bisects the angle between Pas' and P^S pro-

duced, which is impossible unless P'' coincides with P\

9. Prop. V. The tangents at the end of a focal

chord intersect in the directrix.

For the SF, perpendicular to /SP, meets the direc-

line
trix in the same point as the tangent at P; and, since
FS is also at right angles to >SP', the tangent at P' meets
the directrix in the same point P. Conversely, if from anj;
point F in the be drawn, the chord of
directrix tangents
contact, that the straight line joining the points of con-
is,

tact, will pass through the focus and will be at right angles
to SF,
Cor. Hence it follows that the tangents at the ends
of the latus rectum pass through the foot of the directrix.

10. Prop. YL The straight lines joining the extremi-

ties of two focal chords intersect in the directrix.

If PSp, P'Sp' be the two chords, the point in which PP"

meets the directrix is obtained by bisecting the angle PaS'P'
and drawing SF at right angles to the bisecting line SQ.
But this line also bisects the angle pSp'\ therefore pp'
also passes through F,

line SF bisects the angle PSp\ and similarly,

The
if QSproduced, bisecting the angle pSp\ meet the direc-
trix in F\ the two lines Pp\ P'p will meet in F\
 Conies. 11

It is obvious that the angle FSF' is a right angle.

Cor. If the straight line bisecting PSP' meet the curve

in q" and Fq, Fq' be joined, these lines will be the
q and
tangents at q and q\ (Prop. V.)

Hence, if from a point F

in the directrix tangents be
drawn, and also any straight line FFF^ cutting the curve
in Fand F, the chord of contact will bisect the angle
FSF\
11. Prop. VII. 1/ the tangent at any point F of a
conic intersect the directrix in F, and the latus rectum
produced in i>,

SD : SF :: SA : AX,
Join SK) then, observing that FSF and FKF are right
angles, a circle can be described about FSFK, and
12 Conies.

therefore the angles SFD,

SKP are equal. j^
n
Also the angle FSD

:.
= complement
=:SPK;
the triangles
are similar, and
FSD, SPK
of DSP
F
^
k7
f j;v-<D

s
SD : SF :: SP PK :
/V

:: SA AX,:
"^
\D /

Cor. (1). If the tangent at the other end P" of the

focal chord meet the latus rectum in Z/,

SD" : SF SA AX; :: :

/. SD = SD\

Cor. (2). If DE be the perpendicular from D upon

-S'P, the triangles SDE, SFX are similar, and

SF : SX :: SD : SF
SA : AX
SR : SX;
.*. aS*-^ is equal to SR, the semi-latus rectum.

12. Prop. VIII. The tangents drawn from any

point to a conic subtend eqital angles at the focus.
Let the tangents FTP, FTP' at and P' meet the P
directrix in F
and F' and the latus rectum in and D', D
Join ST and produce it to meet the directrix in K;
then KF SD KT ST : :: :

:: Zi^' : SU,
Hence Zi^ : iO'' :: SD : ;S'i>'

:: /S'i^ : aS'Z^' by Prop, vl

.-. the angles TSF, TSF are equal.
 Conies, 13

But the angles FSP", F'SP are equal, for each is the
complement of FSF' ;

.-. the angles TSP, TSP' are equal.

Cor. Hence it follows that if perpendiculars TM,
TM' be let fall upon SP and /SP", they are equal in
length.
For the two triangles TSM^ TSM' have the angles
TMS, TSM respectively equal tothe angles TM'S,
TSM\ and the side TS common ; and therefore the other
sides are equal,
and TM= TM,
13. Prop. IX. Iffrom any point Tin the tangent
at a point P
of a conic, TM
he drawn perpendicular to
the focal distance SP, and TN
perpendicular to the
directrix,
SM TN : :: SA : AX.
14 Conies.

For, if PJTbe perpendicular to the directrix and AST^be

joined,

SM SP : TF FP :

fN PK; :

:. SM TN SP PK
: :

SA : AX.
This theorem, which is due to Professor Adams, may
be employed to prove Prop. vm.
For if, in the figure of Art. (12), TM, TM' be the per-
pendiculars from on T SP
and SP'^ and if be the TN
perpendicular on the directrix, SM
and SM' have each
the same ratio to TN^ and are therefore equal to one
another.

Hence the triangles TSM^ TSM' are equal in all re-

spects, and the angle PSP is bisected by ST.
14. Prop. X. To draw tangentsfrom any point to a
conic.

Let T be the point, and let a circle be described

about S as centre, the radius of which bears to the TN
ratio of SA AX) then, if tangents TM, TM'he drawn to
:

the circle the straight lines SM, SM\ produced if neces-

sary, will intersect the conic in the points of contact of
the tangents from T.

15. Peop. XI. IfPGthe normal at P meet t?ie axis

of the conic in G,
SG : SP :: SA : AX.

Let the tangent at P

meet the directrix in F, and the
latus rectum produced in Z>.
 Conies, 15

SPG = i\ie complement of SPF=PFS,

Then the angle
and the angle PSG =i\iQ complement of FSX=FSD ;

the triangles SDF, SPG are similar, and

.-.

SG SP SD SF SA AX, by Prop. vii.

:
',: : :: :

16. Prop. XII. // a tangent he drawn parallel to a

chord of a conic, the portionof this tangent which is
intercepted hy the tangents at the ends of the chord is
bisected at the point of contact.

Let PP' be the chord, TP, TP' the tangents, and

EQE' the tangent parallel to PP\
the focus S draw SP, SP' and SQ, and draw
From TM,
TM' perpendicular respectively to SP, SP,
Also draw from E
perpendiculars EN, EL, upon SP,
SQ, and from E' perpendiculars E'N\ EL' upon SP'
and/S'Q.

Then, since EE is parallel to PP'

TP EP
\ \\ TP' : E'P\
but TP EP
: :: TM : EN,
IG Conies,

and TP' : E'P' :: TM' : ^'iV^;

/. TM EN : :: TM' : EN';
but TM^TM', Cor. Prop, viii;
/. EN=E'N\
Again, by the same corollary,
EN= EL and E'N' -- E'L' ;

:.EL=EL\
and, the triangles ELQ^ EL'Q being similar,
EQ^EQ,
Cor. If TQ be produced to meet PP' in T,
Pr ^Q : :: TV : TQ,
and PT : E'Q :: T^F : TQ,
.\PV=P'V,
that is, PP' is bisected in V,

ffence, if tangents be drawn at the ends of any chord

qf a conic^ the point of intersection of these tangents, the
middle point of the chord, and the point of contact of the
tangent parallel to the chord, all lie in one straight line,

17. Prop. XIII. The semi4atus rectum is the harmonic

mean between the two segments of any focal chord of a
conic
Let PaS'P' be a focal chord, and draw the ordinateg
PN, P'N\
Then the triangles SPN, SP'N' are similar;
.-. SP : SP' :: SN SN' :

:: NX-SX SX-N'X :

:: SP-SR SR-SP\ :

K p
JR

X /A N
K
k
 Conies. 17

since SP, SR, SP^ are proportional to NX, SX, and

N'X.
Cor. Since SP:SP-SB = SP.SP' SP. SP - SR.SP; :

and SP' : SE-SP' = SP .SP' SE.SP-SP.SP, :

it follows that SB PP' = 2SP

. . SP'.
Hence, ifPSP', QSQ' are two focal chords, it follows
that PP' : QQ' SP.SP' SQ.SQ\
:: :

18. Prop. XIV. If from G, the point in which the

normal at P meets the axis, GL he drawn perpendicular
to SP, the length PL is equal to the semi-latus rectum.

Let the tangent at P meet the directrix in F, and join

SF.
Then PLG, PSF are similar triangles ;

PL LG SF SP.
.-. : :: :

Also SLG and SFX are similar triangles ;

.'.LG SX SG SF. : :: :

Hence PL SX SP : :: .S'^^ :

:: SA : AX, Art. (15),

but SR : SX :: SA : AX, Art. (2)
.'.PL=SR.
19. Prop. XV. A focal chord is divided harmoni-
cally at the focus and the point where it meets the
directrix.
Let PaS'P' produced meet the directrix in F, and draw
PK, P'K' perpendicular to the directrix, fig. Art. 17.

B. c. s. 2
18 Conies.

Then PF FF : :: PK : P'K'
SP : SP'
PF-SF SF-P'F; :

that is, PF, SF, and P'F are in harmonic progression, and
the line PP' is divided harmonically at S and F.

20. Prop. XVI. 1/from any point Fin the directria:

tangents be drawn, and also any straight line FPP'
cutting the curve in P
and P', the chord PP' is divided
harmonically at F
and its point of intersection with the
chord of contact.

For, if QSQ' be the chord of contact, it bisects the

angle PSP\ (cor. Prop. VL), and .*., if V be the point
of intersection of SQ and PP\
FP' : FP :: SP SP :

P'V : PV
FP'-FV FV-FP. :

Hence ^F" is an harmonic mean between FP and FF,

The last two theorems are particular cases of more
general theorems, which will appear hereafter.
 EXAMPLES.

1. Having given a point P of a conic, the tangent at P,

and the directrix, find the locus of the focus.
2. If PSQ, be a focal chord, and X the foot of the directrix,
XP and XQ, are equally inclined to the axis.
3. If a chord PQ, meet the directrix in F, SP and SQ are
equally inclined to SF.
4. If PK be the perpendicular from a point /* of a conic on
the directrix, and SK meet the tangent at the vertex in E, the '

angles SPE, KPE are equal.

5. If the tangent at P meet the directrix in F and the axis
in T, the angles K8F, FTS are equal.
6. PSP' is a focal chord, PN^ P'N' are the ordinates, and
PKf P'K' perpendiculars on the directrix ; if KN, K'N' meet in
Z, the triangle LNN' is isosceles.

7. The a point on a conic is equal to the

focal distance of
length of the ordinate produced to meet the tangent at the end
of the latus rectum.
8. The normal at any point bears to the semi-latus rectum
the ratio of the focal distance of the point to the distance of the
focus from the tangent.
9. Given the focus and directrix, and a tangent, find the
point of contact.
10. The chord is given in length ; prove that, if
of a conic
this length exceed the latus rectum, the distance from the di-
rectrix of the middle point of the chord is least when the chord
passes through the focus.
11. The portion of any tangent to a conic, intercepted be-
tween two fixed tangents, subtends a constant angle at the focus.
12. Given two points of a conic, and the directrix, find the
locus of the focus.
13. From any fixfed point in the axis a line is drawn per-
pendicular to the tangent at P
and meeting SP in R ; the locus
of ^ is a circle.
14. If the tangent at the end of the latus rectum meet the
tangent at the vertex in T, AS. AT—
15. TP, TQ are the tangents at the points P, Q of a conic
and PQ, meets the directrix in R\ prove that RST is a right
angle.
2—2
20 Examples,

16. SR being the serai-latus rectum, if RA meet the direo-

trix in E^ and iS^ meet the tangent at the vertex in T,

AT^AS.
17. If from any point T, in the tangent at P, TM be drawn
perpendicular to SP, and TN perpendicular to the transverse
axis, meeting the curve in 72, SM=SR.
18. If the chords PQ, P'Q meet the directrix in F and F\
the angle FSF' is half PSP'.
19. If PN be the ordinate, PO the normal, and GL the
perpendicular from G upon SP,
GL : PN :: SA : AX.
20. If normals be drawn at the ends of a focal chord, a line
through their intersection parallel to the axis will bisect the
chord.

21. If PSp be a focal chord of a conic, Q any point of the

conic, and if PQ, pQ meet the directrix in D and E, DSE is a
right angle.
[This theorem includes, as particular cases, theorems subse-
quently given in Articles 25, 27, 53, and 90.]
22. If PSP' be a focal chord, and RR' the latus rectum,
A:SP.SP'=^RR' ,PP\
23. If ^ be the foot of the perpendicular let fall upon PSP'
from the point of intersection of the normals at P and P\
PE==SP' SindP'E=SP.
24. If a circle be described on the latus rectum as diameter,
and if the common tangent to the conic and circle touch the
conic in P and the circle in Q, the angle PSQ is bisected by the
latus rectum. (Refer to Cor. 2. Art. 11.)

25. Given two points, the focus, and the eccentricity,

determine the position of the axis.

26. If a chord PQ
subtend a constant angle at the focus,
the locus of the intersection of the tangents at and Q is a conic P
with the same focus and directrix,
27. Pp is any chord of a conic, PG, pg the normals, G, g
being on the axis GL, gl are perpendiculars on Pp shew that
; ;

PL and pi are equal to one another.

 CHAPTER II.

THE PARABOLA.

Dep. a parabola is the curve traced out by a point

which moves in such a manfier that its distance from a
given point is always equal to its distance from a given
straight line.

Tracing the Curve.

K /^/^/
/^
yfiP
y

Ay [/^
X A/f ^

JE

'^
21. Let S be the focus, EX
the directrix, and the SX
perpendicular on EX, Then, bisecting SX
in A^ the point
A is the vertex and, if from any point
; E
in the directrix,
EAP, ESL be drawn, and from S the straight line SP
meeting EA produced in P, and making the angle PSL
equal to LSN, we obtafn {as in Art. (1)}, a point in the P
curve.
For PL : PK SA AX,
v. :

and .\PL = PK,

•^5 The Parabola,

But SF = PL, and .'. SP = PK.

Again, drawing EP' parallel to the axis and meeting in
P' the line PS
produced, we obtain the other extremity of
the focal chord PSP'.
For the angle ESP' = PSL = PLS
^SEP\
and :.SP' = PE,
and P' is a point in the parabola.
The curve lies wholly on the same side of the directrix

for, if P' be a point on the other side, and SN

be perpen-
dicular toF'K, SP' is greater than P'N, and therefore is
greater than P'K.
Again, a straight hne parallel to the axis meets the
curve in one point only.
For, if possible, let P" be another point of the curve in
KP produced.
Then SP = PK2indSP'--^P"K;
:.PP''=SP''-SP,
or PP''+SP = SP\
which is impossible.
Lastly, the curve has infinite branches; for, since
PS= PK= PL, it follows that P
is the centre of the circle

passing through K, S, and L, and therefore the angle KSL

in a semicircle is a right angle ; hence it follows that, as E
approaches X, the point K moves away from X, and there-
fore the point P
moves away from the axis, its distance
becoming larger as the distance diminishes. SinceEX
ESK a right angle the rectangle
is EX KX
is equal to
.

SX^, and therefore when EX

is indefinitely small, is KX
indefinitely large. The curve therefore has two branches
proceeding to infinity.
 The Parabola. 23

22. Prop. I. The distance from the focus of a point

inside a parabola and of a point outside is greater
is less,
than its distarice from the directrix.

If Q be the point
inside, let fall the per- ^
pendicular on QPK ;

the directrix, meeting ^

the curve in P.

lL'\ie\iSP + PQ>SQ,
hvit ;SP + PQ x:

-=PK-^PQ = QK,

If Q be outside, and
between P and K^
SQ'-hPQ'>SP,
.'.SQ'>Q'K.
If Q' lie in PK produced,
SQ4.SP>PQ\
and :.SQ>KQ\
23. Prop. II. The Latus Rectum = 4: AS.
.

For if. Fig. Art. 22, LSU

be the Latus Rectum, draw-
ing LK' at right angles to the directrix, we have
LS=LK'^SX=2AS,
.'.LSr = 4.AS.
24. Mechanical construction of the Parabola.
Take a rigid bar A|-
EKL, of which the por-
tions UK, KL are at right j^
angles to each other, and
fasten a string to the
end X, the length of
which is LK. Then if

the other end of the

strmg be fastened to aS',
and the bar be made to slide along the directrix, a pencil
at P, keeping the string stretched against the bar, will
trace out a portion of a parabola.
24 The Parabola,

25. Prop. III. If PN he the ordinate of a point P,

PN'^=4:AS.AN,
Draw the lines PAF,
J^
-P L
ESL, KPL, and join
/^
SK,
Then SP = PL = PK. \ \
Hence KSL,^nd /. XjSJE,

X ^ >%^
Y^
is a right angle,
2LndEX.KX=SX'
= 4AS'^; /^ Jsr

J2 /^
also P/
AN AX PiV^ EX : :: :

or AN ^^ Pm EX : :: : . ^X,
4AS.AN : 4AS^ :: PiV^2 . 4^^2.
.-. PN^=4AS. AN
26. Conversely, if it known that
be at every point of a curve
the relation FN^^ --4:AS. ^iV holds true, the curve is a parabola.
In NA produced take AX equal to AS, draw EXK at right
angles to XN, and KPL parallel to XN; also draw PAH, and ESL.
Then AN : AX :: PN : EX,
or AN AS: PN^ EX KX, :: : , .

but Pm=^4AS.AN',
r.EX.KX=4:AS^=SX^.
Hence KSE, and .•. ESL, is a right angle,
and, smce SA^AX, PL = PK,
and therefore P is the centre of the circle passing through
K, S, and L,
Hence it follows that SP = PK, which is the definition of a
parabola.

27. Prop. IV. If from the ends of a focal chord

perpendiculars he let fall upon the directrix, the inter-
cepted portion of the directrix subtends a right angle at
the focus.
For, if the straight line through parallel to the axis E
meet PS in P', P' is the other extremity of the focal
chord PSy and, as in Art. 25, is a right angle. KSE
Cor. Since ES
bisects the angle ASP', Art. 21, it

follows that KS
bisects the angle ASF,
 The Parabola. 2o

28. Prop. V. The tangent at any point P

bisects the
angle between th^e focal distance SP and the perpendicular
PK on the directrix.
Let F
be the point in
which the tangent meets the
directrix, and join SF.

We have shewn, (Art. 6)

that FSP is a right angle,
and, since SP = PK, and PF
is common to the right-angled
triangles SPF, KPF, it fol-
lows that these triangles are
equal in all respects, and
therefore the angle

SPF=FPK.

In other words, the tangent at any point is eqvMly

inclined to the focal distance and the axis.

CoR. It has been shewn, in Art. (9\ that the tangents at

the ends of a focal chord intersect in the directrix, and there-
fore, if PS produced meet the curve in P\ FP' is the tangent at
P\ and bisects the angle between SP' and the perpendicular
from P' on the directrix.

29. Prop. VI. The tangents at the ends of a focal

chord intersect at right angles in the directrix.
Let PSP' be the chord, and
PF, P'F the tangents meeting the
directrix in F.
Let fall the perpendiculars PK,
PK\ 2iiid ioiu jSK, SK\
The angle P'SK'=^PSX
= iSPK=SPF,
.-. SK is parallel toPF,
and, similarly, SKis parallel to P'F,
But (Art. 27) KSK is a right angle;
FFP' is a right angle.
26 The Parabola.
30. Prop. VII. If the tangent at any point P of a para-
hola meet the axis in T, and PN he the ordinate of P^ then
AT=AN.
Draw PK perpen-
dicular to the directrix.

The angle SPT

= TPK
= PTS,
:. ST=SP
= PK
X A\ S
= NX,
But ST=^SA + AT,
and NX=--AN-hAX;
.'. since SA = AX,
AT=AN,
Def. The line NT is called the sub-tangent
The sub-tangent is therefore twice the abscissa of the
point of contact.
31 Prop. VIII. The foot of the perpendicular from
the focus on the tangent at any point qf a parabola lies P
on the tangent at the vertex, and the perpendicular is
a rfiean proportional between SP and SA.
Taking the figure of the previous article, join SK
meeting Y.PTm
Then SP = PK, and PF is common to the two tri-
angles .S'P F, iTP F;
also the angle SPY= YPK\
.-.the angle FP-PF^,
aS'

and SY\% perpendicular to PT.

Also aS'F=^F, and ^^ = ^X,.-.aS'F: YKv.SA .AX,
and ^ F is parallel to KX,
Hence, ^ F is at right angles to AS, and is therefore
the tangent at the vertex.
Again, the angle SP Y=STY=SYA, and the triangles
SP F, S YA are therefore similar
.\SP : SY :: SY : .S'^,

or SY^=-.SP ,SA,
 The Parabola. 27

32. Prop. IX. In the parabola ilie si4bnormal is

constant and equal to the semi-latus Rectum.

Def. The distance between the foot of the ordinate

of P and the point in which the normal at P meets the
axis is called the subnormal.

K P Z

T X
v/\ A. JS N G

In the figure PG is the normal and PTthe tangent.

It has been shewn that the angle SPK\9, bisected by

PT, and hence it follows that SPL
is bisected by PG,

and that the angle SPG^GPL^PGS;

hence SG = SP = ST
= SA-^AT=SA+AN
= '2AS-hSN;
.*. the subnormal NG = 2AS.
33. CoR. If Gl be drawn perpendicular to SP,
the angle GPl = i\\Q complement of SPT,
= the complement of STPf
= PGN,
and the two right-angled triangles GPN, GPl have their angles
equal and the side GP common ; hence the triangles are equal,
and
Pl = NG = 2AS
= the semi4atus Rectum.

It has been already shewn, Art. (18), that this property is a

general property of all conies.
28 The Parabola.
34. Prop. X. To draw tangents to a parabola from
an external point.
For this purpose we may employ the general construc-
tion given in Art. (14), or, for the special case of the
parabola, the following construction.

Let Q be the external point, join SQ^ and upon SQ as

diameter describe a circle intersecting the tangent at the
vertex in Yand Y'. Join YQ, Y'Q,\ these are tangents
to the parabola.
Draw aSP, so as to make the angle YSP equal to YSA,
and to meet YQ in P, and let fall the perpendicular PN
upon the axis.
Then, SYQ is a right angle, since it is the angle in a
semicircle, and, T being the point in which Q Y produced
meets the axis, the two triangles 8 YP, SYT are equal in
all respects
.-. AS'P=AS'7;and YT^YP,
But -^1 Fis parallel to PN\
,\AT=AN.
Hence SP=ST=SA+AT
= AX-hAN
=NX,
and P is a point in the parabola.
Moreover, if PK be perpendicular to the directrix, the
angle SPY=STP = YPK,
and P F is the tangent at P. Art. (28).
Similarly, by making the angle Y'SP' equal to ASY\
we obtain the point of contact of the other tangent Q Y',
 The Parabola. 29

35. Prop. XI. If from a point Q tangents QP, QP'

he drawn to a parabola, the two triangles S Q, SQP' are
similar, and tSQ is a mean proportional between SP
andSP,

K p^£^

Y
J^V
/
\v

T J V
}A wV s jsr

Produce PQ
to meet the axis in T, and draw SY, SY'
perpendicularly on the tangents. Then and Y' are Y
points in the tangent at A,

The angle SPQ^STY

=.SYA
=^SQP\
since aS', Y% Y, Q are points on a circle, and SYA, SQP'
are in the same segment.

Also, by the theorem of Art. (12), the angle

PSQ=QSP';
therefore the triangles PSQ, QSP' are similar, and

SP : SQ :: SQ : SP\

36. From the theorem of Art. 35 the following, which

is often useful, immediately follows.

If from any points in a given tangent of a parabola^

tangents be drawn to the curve, the angles which these
tangents make with the focal distances of the points from
which they are drawn are all equal.
30 The Parabola.
For each of them, by the tlieorem, is equal to the angle
between the given tangent and the focal distance of the
point of contact.

37. Since the two triangles PSQ, QSP' are similar, we

have

PQ :P'Q: :SP: SQ
and m '.P'Q: : SQ SP\
:

.-. PQ" P'Q^ ::SP :SP';

that is, the squares of the tangents from any point are pro-
portional to the focal distances of the points of contact.

This will be found to be a particular case of a subsequent

Theorem.

38. Prop. XII. The external angle between two tart-

gents is half the angle subtended at the focus by the chord
of contact.
Let the tangents at P and P' intersect each other in Q
and the axis ASN in T and T\
Join SP, SP'; then the angles SPT, STP are equal,
and .-. STP is half the angle PSN-, similarly STP is
half P'SN.

But TQT is equal to the difference between and STP

STP\ and is therefore equal to half the difference be-
tween PSN and PSN, that is to half the angle PSP\
Hence, joining SQ, TQT is equal to each of the angles
PSQ, P'SQ.
 The Parabola, 31

39. Prop. XIII. The tangents drawn to a parabola

from any point Tuake the same angles, respectively with ,

the axis and the focal distance of the point.

Let QP, QP' be the tangents join SP, and draw;

QE
and meeting SP in E.
parallel to the axis,

Then, if PQ meet the axis in T, the angle

EQP=STP=SPQ
= SQP\ Art. (36).

^. e. QP
and QP' respectively make the same angles
with the axis and with QS.

40. Conceive a parabola to be drawn passing through Q,

having S for its focus, SN for its axis, and its vertex on the same
side of S as the vertex A of the given parabola. Then the normal
at Q to this new parabola bisects the angle SQE ; therefore the
angles which QP and QP make with the normal at Q are equal.

Hence the theorem,

If from any point in a parabola^ tangents be drawn to a

confocal and co-axial parabola, the normal at the point will bisect
the angle between the tangents.

In this enunciation the words co-axial and confocal are

intended to imply, not merely the coincidence of the axes, but
also that the vertices of the two parabolas are on the same side
of their common focus.

The reason for this will appear when we shall have discussed
the analogous property of the ellipse.
32 The Parabola
41. Prop. XIY. The circle passing through the
points of intersection of three tangents passes also through
thefocu^.

Let Q, P, (^ be the three points of contact, and

F, T, F' the mtersections of the tangents.

In Art (35) it has been shewn that, if PP, FQ, be tan-

gents, the angle

SQF=SFP,
Similarly TQ, TQ' being tangents, the angle

SQT=STQ\
hence the angle SFF' or SFP = SQT,
= STF\

and a circle can be drawn through S, P, T, and F\

42. Dep. a straight line drawn parallel to the axis

through any point of a parabola is called a diameter.
 The Parabola, 33

Prop. If from, any point T tangents TQ, TQ' he

XV.
drawn a parabola, the point T is equidistant from the
to
diameters passing through Q and Q\ and tJie diameter
drawn through the point T bisects the chord of contact.
Join SQ, SQ', and draw TM, TM' perpendicular re-
spectively to SQ and SQ.

0^

Also draw NTN' perpendicular to the diameters

through Q and Q', and meeting those diameters in N
and N\
Then, since TS bisects the angle QSQ!,
TM=TM';
and, since TQ bisects the angle SQN,
TN= TM.
Similarly TN'= TM',
.'. TN= TN\
Again, join QQ\ and draw the diameter TV meeting
QQ in F; also letQT produced meet Q'N' in R ;

then QV VQ QT TR
: :; :

:: TN TN\:

since the triangles QTN, RTN' are similar ;

:,qv=vQ;.
Hence the diameter through the middle point of a
chord passes, when produced, through the point of inter-
section of the tangents at the ends of the chord.

It should be noticed that any straight line drawn

throupfh T and terminated by QN
and Q'N' is bisected
at T
B. C. S. 3
34 The Parabola.
43. Prop. XYI. Any diameter bisects all chords
parallel to the tangent at its exty^emity^ and passes through
the point of intersection of the tangents at the ends of any
of these chords.
Let QQ' be a chord parallel to the tangent at P, and
through the point of intersection T of the tangents at
Q and Q draw FTF' parallel to QQ' and terminated at
F and Fby the diameters through Q and Q\
Let the tangent at P meet TQ, TQ' in E and E\ and
QF. Q'F' in G and G\

Then EG : TF :: EQ : TQ
:: EQ' : TQ'
:: E'G' : TF.
But TF= TF\ since, Art. (42), T is equidistant from
QG and Q'(?',

:.EG = E'G\
Also, EP = EG^ since ^ is equidistant from Q(t and PF,
/. EP=E'P and GP = PG\
Hence, P V being the diameter at P,
Qr=FQ^
Again, since T, P, F are each equidistant from the
parallel straight lines QF, Q'F, it follows that is a TPV
straight line, or that the diameter VP passes through T
 The Parabola. 35

We have shewn that GB, EP, PE\ EG' are all equal,
and we hence infer that

EE=\GG'=\QQ',
and consequently that TP = \TV or that TP=PV.
Hence it appears^ that the diameter through the point
of intersection of a pair of tangents parses through the
point of contact of the tangent parallel to the chord of
contact, and also through the middle point of the chord of
contact; and that the portion of the diameter between the
point of intersection of the tangents and the middle point
of the chord of contact is bisected at the point of contact
of the parallel tangent.

We may observe that in proving that EE' is bisected

at P, we have demonstrated a theorem already shewn,
Art. (IG), to be true for all conies.

44. Def. The line Q V, parallel to the tangent at P,

and terminated by the diameter P V, is called an ordinate
of that diameter, and QQ' is the double ordinate. The
point P, the end of the diameter, is called its vertex.

We
observe that tangents at the ends of any chord
intersect in the diameter which bisects the chord,and that
the distance of this point from the vertex is equal to the
distance of the vertex from the middle point of the chord.

Def. The chord through the focus parallel to the

tangent at any point is called the parameter of the
diameter passing through the point.

Prop. XVII. The parameter of any diameter is

four times the focal distance of the vertex of that dia-
meter.

Let
^
P
be the vertex, and QSQ' the parameter, the T
point of intersection of the tangents at Q and Q', and
FPF' the tangent at P.
36 Ttie Parabola.

Then, since FS and F'S bisect respectively the angles

PSQ, PSQ\ FSF' is a right angle, and, P being the

middle point ofFF\ SP = PF=PF\
Hence QQ\ which is double FF\ is four times SP.

45. Jf Q VQ' he a douUe ordinate of a

Prop. XVIII.
diameter PV, QV is
a mean proportional between P
and the parameter of P,

Let FPF be the tangent at P, and draw the parameter

througli S meetingP V in U,
The angle SUT=FPU=SPF\ Art. 28;
 The Parabola. 37
and, since the angles SFQ, SPF are equal (Art. 35), it
follows that the angles SFTy SPF are equal
.*. SUT=SFTy2iJid Z7is a point in the circle passing
through SFTF\
Hence, Q V being twice PF,
QV^ = 4:PF^ = 4.PU.PT',
but PU=SP,
for the angle SUP = FP U= SPF' = PSU ;

and PT=PV,
:.QF^ = 4SP.PF.
46. Prop. XIX. If Q VQ' be a double ordinate of a
diameter P
F", and QD the perpendicular from Q upon

P Vj QD is a Tnean proportional between V and tfie P

latus rectum.

Let the tangent at P meet the tangent at the vertex in

y, and join SY.
The angle QVD=SPY=SYA, and therefore the
triangles Q VD, SA Y are similar

and QU' QV^ : AS^ : SY^

AS^ : AS.SP
AS : SP
4.AS.PV : ^P,PV,
but Qn=4:SP.PV',
QD^=4.AS.PV.
38 The Parabola.
47. Prop. XX. If from any point, within or with-
out a parabola, two straight lines he drawn in given
directions and intersecting the curve^ the ratio of the
rectangles of the segments is independent of the position of
the point.
O

From any point draw a straight line intersecting the

parabola in Q and Q', and draw the diameter OE, meeting
the curve in E,

If PF be the diameter bisecting QQ\ and EU the

ordinate, OQ,OQ' = OV^-Q V^
=EU''-QV^=^4J^P^PU-4.SP.PV
= 4:SP.0E.
Similarly, if ORR' be any other intersecting line and P'
the vertex of the diameter bisecting RR',
0R.0R' = 4SP\0E.
.-. OQ.OQf OR, OR' ^P
: :: : SP',
that is, the ratio of the rectangles depends only on the
positions of P
and P', and, if the lines OQQ', ORR' are
drawn parallel to given straight lines, these points P, P'
are fixed.
It will be easily seen that the proof is the same if the
point O be within the parabola.
If the lines OQQ!, ORR be moved parallel to themselves
 The Parabola, 39

until they become the tangents at P and P', we shall then

obtain, if these tangents intersect in T,

a result previously obtained (Art. 37).

Again if QSQ', RSR' be the focal chords parallel to TP
and TP\ it follows that
TP2 : TP'^ :: QS.SQ' : ES.SR\
/., cor. Art. 17, TP^ : TP'' ;: QQ' : ER\
48. Prop. XXI. If from a point 0, outside a paror-
bola, a tangent OM, and a chord GAB be drawn, and if
the diameter ME meet the chord in E,
OE^==OA.OB,

Let P be the point of contact of the tangent parallel to

GAB, and let GM, MB meet this tangent in T and F.
Draw jTF parallel to the axis and meeting PJf in V;
then GA GB . : GM^ :: TP' : TM^ (Art. 47),

:: rP2 : TM^,
since PM is bisected in V ;

also TF : TM :: GE GM :

/. GE'^ = GA.GB.
40 The Parabola.
Cor. If AL, BNhe the ordinates, parallel to OM, of
A, and B, ML, MB, and MN are proportional to OA, OE
and OB, and therefore
ME'' = ML.MN.
This theorem may be also stated in the following form
If a chord ABof a parabola intersect a diameter in
the point E, the distance of the point Efrom the tangent at
tJie end of the diameter is a mean proportional between

the distances of the points A and B from the same tan-

gent.

49. Prop. XXII. If a circle intersect a parabola in

four points, the two straight lines constituting any one (f
the three pairs of the chords of intersection are equally
inclined to the axis.
Let Q, Q\ B, B' be the four points of intersection ;

then OQ.OQ'^OB.OR,
and therefore aS'P, SP' are equal, Art. (47).

But, if SP, SP' he equal, the points P, P' are on

opposite sides of, and are equidistant from the axis, and
the tangents at P
and P' are therefore equally inclined to
the axis.
Hence the chords Q,Q\ RR\
which are parallel to these
tangents, are equally inclined to the axis.
 The Parabola. 41

In the same manner it may be shewn that QR, Q'R'

are equally inclined to- the axis, as also QR\ Q'R*

50. Conversely, if two chords QQ', RH!, which are not

parallel, make equal drawn
angles with the axis, a circle can be
through 0,0! R'R,
For, the chords intersect in 0, and
if OE be drawn parallel
to the axis and meeting the curve in E^ it may be shewn as
above that
OQ OQ! =4SP.0E and OR 0R'==4:SP' OE,
. . .

P and P' being the vertices of the diameters bisecting the

chords.
But the tangents at P and P'^ which are parallel to the
chords, are equally inclined to the axis, and therefore SP m equal
to^P'.
Hence OQ. OQ'=OR ,0R\
and therefore a circle can be drawn through the points Q, Q', R, K.
If the two chords are both perpendicular to the axis, it is
obvious that a circle can be drawn through their extremities, and
this is the only case in which a circle can be drawn through the
extremities of parallel chords.

EXAMPLES.
1. Find the locus of the centre of a circle which passes
through a given point and touches a given straight line.

2. Draw a tangent to a parabola, making a given angle with

the axis.

3. If the tangent at P meet the tangent at the vertex in F,

AY'^^AS.AN.
4. If the normal at P meet the axis in Gj the focus is equi-
distant from the tangent at P and the straight line through G
parallel to the tangent.

5. Given the focus, the position of the axis, and a tangent,

construct the parabola.

6. Find the locus of the centre of a circle which touches a

given straight line and a given circle.

7. Construct a parabola which has a given focus, and two

given tangents.
 42 The Parabola,
8. The distance of any point on a parabola from the focus
isequal to the length of the ordinate at that point produced to
meet the tangent at the end of the latus rectum.
9. PT being the tangent at P, meeting the axis in T, and
PiVthe ordinate, prove that TY.TP=TS. TN.
10. If SE be the perpendicular from the focus on the normal
at P, shew that
SE'' = AN.SP.
11. The locus of the vertices of all parabolas, which have a
common focus and a common tangent, is a circle.

12. Having given the focus, the length of the latus rectum,
and a tangent, construct the parabola.
13. If PSP' be a focal chord, and PxV, P'N' the ordinates,
shew that
AN.AN'^A^K
Shew also that the latus rectum is a mean proportional between
the double ordinates.

14. The locus of the middle points of the focal chords of a

parabola is another parabola.
15. Shew that in general two parabolas can be drawn having
a given straight line for directrix, and passing through two
given points on the same side of the line.

16. Pp
a chord perpendicular to the axis, and the perpen-
is

dicular from on the tangent at P meets the diameter through

'p

P in i2 ; prove that RP is equal to the latus rectum, and find the

locus of R,

17. Having given the focus, describe a parabola passing

through two given points.
18. The circle on any focal distance as diameter touches the
tangent at the vertex.

19. The circle on any focal chord as diameter touches the

directrix.

20. A point moves so that its shortest distance from a given

circle is equal to its distancefrom a given diameter of the circle;
prove that the locus is a parabola, the focus of which coincides
with the centre of the circle,
21. Find the locus of a point which moves so that its shortest
distance from a given circle is equal to its distance from a given
straight line.
 Examples, 43
22. If APC be a sector of a circle, of which the radius
CA is fixed, and a circle be described, touching the radii (74,
CP, and the arc AP^ the locus of the centre of this circle is a
parabola.
23. If from the focus /S^ SY^ SZ be perpen-
of a parabola,
diculars drawn to the tangent and normal at any point, YZ is
parallel to the diameter,

24. Prove that the locus of the foot of the perpendicular

from the focus on the normal is a parabola.
25. If PG be the normal, and GL the perpendicular from G
upon SP, prove that GL is equal to the ordinate PN,
26. Given the focus, a point P on the curve, and the length
of the perpendicular from the focus on the tangent at P, find the
vertex.
27. A circle is described on the latus rectum as diameter,
and a common tangent QP is drawn to it and the parabola shew :

that SPf SQ make equal angles with the latus rectum.

28. G is the foot of the normal at a point P of the parabola,
Q is the middle point of SG, and X is the foot of the directrix :

prove that
QX''-QP^=4:AS^
29. If PG the normal at P meet the axis in G, and if PF,
PHf lines equally inclined to PG, meet the axis in F and H, the
length SG is a mean proportional between SF and SH,
30. A
triangle ABC circumscribes a parabola whose focus is
S, and through A, J5, (7, lines are drawn respectively perpen-
dicular to SA, SB, SC ; shew that these pass through one point.

31. If PQ be the normal at P meeting the curve in Q, and

if the chord PE be drawn so that PjR, PQ are equally inclined
to the axis, PRQ is a right angle.
32. PN
is a semi-ordinate of a parabola, and is taken AM
on the other side of the vertex along the axis equal to ^iV; from
any point Q in PiV, QR is drawn parallel to the axis meeting the
curve in E ; prove that the lines MF^ AQ will intersect in the
parabola.
33. Having given two points of a parabola, the direction of
the axis, and the tangent at one of the points, construct the
parabola.

34. Having given the vertex of a diameter, and a corre-

sponding double ordinate, construct the parabola.
44 The Parabola,
35. PM
an ordinate of a point P ; a straight line parallel
is

to the axis bisects PM, and meets the curve in Q ; meets MQ

the tangent at the vertex in T; prove that SAT=2PM.

36. AB, CDare two parallel straight lines given in position,

and AO perpendicular to both, A and C being given points ;
is

in CD any point Q is taken, and in A Q, produced if necessary, a

point P is taken, such that the distance of P from is equal AB
to CQ ; prove that the locus of P is a parabola.
37. If the tangent and normal at a point P of a parabola
meet the tangent at the vertex in K
and L respectively, prove
that
KL^ : SP'^ :: SP-AS : AS,
38. Having given the length of a focal chord, find its
position.

39. If the ordinate of a point P bisects the subnormal of a

point P'f prove that the ordinate of P is equal to the normal
ofP'.

40. A parabola being traced on a plane, find its axis and

vertex.

41. If PVy P'V be two diameters, and PV\ FV ordiuates

to these diameters,
PV==P'V\
42. If one side of a triangle be parallel to the axis of a
parabola, the other sides will be in the ratio of the tangents
parallel to them.
43. If PSp, QSq be focal chords,
PS.Sp : QS.Sq :: Pp : Qq.

44. Q VQ^ is an ordinate of a diameter PV, and any chord

PR meets QQ^ in iV, and the diameter through Q in L ; prove
that
PL^=PN.PR.
45.Describe a parabola passing through three given points,
and having its axis parallel to a given line.
46. It AP, AQ he two chords drawn from the vertex at
right angles to each other, and PN^ QM
be ordinates, the latus
rectum is a mean proportional between AN and AM.
47. a focal chord of a parabola ; prove that A P, A}}
PSp is

meet the rectum in two points whose distances from the

latus
focus are equal to the ordinates of p and P respectively.
 Examples. 45
48. A
chord PQ of a parabola is normal to the parabola at
P, and the angle PSQ, is a right angle ; shew that SQ,=^2SP.
49. From any point Q in the line BQ which is perpendicular
to the axis CAB of a parabola, vertex A, QR is drawn parallel
to the axis to meet the curve in i2 prove that if ;
CA be equal to
AB, the lines AQ, CR will meet on the parabola.
60. From the vertex of a parabola a perpendicular is drawn
on the tangent at any point ; prove that the locus of its inter-
section with the diameter through the point is a straight line.

61. two tangents to a parabola be drawn from any point

If
and if any other tangent intersect these two in P and
in its axis,

e, prove that ^^ = 5^.

52. 7* is a point on the tangent at P, such that the perpen-
dicular from T on SP is of constant length ; prove that the locus

of T is a parabola.
If the constant length be 2AS, prove that the vertex of the
locus is on the directrix.

53. Given a chord of a parabola in magnitude and position;

and the point in which the axis cuts the chord, the locus of the
vertex is a circle.

64.If the normal at a point P of a parabola meet the curve

in Q,and the tangents at P and Q intersect in Tj prove that T
and P are equidistant from the directrix.
b^. If TP^ TQ be tangents to a parabola, such that the
chord PQ is normal at P,
PQ PT PN AN, : :: :

PN and AN being the ordinate and abscissa.

66. If two equal tangents to a parabola be cut by a third
tangent, the alternate segments of the two tangents will be equal.

67. If AP
be a chord through the vertex, and if PX, per-
pendicular to AP, and PO, the normal
at P, meet the axis in
L, respectively, 6^Z=half the latus rectum.

58. If PSQ, be a focal chord, A the vertex, and PA, QA be

produced to meet the directrix in P', Ql respectively, then P'SQ'
will be a right angle.

69. The tangents at P and Q intersect in T, and the tangent

at 7? intersects TP and TQ in C and D prove that ;

PC CT CR RD
I :: TD DQ. : :: :
46 The Parabola,
60. From any point D in the latus rectum of a parabola, a
straight line DP is drawn, parallel to the axis, to meet the curve
in P ; if X be the foot of the directrix, and A the vertex, prove
that AD^ XP intersect in the parabola.

61. PSp a focal chord, and upon PS and jiS as diameters

is

circles are described ;

prove that the length of either of their
common tangents is a mean proportional between AS and Pp.

62. If ^Q
be a chord of a parabola through the vertex A,
and QR be drawn perpendicular to AQ to meet the axis in R\
prove that AR will be equal to the chord through the focus
parallel to A Q.
63. from any point P of a circle, PC be drawn to the
If
centre and a chord PQ be drawn parallel to the diameter AB^
(7,

and bisected in i2; shew that the locus of the intersection of CP

and ARiB parabola. di,

64. A circle, the diameter of which is three-fourths of the

latus rectum, is described about the vertex -4 of a parabola as
centre ;
prove that the common chord bisects AS.
65. Shew that straight lines drawn perpendicular to the
tangents of a parabola through the points where they meet a
given fixed line perpendicular to the axis are in general tangents
to a confocal parabola.

66. If QR be a double ordinate, and PD a, straight line

drawn parallel to the axis from any point P of the curve, and
meeting QR in D, prove, from Art. 25, that
QD.RJD^AAS.PD.
67.Prove, by help of the preceding theorem, that, if QQ' be
a chord parallel to the tangent at P, QQ' is bisected by PD, and
hence determine the locus of the middle point of a series of
parallel chords.

68. If a parabola touch the sides of an equilateral triangle,

the focal distance of any vertex of the triangle passes through the
point of contact of the opposite side.

69. Find the locus of the foci of the parabolas which have a
common vertex and a common tangent.

70. From the points where the normals to a parabola meet

the axis, lines are drawn perpendicular to the normals shew :

that these lines will be tangents to an equal parabola.

 Examples. 47
71. Inscribe in a given parabola a triangle having its sides
parallel to three given straight lines.

72. PNP' is a double ordinate, and through a point of the

parabola RQL is drawn perpendicular to PP' and meeting PAy or
PA produced in R ;
prove that
PN'.NL ::LR:RQ.
73. PNP' is a double ordinate, and through R, a point in the
tangent at P, RQM is drawn perpendicular to PP^ and meeting

the curve in Q ;
prove that
QM :QR:: P'M : PM,
74. If from the point of contact of a tangent to a parabola,
a chord be drawn, and a line parallel to the axis meeting the
chord, the tangent, and the curve, shew that this line will be
divided by them in the same ratio as it divides the chord.

75. PSp
a focal chord of a parabola, i2Z) is the directrix
is

meeting the axis in D, Q is any point in the curve ; prove that if

QP, Qp produced meet the du-ectrix in R, r, half the latus rectum
will be a mean proportional between and Dr. DR
76. A
chord of a parabola is drawn parallel to a given
straight line,and on this chord as diameter a circle is described;
prove that the distance between the middle points of this chord,
and of the chord joining the other two points of intersection of the
circle and parabola, will be of constant length.

77. common tangent at P,

If a circle and a parabola have a
and intersect in Q and R\ and
QV, TJR be drawn parallel to
if

the axis of the parabola meeting the circle in F and TJ respec-

tively, then will F^ be parallel to the tangent at P.

78. If PF
be the diameter through any point P, Q F a semi-
ordinate, Q' another point in the curve, and Q'P cut Q F in R^
and <^R! the diameter through Q' meet in R'y then QF
YR. VR' = QV\
79. PQ, PR are any two chords; PQ meets the diameter
through R in the point P, and PR meets the diameter through
Q in ^ ;
prove that £F is parallel to the tangent at P.

80. If parallel chords be intersected by a diameter, the dis-

tances of the points of intersection from the vertex of the diameter
are in the ratio of the rectangles contained by the segments of
the chords.
48 The Parabola,
81. If tangents be drawn to a parabola from any point P in
the latus rectum, and if Q, Q' be the points of contact, the semi-
latus rectum is a geometric mean between the ordinates of Q and
Q\ and the distance of P from the axis is an arithmetic mean
between the same ordinates.
82. If A', B\ C be the middle points of the sides of a tri-
angle ABC, and a parabola drawn through A\ B\ meet the C
sides again in A'\ B\ C", then will the lines AA", BB", CC"
be parallel to each other.

83. A circle passing through the focus cuts the parabola in

two points. Prove that the angle between the tangents to the
circle at those points is four times the angle between the tangents
to the parabola at the same points.

84. The locus of the points of intersection of normals at the

extremities of focal chords of a parabola is another parabola.

85. Having given the vertex, a tangent, and its point of

contact, construct the parabola.

86. PSi^ is a focal chord of a parabola shew that the dis- ;

tance of the point of intersection of the normals at P and p from

the directrix varies as the rectangle contained by PS, pS.

87. TP, TQ are tangents to a parabola at P and Q, and is

the centre of the circle circumscribing PTQ ;

prove that TSO is

a right angle,

88. P is any point of a parabola whose vertex is A, and

through the focus S the chord QSQ' is drawn parallel to AP
PNf QM, Q'M\ being perpendicular to the axis, shew that is SM
a mean proportional between AM, AN, and that
MM' = AP,
89. If a circle cut a parabola in four points, two on one side
of the axis, and two on the other, the sum of the ordinates of the
first two is equal to the sum of the ordinates of the other two
points.

Extend this theorem which three of the points

to the case in
are on one side of the axis and one on the other.

90. The tangents at P and Q meet in T, and TL is the per-

pendicular from T on the axis ; prove that if P.V, QM be the
ordinates of P and Q,
PN, QM=4A.S.AL,
 Examples, 49
91. Tlie tangents at P and Q, meet in T, and the lines 7M,
PAy QA^ meet the directrix in t, p, and q prove that
:

92.From a point T tangents TP, 2^Q are drawn, to a para-

bola, and through T straight lines are drawn parallel to the nor-
mal at P and Q prove that one diagonal of the parallelogram
;

so formed passes through the focus.

93. The chord PQ, is normal at P, and the tmgents at P

and Q meet in T prove that the
;
straight line drawn from S at
right angles to ST bisects QT.

94. Through a given point within a parabola draw a chord

which shall be divided in a given ratio at that point. ,

95. ABC is a portion of a parabola bounded by the axis AB

and the semi-ordinate BC : find the point P in the semi-ordinate
such that if PQ, be drawn parallel to the axis to meet the parabola
in Q, the sum of BP and PQ shall be the greatest possible.

96. The diameter through a point P

of a parabola meets the
tangent at the vertex in Z; the normal at and the focal dis- P
tance of Z will intersect in a point at the same distance from the
tangent at the vertex as P.

97. Given a tangent to a parabola and a point on the curve,

shew that the foot of the ordinate of the point of contact of the
tangent drawn to the diameter through the given point lies on a
fixed straight line.

98. Find a point such that the tangents from it to a parabola

and the lines from the focus to the points of contact may form a
parallelogram.

99. Two equal parabolas have a common focus ; and, from

any point in the common tangent, another tangent is drawn to
each; prove that these tangents are equidistant from the common
focus.

100. Two parabolas have a common axis and vertex, and

their concavities turned in opposite directions ; the latus rectum
of one is eight times that of the other ; prove that the portion of
a tangent to the former, intercepted between the common tan-
gent and axis, is bisected by the latter.

B. C. S.
 CHAPTER III.

THE ELLIPSE.

Def. An ellipse is the curve traced out hy a point

which moves in such a manner that its distance from, a
given point is in a constant ratio of less inequality to its
distance from a given straight line.

Tracing the Curve.

51. Let S be the focus, EX the directrix, and SX the

perpendicular on JEX from aS'.

Divide SX at the point A in the given ratio ; the point

A isthe vertex.
From any point E
in EX, draw EAP, ESL, and
through aS' draw SP making the angle PSL equal to LSN,
and meeting EAPin P.

Through P draw LPK perpendicular to the directrix

and meeting ESL in Z.

Then the angle PSL = LSN=SLP,

SP=PL.
.-.
 The Ellipse, 51

Also PL PK : :: SA : AX.
Hence SP : PJT :: SA : AX,
and P is therefore a point in the curve. •
Again, in the axis XAN find a point A' such that
aS'^^ : AX :: aS'^ : ^X;
this point is evidently on the same side of the directrix as
the point A, and is another vertex of the curve.

Join EA^ meeting PS produced in P\ and draw

P'L'K' perpendicular to the directrix and meeting ES
inX'.
Then PL' : P'K :: SA A'X :

:: aS'^ : AX,
and the angle SL'P' = L'SA = L'SP' ;

.•.P'Z' = aS'P'.
Hence P' is also a point in the curve, and PaSP'' is a
focal chord.

By giving E
a series of positions on the directrix we
shall obtain a series of focal chords, and we can also, as in
Art. (1), find other points of the curve lying in the lines
KP, K'P\ or in these lines produced.
We can thus find any number of points in the curve.

A A' is
I 52. Def. The distance the major axis.
52 The Ellipse.

The iniddle point G of AA' is called the centre of the

ellipse.

If through G the double ordinate BGB' he drawn,

BB' is called the minor axis.

Any straight line drawn through the centre, and

terminated hy the curve, is called a diameter.

The lines AGA\ BGB' are called the principal dia-

meters, or, briefly, the axes of the curve.
The line AGA' is also sometimes called the transverse
axis, and BGB' the conjugate axis.

53. Prop. I. If P
he any point of an ellipse^ and
AA' the axis major, and if PA, A'P, when produced,
tneet the directrix in E and F, the distance EF subtends
a right angle at the focus.
Draw PLK perpendicular to the directrix, meeting SF
in L, and the directrix in K,

Then PL PK : SA' : A'X

:: SP : PK\
:.PL = SPy
and the angle LSP = PLS=^LSX,
that is, FS bisects the angle ASP.
But, if Pas' be produced to P', ES bisects the angle
ASF;
.-. ESF is a right angle.
 The Ellipse. 53
54. By help of the preceding theorem we shall now
prove the existence of another focus and directrix corre-
sponding to the vertex A,
In A A' produced take a point X' such that A'X^=^AX,
and in AA^ take a point aS" such that A'S'-=AS.
Through X' draw a straight line ^X/ perpendicular to
the axis and let EF, FP
produced meet this line in
e and/ Join eS\ and/S".
Then eX : EX AX AX
:: :

:: A'X : A'X'
:: FX :/X';
/. eX.fX = EX. FX^SX'^SX'\

Hence eS'/i^ a right angle.

Through P
draw KPk parallel to the axis, meeting
eS' and/A^' produced L and
in /.
54 The Ellipse.

Then PL Ph : :: S'A : AX',

and PI : Pk :: S'A' : ^'X^
/. PL = Pl
Moreover, LS'l being a right angle,
S'P = Pl,
.\S'P : Pk :: S'A' : A'X\
and the curve can be described by means of the focus S'
and the directrix eX\
Hence also it follows that the curve is symmetrical with
regard to BCB\ and that it Kes wholly between the tan-
gents 2Lt A and A\

If SA be equal to AX, the point A', and therefore the

points S' and X' will be at an infinite distance from S and A,

Hence a parabola is the limiting form of an ellipse, the

axis major of which is indefinitely increased in magnitude,
while the distance SA remains finite.

55. Prop. II. If PN be the ordinate of any point

P of an ellipse, ACA' the axis major, and BOB' the asis
minor,
PN' : AN. NA' :: BC^ : AC^.

Join PA, A'P, and let these lines produced meet the
directrix in E and F,

B'

Then, PN AN EX : X : : AX,
and PN : A'N : : FX: AX
 The Ellipse. 55

.-. PN^ : AN.NA' :: EX FX AX, AX

, :

:: SX^ : AX.A'X,
since ESF is a right angle (Prop, i.); that is, PN^ is to

AN. NA^ in a constant ratio.

Hence, taking PN coincident with BC\ in which case

AN=NA' = AG,
BC^ : AC' :: SX^ : AX. AX,
and /. PiV2 : AN.NA' :: ^(7^ :
^(7-^.

This may be also written

PN^ : AC^-CN^ BC^ : AC\

Cor. If PM be the perpendicular from P on the axis
minor,

CM=PN, PM=^GN,
and (7il/2 .
aC^-PM"" :: ^C'^ : ACK
Hence ^C^ : AC^-PM^ :: ^(72 : (7Jf2,

and /. AC- : Pilf^ :: bG^ : BC'-CM^

or PJ/2 .
BM.MB' :: ^C2 : ^(72.

56. Conversely, if a point P move in such a manner thai

PiV^ is to AN .NA' in a constant ratio, PiV being the distance
of P from the line joining two fixed points A, A', and bein/^ N
between A and A\ the locus of P will be an ellipse of which A A*
is the axis.
56 The Ellipse.

For, taking C as the middle point of AA\ draw 5(7 at right

angles to AA\ and such that BC'^ is AC^ in the given con-
to
stant ratio; then, if any point be N taken in AA\ the corre-
sponding point of the locus evidently coincides with a point of
the ellipse of which AC and BC are the semi-axes.

It will be shewn in the Appendix that the definition of an

ellipse is a property directly deducible from the relation

Pm AN : . NA' :: BC^ : AO^.

67. Prop. III. If AGA' be the axis major, G the

centre, S one of the foci, and X the foot of the directrix,
GS : GA :: GA : GX :: aS'^ ; AX,
and GS I GX :: GS'' : GA\

S'

For S'A : SA :: AX' : AX

:: A'X : AX;
.'. aS'.S'' : SA :: AA' : AX,
or GS : GA :: SA : AX,
Again, SA' >SA :: AX' : AX;
,\ AA' : SA :: XX' AX, :

or C^ : aX:: SA : AX
/. (7.S' : GA :: (7^ : CX,

or GS.GX=GA'K
Also CaS' : GX :: (7;^^ : (7^. GX
 The Ellipse. 57

58. Prop. IV. If S he a focus, and B an extremity

of the axis minor
SB = AC2iadiBG'^ = AS.SA\
For, joining SB in the figure of Art. 55,

SB GX SA AX : :: :

CA CX, :: :

by the previous Article,

/. SB = GA,
Also BG^=SB^-SG^ = AG^-SG^
= AS.SA\

59. Prop. V. The seml-latus rectum SR is a third

proportional to AG and BG,
For, Prop. IL,

SB'' : AS.SA' :: BG'' : AG^;

: SR^ BG^ : :: BG'^ : AG\
or SR : BG :: BG : AG.
CoR. Since SR : aSX :: ^^ : AX
:: /Sa : AG,
it follows that aS'X. SG= SR ,AG=BG^;
and hence also that

SX GX : :: BG^ : AG\
60. Prop. VI. The sum of the focal distances of any
point is equal to the axis major.
Let PN be the ordinate of a point P (Fig. Art. 54),
then
S'P ; SP :: NX' : iVX;
.'. SP + SP : aS'P XT' ; iVX,
S'P + SP : XX' /SP : NX
SA : AX
A A' : XX';
SP+SP=AA\
58 Tlie Ellipse,

Cor. Since SP : NX :: aS'^ : AX

:: AG : CX-,
AG aS'P GX iVX,
.-. : :: :

AG-SP >SP OZV NX, : :: :

and AG-SP (7iV^ aS'^ ^X : :: :

Also, AG-SP = S'P-AG;

:, S'P-AG : (7iV^ :: SA : AX,

Mechaviical Gonstricction of the Ellipse,

61. Fasten the ends of a piece of thread to two pins

fixed on a board, and trace a curve on the board with a
pencil pressed against the thread so as to keep it stretched
the curve traced out will be an ellipse, having its foci at the
points where the pins are fixed, and having its major axis
equal to the length of the thread.

62. The sum of the distances of a point

Prop. VII.
from of an ellipse is greater or less than the
the foci
major axis according as the point is outside or iiiside the
ellipse.

If the point be without the ellipse join SQ, S'Q^ and

take a point P
on the intercepted arc of the curve.

Then P is within the triangle SQS' and therefore,

joining SP, S'P,
SQ + S'Q>SP + S'P, Euclid i. 21,

i.e. SQ + S'Q:>AA',
 The Ellipse. 59

If Q be within the ellipse, let SQ, S'Q produced meet

the cui've and take a point on the intercepted arc. P
Then Q is within the triangle SPS\ and
/. SP + S'P^SQ + S'Q,
i.e. SQ + S'Q<AA\
63. Def. The circle described on the axis major as
diameter is called the auxiliary circle.

Prop. VIII. If the ordinate of an NP ellipse le pro-

duced to meet the auxiliary circle in Q,
PN QN BG : :: : AG.
For, Art. 55,

PN^ : AN.NA' :: BG^ ; AG^

and, by a property of the circle,

QN^=AN.NA';

5-^-;;^^^
{/^ /Q'

^ \

& J
\

.\ PN QN BG : :: : AG.

CoR. Similarly, if PM the perpendicular on BB^ meet

in Q^ the circle described on BB^ as diameter

PM : Q'M :: ^(7 : ^(7.

For PM^ BM.MB' AG'^

: :: : 56^^
and BM,MB' = Q'M^.
•
60 The Ellipse.

Properties of the Tangent and Normal.

64. Prop. IX. The normal at any point bisects the

angle "between the focal distances of that point, and the
tangent is equally inclined to the focal distances.

Let the normal at P meet the axis in G ; then, Art. 15,

SG : SP :: SA : AX,
and S'G : S'P :: SA : AX.

Hence SG : S'G :: SP : S'P,

and therefore the angle SPS' is bisected by PG,
Also being the tangent, and GPF, GPF' being
FPF'
right angles, follows that the angles SPF, S'PF' are
it
equal, or that the tangent is equally inclined to the focal
distances.

Hence if S'P be produced to Z, the tangent bisects the

angle SPL,

CoR.If a circle be described about the triangle SPS\

its centre will lie in BGB\ which bisects at right SS
angles and since the angles SPG, S'PG are equal, and
;

equal angles stand upon equal arcs, the point g, in which

PG produced meets the minor axis, is a point in the
circle.
 The Ellipse, 61

Also, if the tangent meet the minor axis in the point if, t

is on the same circle, since gPt is a right angle.

Hence, Any point P of an ellipse, the two foci, and

the points of intersection of the tangent and normal at P
with the minor axis lie on the same circle.

65. Prop. X. Every diameter is bisected at the

centre and the tangents at the ends of a diameter are
parallel.

Let PCp be a diameter, PN, pn the ordinates of

P and p.

Then GN^ : Cn^ :: PN^ pn^:

:: AC^-CN^ : AC^-Cn^, Art. 55;

/. CN^ : AC" :: Cn^ AGl:

Hence ON=Cn and /. CP = Cp.

Draw the focal distances; then, since Pp and SS^
bisect each other in G, the figure SPS'p is a parallelogram,
and the angle
SPS'=SpS\
But the tangents PT, pt are equally inclined to the
focal distances;

.-. the angle SPT=S'pt,

and, adding the equal angles GPS, GpS\
GPT^Gpt',
.*. P 7' and jp^ are parallel.
62 The Ellipse.
Cor. Since Sp and S'p are equally inclined to the
tangent at p, it follows that SP and Sp make equal angles
with the tangents at and p, P
Prop. XL The perpendiculars from the foci on
QQ,
any meet the tangent on the auxiliary circle^ and
tak^gent
the semi-minor axis is a mean proportional between their
lengths.

Let SY, S'Y' be the perpendiculars; join S'Py and let

S Y, S'P produced meet in L,

The angles SPY, YPL being equal, and PY^ being

common, the triangles are equal in all respects
PL=SPy SY=: YL,
.-.

and S'L=S'P+PL = S'P + SP = AA\

Join CY, then (7 being the middle point of SS\ and Fof
/SX, a F is parallel to aS'^Z,

and .-. S'L = 2GY

Hence CY=AC, and Fis a point on the auxiliary circle.

Similarly by producing SP, S' Y' it may be shewn that

F' is also on the auxiliary circle.
 The Ellipse, 63

Let meet the circle in Z, and join Y'Z

YS produced
then TYZbeing a right angle, Y'Z is a diameter and
passes through C. •

Hence the triangles SGZ, S'CY^ are equal, and

SY.S'Y':^SY.SZ=AS,SA'=B(y.

CoR. (1). If P' be the other extremity of the diameter

through P, the tangent at P' is parallel to Y, and there- P
fore Z is the foot of the perpendicular from Son the tangent
atP;
Cor. (2). If the diameter DCD\ drawn parallel to the
tangent at P, meet SP, S'P in E
and E', PEGY' is a
parallelogram, for GY' is parallel to SP, and GE to PY' \
:.PE=GY' = AG; and similarly PE'=GY=AG.
Cor. (3). Any diameter parallel to the focal distance of
a point meets the tangent at the point on the auxiliary
circle.

67. Prop. XII. To draw tangents from a given

point to an ellipse.

For this purpose we may employ the general construc-

tion of Art. (14), or the following.
64 The Ellipse.

Let Q be the given point ; upon SQ as diameter de-

scribe a circle cutting the auxiliary circle in Fand Y'
YQ and Y^Q will be the required tangents.

Producing SYto L so that FZ = ^F, join S'L cutting

the line YQ in P,

The triangles SP Y, LP Y are equal in all respects,

since SY= YL and PY is common and perpendicular
to/S'Z;

.-. SP = PL and S'L = S'P-h PL^S'P + SP\

but, joining (7F, aS'^Z = 2(7F=2^(7;
.'.SP^S'P^'lAG,
and P is therefore a point on the ellipse.

Also the angle SPY= YPL,

and .*. QP is the tangent at P.

A similar construction will give the point of contact of

the other tangent QP'.

Referring to Art. 31, it will be seen that the construction is

the same as that given for the parabola, the ultimate form of the
circle being, for the parabola, the tangent at the vertex.
 The Ellipse. 65

68. If two tangents he drawn to an

Prop. XIII.
ellipse from an
external point, they are equally inclined
to the focal distances of that point.

Let QP, QP' be the tangents, SY, S'Y\ SZ, S'Z' the

\Q

perpendiculars from the foci on the tangents; join YZ,

Y'Z\
Then, Art 66, S Y. S' Y' = SZ. S'Z' ;
/. BY SZ
: :: S'Z' : S'Y'.

A can be drawn through the points SYQZ, since

circle
8YQ, SZQ are right angles; and YSZ and YQZ are
equal to two right angles, as are also Y'S'Z' and Y'QZ' ;

therefore the angle YSZ= Y'S'Z\ and the triangles YSZ,

Y'S'Z' are similar.
Hence the angle SZ Y= S' Y'Z\
But SZY=SQYvi:i the same segment, and similarly
S'Y'Z' = S'QZ' \

therefore the angle SQP = S'Qr.

69. Def. Ellipses which have the same foci are called con-
focal ellipses.

If Q be a point in a confocal ellipse the normal at Q bisects

the angle SQS' and therefore bisects the angle PQI^,

Hence, If from any point of an ellipse tangents are drawn

to a confocal ellipse, these tangents are equally inclined to the
normal at the point.

By reference to the remark of Art. 40, it will be seen

that this theorem includes that of Art. 40 as a particular
case.

B. c. s. ^
66 The Ellipse.

70. Prop. XIV. If PT the tangent at P meet t?ie

axis major in T^ and PN he the ordinate,

CN.CT=AGK

Draw the focal distances SP, S'P, and the perpendicular

SY on the tangent, and join JSfY, GY.

Then, as in Art. QQ, (7F is parallel to S'P\ therefore

the angle

CYP = S'Pt = SPY

=^SNY,
since a circle can be drawn through the four points aS' FPiV

Hence CYT=CNY,
and the triangles CYT,CNY equiangular.
Sire

Therefore GN CY CY GT
: :: :

or GN.GT^GY^=AGK
CoE. (1). GN. NT= GN, GT- GN' ^AG''- GN^
= AN.NA\

Cor. (2). Hence it follows that tangents at the extre-

mities of a common ordinate of an ellipse and its aux-
iliary circle meet the axis in the same point

For, if NP
produced meet the auxiliary circle in Q,
and the tangent at Q meet the axis in T\
GN,GT=GQ^=AG^,
therefore T coincides with T,
 The Ellipse. 67
And more generally it is evident that. If any number
qf ellipses he described having the same m,ajor axis, and
an ordinate be drawn cutting the ellipses, the tangents at
the points of section will all meet the common axis in the
same point,

71. Prop. XV. If the tangent at P meet the axis

minor in t, and PNbe the ordinate,
Ct.PN=^BC\
For, Ct : PN CT NT,
:: : Fig. Art. 70,

Ct.PN PN^ : :: CT .CN CN.NT :

: AC^ AN,NA\ Cor.

: 1, Art. 70,

: BC^ : PN\
\Ot,PN=BC\

72. Prop. XVI. If the normal at meet the axes P

in G and g, and the diameter parallel to the tangent at P
in F,
PF. PG=BG^, and PF. Pg=AGl
Let PN, PM, perpendiculars on the axes, meet the
diameter in K
and Z, and let the tangent at meet the P
axes in T and t.

< 1.

D^,,^ p

(^^^ " / ^\\

L
t^
^
V?"

V
^ 'k
Ja

GFKN,
Then, since a circle can be drawn through

I PF. PG = PN. PK= PN,Gt = BC\

5-2
68 The Ellipse.

Similarly, since a circle can be drawn through LMFg^

PF.Pg=PM.PL=^CN.CT=AG^.
Cor. Since PGN, PgM are similar triangles,
NG : PM PG Pg PF,PG PF,Pg
:: : :: :

or NG ON B(P AC^
: :: :

and .-. CG : GN :: SC^ : ^(72.

Hence also CG : (7iV^ :: ^C2 : CN, CT,

CG.CT=SG\
From Art. 64, cor., it is obvious that
Cg.Ct = SG\
and it can be easily shewn that
Cg : PN :: SG^ : BC^

73. Prop. XVII. If PCp he a diameter, and QVQ'

a chord parallel to the tangent at P and meeting Pp in F,
and if the tangent at Q meet pP produced in Ty

GV.GT=^CP\

JiCt TQ meet the tangents at P and pvoiR and r, and

*S' being a focus, join /S'P, /SQ, Sp,
 The Ellipse. 69

Let fall perpendiculars RN^ RM, rn, rm upon these

focal distances

then, since the angle SPR = Spr^ Cor. Art. (65),

RP : rp :: RN : rn
:; RM : rm, Art. 13,

:: RQ : rQ;
but TR : TV :: RP : r/?.

.-. !r22 : Tr :: i2Q : rQ.

Hence TP : Tp :: PV : Vp,

or CT-GP : CT-^GP :: GP-GV : (7P+67r;

.-. Cr OP : :: (7P : GV,
or GT.GV=GP\
Cor. 1. Hence, since (7F and are the GP same for the
point Q\ the tangent at Q' passes through T,

CoR. 2. Since Tp TP \. \ pV \ VP, it follows that

T'PF/? is harmonically divided.

It will be seen in Chapter X, that this is a particular

case of a general theorem.
70 The Ellipse.

Properties of Conjugate Diameters,

*J4:, Prop. XYIII. A diameter bisects all chords par-

allel to the tangents at its extremities.

We have shewn (Art. 16), that, if QQ' be a chord of a

conic, TQ, TQ' the tangents at Q, Q!, and ^P^' a tangent
parallel to QQ\ the length EE' is bisected at P.

Draw the diameter PGp ; the tangent epe' at /? is par-

allel to EP^ Art. (65), and is therefore parallel to QQ\

Hence ep=pe', and P, p being the middle points of the

parallels ee\ EE the line Pp passes through T, and more-
over bisects QQ\
Similarly, if any other chord qq^ be drawn parallel to
QQ' the tangents at q and q^ will meet in pP produced,
and qq' will be bisected by pP,
Cor. Hence, if QQ\ qq^ be two chords parallel to the
tangent at P, the chords Qq, Q'q^ will meet in CP or CP
produced.
75. Def. The diameter DCd, drawn parallel to the
tangent at P, is said to he conjugate to PCp,
A diameter therefore bisects all chords parallel to its
conjugate.

Prop. XIX. If the diameter DCd be conjugate to PCp,

then will PCp be conjugate to DCd.
Let the chord QVq be parallel to DCd, and therefore
bisected by PC, and draw the diameter qCR,
 The Ellipse. 71

Join QR meeting CD in U]
then RC= Cq, and QV==Vq\
QR is parallel to CP
.'.

Also QU UR : :: qC : CR,
and therefore Q U= UR.
That is, CD bisects the chords parallel to PCp)
therefore PCp is conjugate to DCd.

Def. Chords drawn from the extremities of a dia-

meter to any point of the ellipse are called supplemental
chords.

Thus qQ^ RQ
are supplemental chords, and hence it
appears that supplemental chords are parallel to conjugate
diameters.

Def. a line Q V drawn from a point Q of an ellipse,

2mrallel to the tangent at P
and terminated hy the diame-
ter PCp, is called an ordinate of that diameter, and Q Vq
is the double ordinate if QV produced Tneet the curve
inq,

76. Any diam^eter is a mean proportional between the

transverse axis and tJie focal chord parallel to the dia-
m>eter.

From Art. 66 it follows that if CQT parallel to PSp

meet in T the tangent at P,
CT^AC
72 The Ellipse.

Draw Pr parallel to the tangent at Q; then

CV.CT=CQ\ Art. 73
.• Pp.AA' =

77. Prop. XX. If PCp, DCd he conjugate diame-

terSy and QV an ordinate of Pp,
QV^ : Pr. Vp :: CD^ : CP^,
Let the tangent at Q, fig. Art. 75, meet GP, CD pro-
duced in T and t, and draw Q parallel to (7P and meeting U
CD in £7:

Then CP^=CV.CT,
and CD'^^CU. Ct = QV, Ct ;

/. Ci:)^ : (7P2 :: QV . Ct CV CT
: ,

QF2 :: : CV VT, .

and (7r . VT= CV (7^- CV^^CP^- CV .

= PV.Vp,
.'. (7i)2 : CP'^ :: QT^ : PV. Vp.

78. Prop. XXI. JfACA', BCB' he a pair of conju-

gate diameters, PCP\ DCD another pair, and ifPN,
DM he ordinate^ of ACA\

Cm = AM MA\ CM'^ = AN. NA .

,

CM PN AC BC, : :; :

and DM CN BC AC : :: :
 The Ellipse. 73

Let the tangents at P and D meet A GA* in T and t

B ^P
n
T

B'
Then CN CT=AC^ = CM.. Ct\
hence CM CN CT : :: : (7^

:: P^: CD
:: PiV^ : i>J/
:: CN : it/^,

.-. Cm=^CM Mt^AC'-CM-'^AM. . MA',

and similarly, C^Jf 2 = ^iv^ . NA'.
Also i>Jf« : ^Jf MA' . :: ^(72 : ^C^,
.-. DM CN BC : :: : ^(7,
and similarly CM FN AC : :: : BC.
Cor. We have shewn in the course of the proof that
CN^-^CM^=AC^
By similar reasoning it appears that if Pn, Dm, be or-
dinates of BCB',
Cn^^Cm^^BC^',
:. FN^ + DM'^^BC^.
It should be noticed that these relations are shewn to
be true when ACA', BCB' are any conjugate diameters,
including of course the principal axes.

79. Pkx)P. XXII. If CP, CD be conjitgate semi-dia"

meters, and AC, BC the principal semi-diameters,
CP^+CD' = AC'-^BC\
From the preceding article,

CN''->,CM''=AC^,
and PN^'^DM^^BC'',
also A CB being in this case a right angle,
Pm'\-CN^=CP^,
and DM^+CM^=CD%
:. CP^-^CD'^^AC'^-^BC\
74 The Ellipse.

80. Prop. XXIII. If the normal at P meet the

principal axes in G and g,
PG CD : :: BO AC, :

and PgCD : :: AC BC :

For, the triangles DCM, P(riV being similar,

PG CD : :: PN CM :

:: BC : AC

So also Pgn and DCM are similar, and

P^ : CD :: Ptz : DM

81. Prop. XXIV. The parallelogram formed by the

tangents at the ends of conjugate diameters is equal to
the rectangle contained by the principal axes.

For, taking the preceding figure,

PG BC CD AC; : :: :

but PG BC BC PF, Art. 72,

: :: :

.-. CD AC ^(7 PP,

: :: :

and CD ,PF=AC.BC,
whence the theorem stated.

82. Prop. XXV. If SP, S'P be the focal distances

of Py and CD be conjugate to CP,
SP .S'P = CD\
 The Ellipse. /D

Let CD meet SP, S'P in ^ and E' (fig. Art. 66), and
the normal at P in F-, then SP F, PEF, and SPY' are
similar triangles
/. SP : /ST :: PE Pi^, :

and /S"P : S'Y' :: P^ PP; :

/. /9P . aS"P : SY. S'Y' :: PP2 ; PF2

:: AC^ : PF^
:: (72>2 : ^C'^, Art. 81

83. Prop. XXVL If the tangent at meet a pair P

of conjugate diameters in T and t, and CD be conjugate
toCP,
PT.Pt = CD\
From the figure
PT PN : :: CD : DM;

and, if TP produced meet CB in t,

Pt CN CD CM;
: :: :

:. PT. Pt PN CN CD' DM
I . :; : . CJ/.
But PN CN= DM CM, Art. 78,
. .

PT.Pt=CD\ .-.
76 The Ellipse.

Cor. Let TQU be the taDgent at the other end of the

chord PNQy meeting GB' produced in U) and let CE be the
semi-diameter parallel to TQ,,

Then TP TQ : :: Pt : QU,
.-. TP^ : TQ^ :: PT.Pt: QT . QU
:: CD^ CE\ :

that is, the two tangents d/rawn from any point are in tlie ratio of
the parallel diameters.

In a similar manner it can be shewn that, if the tangent

at P meet the tangents at the ends of a diameter ACA' in T
in r,
PT,Pr = GD\
CD being conjugate to CP,

and AT.A'r=CB\
CB being conjugate to ACA'.
These properties can be demonstrated by the help of Art. 78, and
of the corollary to Art. 83.

84. Equi-conjugate diameters.

Prop. XXVII. The diagonals of the rectangle formed

by the principal axes are equal and conjugate diameters.

For, joining AB, A'B, these lines are parallel to the

diagonals CF, CE ; and, AB, A'B being supplemental

JP B -

X7 'X^
AI
'/\ c
/\
1
A

chords, it follows that CD, CP are conjugate to each other.

Moreover, they are equally inclined to the axes, and are
therefore of equal length.

CoR. 1. li QV.QU be drawn parallel to the equi-con-

iugate diameters, meeting them in V and U,
 The Ellipse. 77
QV2 : CP^^CV^ :: CD^ : CP*

if P be the other end of the diameter PGP\

Hence QV^^QU^ = GP^,
Cor. 2. CP^ + C7>2 = ^ (7^ + ^^2, (Art. 79 )

/. 2(7P2 = ^C'2 4-^(72.

85. Prop. XXVIII. Pairs of tangents at right angles

to each other intersect on a fixed circle.

The two tangents being TP, TP\ let S'P produced

meet /S'Fthe perpendicular on TP in K.

Then the angle PTK=STP = S'TP -,

/. T^ a right angle.
aS'' is

Hence 4. A C^ = S'K' = S'T^+ TK^

= 8'!^+ ST'
= 2CT^-^2CS\ Euclid, ii. 12 and 13;

and T lies on a fixed circle, centre C,

is called the Director Circle of the Ellipse,
This circle
and be seen that when the ellipse, by the elongation
it will
of SC from S is transformed into a parabola, the director
circle merges into the directrix of the parabola.
78 The Ellipse,

86. Prop. XXIX. The rectangles contained by the

segments of any two chords which intersect each other are
in the ratio of the squares of the parallel diameters.

Through any point in a chord OQQ' draw the diame-

ter ORR, and let CD be parallel to QQ\ and CP con-
jugate to CD, bisecting QQ' in V,

Draw i?£7' parallel to CD.

Then CD^-RU^ : CU^ :: CD^ : CP^, Art. 77,

:: CD'^-QV^ : CV^
But RU^ : CU^ :: 0^2 : CV^;
/. (7Z>2 : CU^ :: CD^+OV^-QF^ : CF^

or CD^ : CD^^OV^-QV^ :: (7C^2 . ^p^2

:: (7722 ; cq2.
.'. CD^ : OF^-QV^ :: CR^ : CO^-CR^,
or C7>2 : OQ.OQ' :: CR^ : OR, OR.
Similarly if Oqg^ be any other chord through 0, and Cd
the parallel semi-diameter,

Cd^ : 0^.0^ :: CR^ : OR. OR;

.'. OQ.OQ : Oq.O(l :: (72)2 : C^.
This may otherwise be expressed thus,
 The Ellipse. 79

T?ie ratio of the rectangles of the segments depends

only on the directions in which they are drawn.

The proof is the same if the point be within the

ellipse.

87. Prop. XXX. If a circle intersect an ellipse in

four points the several pairs of the chords of intersection
are equally inclined to the axes.

For if QQ', qq^ be a pair of the chords of intersection,

and if these meet in 0, or be produced to meet in 0, the
rectangles OQ 0Q\ Oq. Oq[ are proportional to the squares
.

on the parallel diameters.

But these rectangles are equal since QQ\ qq^ are chords
of a circle.

Therefore the parallel diameters are equal, and, since

equal diameters are equally inclined to the axes, it follows
that the chords QQ\ qq' are equally incHned to the axes.

88. Conversely, if two chords, not parallel, be equally

inclined to the axes a circle can be drawn through their
extremities.

For, as in Art. 87, if OQQ\ Oqq' be two chords, and

CD^ Cd the parallel semi-diameters,

OQ.OQ' : Oq.Oq" :: CD' : Cd^-,

but, if CD and Cd be equally inclined to the axes, they are

equal, and

and a circle can be drawn through the points Q, Qf, q,

and q\
 EXAMPLES.

1. If the tangent at B meet the latus rectutii produced in

D, CDX is a right angle.
2. If PCp be a diameter, and the focal distance jpS produced
meet the tangent at P in T, SP = ST.
3. If the normal at P
meet the axis minor iu G' and G'N be
the perpendicular from G' on >SP, then PN=^AG.

4. TQ, TQ! are two tangents at right angles, and GT meets

QQ! in F prove that VT= Q Y, and, by help of this equality,
;

shew that the locus of I^ is a circle.

5. The tangent at P bisects any straight line perpendicular

to AA^ and terminated by AP^ A'P^ produced if necessary.

6. Draw a tangent to an ellipse parallel to a given line.

7. SR being the semi-latus rectum, if RA meet the directrix

in E^ and &E meet the tangent at -4 in T,
AT^AB.
8. Prove that SY SP : :: SR: PG,

Find where the angle SPS* is greatest.

9. If two points E and E' be taken in the normal PG such

that PE=PE' = GI), the loci of E
and E' are circles.

Shew that the sum of two conjugate diameters is greater than

the sum of the axes, and that their difference is less than the
difference of the axes.

10. If from the focus S' a line be diawn parallel to SP, it

will meet the perpendicular SYin the circumference of a circle.

11. If the normal at P meet the axis major in G, prove that

PG is an harmonic mean between the perpendiculars from the
foci on the tangent at P,
 Kxamples, 81

12. TP, TQ be drawn at the extremities P, Q of

If tangents
any chord of an ellipse, prove that the angle PTQ is half
focal
the supplement of the angle which PQ subtends at the other
focus.

13. If Y, Z
be the feet of the perpendiculars from the foci
on the tangent atP prove that the circle circumscribed about
;

the triangle YNZ will pass through C.

14. If AQ
be drawn from one of the vertices perpendicular
to the tangent at any point P, prove that the locus ot the point
of intersection of PS and QA produced will be a circle.

15.If the normal at P meet the axis major in G and the

axis minor in Ky prove that a circle can be drawn through the
foci and through the points P, K, and that GK SK SA A X, : : : :

shew also that, if the tangent at P meet the axis minor in t,

St: tK::BG: CD,
CD being conjugate to CP.

16. The straight lines joining each focus to the foot of the
perpendicular from the other focus on the tangent at any point
meet on the normal at the point and bisect it.

17. If two circles touch each other internally, the locus of

the centres of circles touching both is an ellipse whose foci are

the centres of the given circles.

18. The subnormal at any point P is a third proportional to

the intercept of the tangent at P on the major axis and half the
minor axis.

19. If the normal at a point P meet the axis in G, and the

tangent at P meet the axis in T, prove that

TQ : TP :: BG : PG,
Q being the point where the ordinate at P meets the auxiliary
circle.

20. If the tangent at any point P meet the tangent at

the extremities of the axis A A' in F and F', prove that the
rectangle AF, Al F' is equal to the square on the semiaxis
minor.

21. TP, TQ, are tangents; prove that a circle can be

described with T as centre so as to touch aSP, HP^ SQ, and HQ^
or these lines produced, S and H being the foci.

B. C. S. (j
82 The Ellipse.

22. If two equal and similar ellipses have the same centre,
their points of intersection are at the extremities of diameters at
light angles to one another.

23. The any two tangents to an

external angle between
ellipse is equal to the semi-sum of the angles which the chord
joining the points of contact subtends at the foci.

24. The tangent at any point P meets the axes in T and t ;

if /S be a focus the angles PSt, STP are equal.

25. P
is a point in an ellipse, PM, perpendicular to thePN
axes meet respectively when produced the circles described on
these axes as diameters in the points Q, Q^ shew that QQ^ passes ;

through the centre.

26. If /SF is a perpendicular from the focus S on the tangent

at P and CD a diameter conjugate to CP,

SY, CI)=SP.BO,
27. A
conic is drawn touching an ellipse at the extremities
Af B of the axes, and passing through the centre C of the ellipse ;
prove that the tangent at C is parallel to A B.

28. The tangent at any point P is cut by any two conjugate

diameters in T, t, and the points T, tj are joined with the foci S,
irrespectively; prove that the triangles SPT^ EPt are similar
to each other.

29. If the diameter conjugate to CP meet SP, and HP (or

these produced) in E and E\
prove that SE is equal to HE\ and
that the circles which circumscribe the triangles SOE, HQE\ are
equal to one another.

30. PG is a normal, terminating in the major axis ; tho

circle, of which PG is a diameter, cuts aSP, HP^ in K^ L,
respectively : prove that KL is bisected by PG^ and is perpen-
dicular to it.

31. P being a point on the curve, the locus of the centre of

the circle inscribed in the triangle SPH is an ellipse.

Tangents are drawn from any point in a circle through

32.
the prove that the lines bisecting the angle between the
foci,
tangents all pass through a fixed point.
 Examples, 83
33. If a quadrilateral circumscribe an ellipse, the angles
subtended by opposite sides at one of the foci are together equal
to two right angles.

34. If the normal at P meet the axis minor in (r, and if the
tangent at P meet the tangent at the vertex A in F, shew that
SQ;SC\:PV\ VA,

35. P, Q are points in two confocal ellipses, at which the

line joining the common foci subtends equal angles ; prove that
the tangents at P, Q are inclined at an angle which is equal to
the angle subtended by PQ at either focus.

36. The transverse axis is the greatest and the conjugate

axis the least of all the diameters.

37. If the tangent and ordinate at P meet the transverse

axis in T and iV, prove that any circle passing through N
and T
will cut the auxiliary circle orthogonally.

38. If ST, S'Y be the perpendiculars from the foci on the

tangent at a point P, and PN
the ordinate, prove that

PYiPT'.'.NYiNT.
39. T and Z, touch the major
If a circle, passing through
axis in Q,and that diameter of the circle, which passes through
Q, meet the tangent in P, then PQ = BC»

40. From the centre of two concentric circles a straight line

isdrawn to cut them in P and Q from P and Q straight lines are
;

drawn parallel to two given lines at right angles. Shew that the
locus of their point of intersection is an ellipse.

41. From any two points P, Q on an ellipse four Knes are

drawn to the foci S, S' prove : that SP S'Q and SQ, S'P are to
. .

one another as the squares of the perpendiculars from a focus on

the tangents at P and Q.
42. Two conjugate diameters are cut by the tangent at any
point P in My N; prove that the area of the triangle CPM varies
inversely as that of the triangle CPN.
43. If P be any point on the curve, and ^F be drawn
parallel to PO to meet the conjugate CD in F, prove that the
areas of the triangles CA F, CPN are equal, PN being the
ordinate.

6-2
84 The Ellipse.

44. Two tangents to an ellipse intersect at right angles

prove that the sum of the squares on the chords intercepted on
them by the auxiliary circle is constant.

45. Prove that the distance between the two points on the
circumference, at which a given chord, not passing through the
centre, subtends the greatest and least angles, is equal to the
diameter which bisects that chord.

46. The tangent at P

intersects a fixed tangent in T ; if is iSi

the focus and a line be drawn through S perpendicular to ST^

meeting the tangent at P
in Q, shew that the locus of Q is a
straight line touching the ellipse.

47. Shew that, if the distance between the foci be greater

than the length of the axis minor, there will be four positions of
the tangent, for which the area of the triangle, included between
it and the straight lines drawn from the centre of the curve to

the feet of the perpendiculars from the foci on the tangent, will
be the greatest possible.

48. Two ellipses whose axes are equal, each to each, are
placed in the same plane with their centres coincident, and axes
inclined to each other. Draw their common tangents.

49. An ellipse is inscribed in a triangle, having one focus at

the orthocentre; prove that the centre of the ellipse is the centre
of the nine-point circle of the triangle and that its transverse axis
is equal to the radius of that circle.

50. The tangent at any point P of a circle meets the tan-

gent at a fixed point A in T, and T is joined with B the extre-
mity of the diameter passing through A ; the locus of the point
of intersection of -4P, BT is an ellipse.
51. PGf the normal at P, cut the major axis in (r, and if
If
DRf PNhe the ordinates of D
and P, OD being conjugate to
(XP, prove that the triangles PGN, DEC
are similar ; and thence
deduce that PG bears a constant ratio to CD.

52. The ordinate NP

at a point P
meets, when produced,
the circle on the major axis in Q. If /S be a focus of the ellipse,
prove that SQ SP :: the axis major
: the chord of the circle
:

through Q and S, and that the diameter of the ellipse parallel to

SP is equal to the same chord.
 Examples, 85

53. If the perpendicular from the centre C on the tangent

at P meet the focal distance SP produced in iZ, the locus of R is
a circle, the diameter of which is equal to the axis major.
54. A perfectly elastic billiard ball lies on an elliptical bil-
liard table, and is projected in any direction along the table:
phew that all the lines in which it moves after each successive
impact touch an ellipse or an hyperbola confocal with the billiard
table.

55. Shew that a circle can be drawn through the foci and
the intersections of any tangent with the tangents at the vertices.
66. If CPt CD be conjugate semi-diameters, and a rectangle
be described so as to have PD
for a diagonal and its sides paral-
lel to the axes, the other angular points will be situated on two

fixed straight lines passing through the centre C.

57. If the tangent at P meet the minor axis in Ty prove

that the areas of the triangles SPS\ STS' are in the ratio of
the squares on CD and ST.
58.Find the locus of the centre of the circle touching the
transverse axis, SP, and SP produced.

59. In an ellipse SQ, and S'Q, drawn perpendicularly to a

pair of conjugate diameters, intersect in Q; prove that the locus
of Q is a concentric ellipse.
60. The distance of any point on the auxiliary circle from
the directrix is proportional to the distance af the focus from the
tangent at that point.
61. If CQ, be conjugate to the normal at P, then is CP
conjugate to the normal at Q.

62. PQ is one side of a parallelogram described about an

ellipse, having its sides parallel to conjugate diameters, and the
lines joining P, Q, to the foci intersect in i>, E \
prove that the
points D, E and the foci lie on a circle.

63. If the centre, a tangent, and the transverse axis be

given, prove that the directrices pass each through a fixed point.

64. The straight line joining the feet of perpendiculars from

the focus on two tangents is at right angles to the line joining
the intersection of the tangents with the other focus.
65. A
circle passes through a focus, has its centre on the
major axis of the ellipse, and touches the ellipse shew that the :

straight line from the focus to the point of contact is equal to the
latus rectum.
86 The Ellipse.

66. Prove that the perimeter of the quadrilateral formed by

the tangent, the perpendiculars from the foci, and the transverse
axis, will be the greatest possible when the focal distances of the
point of contact are at right angles to each other.

67. Given a focus, the length of the transverse axis, and

that the second focus lies on a straight line, prove that the

ellipse will touch two fixed parabolas having the given focus
for focus.

68. From any point on one of the equi-con jugate diameters

two tangents are drawn; prove that the circle passing through
the point and the two points of contact will also pass through the
centre.

69. If PN be the ordinate of P, and if with centre (7 and

radius equal to PN a circle be described intersecting in Q, PN
prove that the locus of Q is an ellipse.

70. If AQO be drawn parallel to (7P, meeting the curve in

Q and the minor axis in 0, 2CP^=A0 AQ, .

71. PSis CR is a radius of the auxiliary

a focal distance;
PSy and drawn in the direction from P to S;
circle parallel to
SQ is a perpendicular on CE: shew that the rectangle contained
by SP and QR is equal to the square on half the minor axis.

72. If a focus be joined with the point where the tangent at

the nearer vertex intersects any other tangent, and perpendiculars
be let fall from the other focus on the joining line and on the
last-mentioned tangent, prove that the distance between the feet
of these perpendiculars is equal to the distance from either focus
to the remoter vertex.

73. A parallelogram is described about an ellipse; if two

of its angular points lie on the directrices, the other two will lie
on the auxiliary circle.

74. From
a point in the auxiliary circle straight lines are
drawn touching the ellipse in P and P' ; prove that SP is parallel
to S'P'.

75. If the tangent and normal at any point meet the axis
major in T and respectively, prove that
CG,CT=-CS\
76. Find the locus of the points of contact of tangents to a
series of confocal ellipses from a fixed point in the axis major.
 Examples. 87
77. A
series of confocal ellipses intersect a given straight
line;
prove that the locus of the points of intersection of the
pairs of tangents drawn at the extremities of the chords of inter-
section is a straight line at right angles to the given straight line.

78. Given a focus and the length of the major axis; de-
scribe an ellipse touching a given straight line and passing through
a given point.

79. Given a focus and the length of the major axis; de-
scribe an ellipse touching two given straight lines.

80. Find the positions of the foci and directrices of an ellipse

which touches at two given points P, Q, two given straight lines
PO, QOf and has one focus on the line PQ, the angle POQ being
less than a right angle.

81. P of an ellipse are drawn straight

Through any point
lines APQf A'PR^ meeting the auxiliary circle in Q, R, and ordi-
nates Qq^ Rr are drawn to the transverse axis ; prove that, L being
an extremity of the latus rectum,

Aq.A'r Aq AC^ SL\

: Ar , :: :

82. If a tangent at a point P meet the major axis in T, and

the perpendiculars from the focus and centre in Y and Z, then

TY^ : PY^ :: TZ : PZ.

83. An ellipse slides between two lines at right angles to

each other ; find the locus of its centre.

84. TP, TQ are two tangents, and (7P', CQ' are the radii
from the centre respectively parallel to these tangents, prove that
P'Q' is parallel to PQ.

85. The tangent at P meets the minor axis in t ;

prove that

St.PN=£C.CI).
86. If the circle, centre *, and radius tS, meet the ellipse in
Qy and QM be the ordinate, prove that

QM PN : :: BO : BC+CD.
87. Perpendiculars SY, S'Y' are let fall from the foci upon
a pair of tangents TY, TY'; prove that the angles STY, S'TT
are equal to the angles at the base of the triangle YOY\
88 The Ellipse.

88. PQ, is the chord of an ellipse normal at P, LCL' the

diameter bisecting it, shew that PQ, bisects the angle LPL' and
that LP + PL' is constant.

89. ABO
an isosceles triangle of which the side-^J? is
is

equal to the side AC. BD, BE drawn on opposite sides of BQ

and equally inclined toit meet AC in D
and E. If an ellipse is
described round BDE having its axis minor parallel to BC^ then
AB will be a tangent to the ellipse.
90. If A be the extremity of the major axis and any P
point on the curve, the bisectors of the angles PSA^ PS' A meet
on the tangent at P,

91. If two ellipses intersect in four points, the diameters

parallel to a pair of the chords of intersection are in the same
ratio to each other.

92. From any point P of an ellipse a straight line PQ is

drawn perpendicular to the focal distance SP, and meeting in Q
the diameter conjugate to that through P ; shew that PQ varies
inversely as the ordinate of P,

93. If a tangent to an ellipse intersect at right angles a tan-

gent to a confocal ellipse, the point of intersection lies on a fixed
circle.

94. If a circle be drawn through the foci of two confocal

ellipses, cutting the ellipses in P and Q, the tangents to the
ellipses at P and Q will intersect on the circumference of the
same circle.

95. If any two points P,

Q be given in an ellipse, prove that
a third point R may
be found so that the angle PRQ is a maxi-
mum by the following construction. Draw a tangent parallel to
PQy touching the ellipse in K^ and draw KR
perpendicular to the
major axis, cutting the curve again in R.

96. Through the middle point of a focal chord a straight

line is drawn at right angles to it to meet the axis in R prove ;

that SR bears to SC the duplicate ratio of the chord to the dia-

meter parallel to it, S being the focus and C the centre.

97. The tangent at a point P meets the auxiliary circle in

Q' to which corresponds Q on the ellipse prove that the tangent
;

at Q cuts the auxiliary circle in the point corresponding to P.

 Examples, 89

98. If a chord be drawn to a series of concentric, similar,

and similarly situated ellipses, and meet one in P and Q, and if
on FQ as diameter a circle be described meeting that ellipse again
in RSy shew that RS is constant in position for all the elUpses.

99. An elUpse touches the sides of a triangle ;

prove that if

one of its foci move along

the arc of a circle passing through two
of the angular points of the triangle, the other will move along
the arc of a circle through the same two angular points.

100. The normal at a point P

of an ellipse meets the con-
jugate axis in K, and a circle is described with centre and pass- K
ing through the foci S and H. The lines /SQ, HQ, drawn through
any point Q of this circle, meet the tangent at P in ^ and t ;

prove that T and t lie on a pair of conjugate diameters.

101. If SP^ S'Q be parallel focal distances drawn towards

the same parts, the tangents at P and Q intersect on the auxiliary
circle.

102. Having given one focus, one tangent and the eccen-
tricity of an ellipse, prove that the locus of the other focus is a
circle.

103. PSQ is a focal chord of an ellipse, and pq is any parallel

chord ; if PQ meet in T the tangent at p,
pq : PQ :: Sp : ST.

104. If an ellipse be inscribed in a quadrilateral so that one

focus equidistant from the four vertices, the other focus must
is

be at the intersection of the diagonals.

105. If a pair of conj ugate diameters of an ellipse be produced

to meet either directrix, prove that the orthocentre of the triangle
80 formed is the corresponding focus of the curve.

106. A pair of conjugate diameters intercept, on the tangent

at either vertex, a length which subtends supplementary angles
at the foci.
 CHAPTER IV.

THE HYPERBOLA.

Definition.

An hyperbola is the curve traced by a point which

moves in such a manner, that its distance from a given
point is in a constant ratio of greater inequality to its
distance from a given straight line.

Tracing tJie Curve.

89. Let S be the focus, EX the directrix, and A the

vertex.

Then, as in Art. 2, any number of points on the curve

may be obtained by taking successive positions of on the E
directrix.
 The Eyperhola. 91

In SX produced, find a point A' such that

SA' : A'X :: aS'.4 : AX,
then A^ is the other vertex as in the ellipse, and, the
eccentricity being greater than unity, the points A and A'
are evidently on opposite sides of the directrix.
Find the point P corresponding to E, and let A'E, PS
produced meet in P\ P'K' then, if perpendicular to the
directrix meet SE produced in L\
P'L' : P'K' :: SA A'X :

:: SA : AX,
and the angle
• p'rs=L'sx=rsp';
.\SP'==P'L\
Hence P' is a point in the curve, and PSP' is a focal
chord.

Following out the construction we observe that, since

SA is greater than AX, there are two points on the

directrix, e and e', such that Ae and Ae' are each equal to

If E coincide with e, the angle

QSL = LSN=ASe = AeS,

Hence SQ, AP
are parallel, and the corresponding
point of the curve is at an infinite distance and similarly ;

the curve tends to infinity in the direction Ae\

92 The Hyperbola.
Further, the angle ASE is less or greater than AES,
according as the point E is, or is not, between e and e^.

Hence, when E
is below e, the curve lies above the
axis, to the right of the directrix ; when between e and X,
below the axis to the left when between and ef, above
; X
the axis to the left and when above e% below the axis to
;

the right. Hence a general idea can be obtained of the

form of the curve, tending to infinity in four directions, as
in the figure of Art. 98.

Definitions.

TTie line AA^ is called the transverse axis of the

hyperbola. •

The middle pointy (7, of A A' is the centre.

Any straight line, drawn through (7, and terminated

by tJw curve is called a diameter,
90. Prop. I. IfP
any point of an hyperbola, and
be
AA' its and if A'P, and PA produced,
transverse axis,
{or PA and PA' produced) meet the directrix in E and
F, EF subtends a right angle at the focus.
Let PKL, perpendicular to the directrix^ meet SF
produced in Z.

Then PL ; SA' v. PF \ A'F

:: PK\ A'X,
PL ; PK :: SA' : AX;
/. S!P=PL,
 The Hyperbola. 93

K LSP = PLS=LSX.
Similarly, if PS be produced to P\ ES bisects the
angle ^^'P^;

/. ESF is a right angle.

91. We shall now prove the existence of another focus
and directrix corresponding to the vertex A\
In A A' take a point X' such that AX' = AX^ and
through X' draw a straight line perpendicular to AA',
Also iu SA^ produced, take a point S' such that A'S' = AS.

Let A'P and P^ produced meet the perpendicular

through X in /and e, and join S'e, S'f,

Jj a K P/ I

"^I-^-^t"^'"^"^

v^
jS'\A X! X
f^

Then eX : EX :: AX' : AX,

:: AX AX\:

:: FX :/X;
.\ eX ,fX = EX, FX=SX^ = SX'^,
Hence eS'fh a right angle.

Through P draw PKG parallel to the axis meeting

EXy eX in Ky G, and eS'y aS'/ produced in L and I;
94 The Hyperbola.
then PL : PG :: S'A : AX\
and P/ : P6^ :: S'A' ; -4'X';

.-. PL = Pl]
and, ZaS'Y being a right angle,

S'P^PL^Pl;
.'. S'P : PG :: S'A' : A'X'-,

and the curve can be described by means of the focus S'

and directrix eX\

Hence it follows that the curve is symmetrical with

regard to the point (7, and that it lies wholly without the
tangents at the vertices and A\ A
92. Prop. II. If PN he the ordinate of a point P,
and ACA' the transverse axis, PN^ is to AN. NA' in a
constant ratio.

Join AP, A'P, meeting the directrix in E and F,

fig. Art. 90.

Then PN AN EX : :: : AX,
and PN A'N FX : :: : A'X;
:. PN^ : AN. NA' :: EX FX AX.A'X . :

:: SX-'^ : AX.A'X.
Since ESFis a right angle; that is, PN^ is to AN. NA',
in a constant ratio.

Through C, the middle point of A A', draw CB at right

angles to the axis, and such that

BC^ : AC^ :: SX^ :AX.A'X;

then PN^ AN.NA' : :: BC^ AG\ :

or PN^ GN^-AC^ : :: BG^ AG". :

Cor. If PM be the perpendicular from P on BG,

PM= GN, and PN= GM;
/. GM^ : PM^-AG^ :: BG^ : AG\
 The Hyperbola. 95

CM"" : BC" :: PM^--AC^ : ^(7%-

CM^^BC^ : BC^ PM'' :: : AG\
PM^ : GM^ + BG^ :: AG'' : ;
^C72.

Conversely, if a point P move

manner that PN^ is
in such a
to ^xV . NA' in a constant ratio, PN
being the distance of P
from the line joining two fixed points A and A'y and iV not being
between A and ^', the locus of P
is an hyperbola of which A A'

is the transverse axis.

93. If we describe the circle on AA' as diameter,

which we may term for convenience, the auxiliary circle,
the rectangle AN, ISA' is equal to the square on the
tangent to the circle from N.

Hence the preceding theorem may be thus expressed :

The ordinate of an hyperbola tangent from is to the

its foot to the auxiliary circle in the ratio of the conjugate
to the transverse axis,

Dep. If GB' be taken equal to GB, on the other side of

the axis, the line BGB' is called the conjugate axis.

The two lines AA\ BB^ are the principal axes of the
curve.

When these lines are equal, the hyperbola is said to be

equilateral, or rectangular.

The lines AA\ BB' are sometimes called major and

minor axes, but, as AA' is not necessarily greater than
BB', these terms cannot with propriety be generally em-
ployed.

94. Prop. III. If AG

A' be the transverse axis, G
the centre, S one of the foci, and the foot of the X
directrix,

GS : GA :: GA : GX :: SA : AX,
and GS : GX :: GS^ : GA^
Interchanging the positions of S and X for a new

S' A' X' G X A S

96 The Hyperbola.
figure, the proof of these relations is identical with the
proof given for the ellipse in Art. 57.

95. Prop. IV. If S he a focus, and B an extremity

oftJie conjugate axis.

BC'-=AS. SA', and Sr^=AC'^BCP.

Referring to Art. (94), ;S'X=.S'^ +ylX;
.-. SX AX : :: SA+AX : AX,
:: SC+AC : AC]
and similarly

SX A'X : :: SG-AG AG) :

.'. SX'' SG^-AC^ AG\

: AX.A'X :: :

But BG^ AC^ SX'^ AX.A'X;

: :: :

BG^=SG^-AG^=AS.SA\
.'.

Hence SC^ = AG^-hBG^ = AB^;

i. e. SG is equal to the line joining the ends of the axes.

96. Prop. V. The difference of the focal distances of

any point is equal to the transverse axis.

For, if PKK\ perpendicular to the directrices, meet

them in K and K\
S'P : PK' :: SJ [ : AX,
and SP : PK :: SA [ :AX]
S'P- SP : KK' :: SA :

AA' : XX, Art. 93.

.'. S'P--SP = AA'.
Cor. 1. SP :: NX AG :;: :: CX;
,*. SP :: AG NX :;: : GX;
•. SP-hAG AG : :: : GN : ; ax,
SP+AG GN : :;: SA AX. ',
:

y S'P--AG GN : : : SA :AX. :
 The Hyperbola. 97
Cor. 2. Hence also it can he easily shewn, that the
difference of the distances ofany point from the foci of
an hyperbola^ greater or less than the transverse axis,
is

according as the point 'is within or without the concave

side of the curve.

97. Mechanical Construction of the Hyperbola,

Let a straight rod S^L be moveable in the plane of the
paper about the point S\ Take a piece of string, the

length of which is less than that of the rod, and fasten one
end to a fixed point S, and the other end to L, then press-
ing a pencil against the string so as to keep it stretched,
and a part of it PL in contact v/ith the rod, the pencil will
trace out on the paper an hyperbola, having its foci at S
and >S^', and its transverse axis equal to the difference be-
tween the length of the rod and that of the string.
This construction gives the right-hand branch of the
curve ; to trace the other branch, take the string longer
than the rod, and such that it exceeds the length of the
rod by the transverse axis.

We may remark that by taking a longer rod MS'L, and

taking the string longer than SS^-^S'L, so that the
point P will be always on the end S'M of the rod, we shall
obtain an ellipse of which S and aS" are the foci. More-
over, remembering that a parabola is the limiting form of
an ellipse when one of the foci is removed to an infinite
distance, the mechanical construction, given for the para-
bola, will be seen to be a particular case of the above.
B. c. s. 7
98 The Hyperbola.
The Asymptote,
98. We have shewn in Art. (89) that if two points, e
and 6^, be taken on the directrix such that
Ae = Ae'=AS,
the lines eA, e'A meet the curve at an infinite dis-
tance.

These lines are parallel to the diagonals of the rect-

angle formed by the axes, for

Ae' : AX AS
:: : AX,
: SO : AG, Art. (93),

: AB : AC, Art. (95).

Definition. The diagonals of the rectangle formed

hy the principal axes are called the asymptotes.

We
observe that the axes bisect the angles between the
asymptotes, and that if a double ordinate, when PNP\
produced, meet the asymptotes in Q and Q',
PQ=PQ\
The figure appended will give the general form of the
curve and its connection with the asymptotes and the
auxiliary circle.
 The Hyperbola, 99
99. Prop. VI. The asymptotes intersect the directrices
in the same points as the auxiliary circle^ and the lines
joining the corresponding foci with the points of inter-
section are tangents to the circle.

If the asymptote CL meet the directrix in Z>, joining

SD, fig. Art. (98), Cr' = AG^^BG'^=SC\
and CD ; CX :: CL : CA
SC : CA
CA : CX;
/. CD = CA, and D is on the auxiliary circle.

Also
CS.CX=CA^=CD^;
/. CDS is a right angle, and SD is the tangent at D.
Cor. CD^ + SD^ = CS^=AC^ + BC^ Art. 95;

.\ SD=BC
100. An asymptote may also be characterized as the ultimate
position of a tangent when the point of contact is removed to an
infinite distance.

It appears from Art. (7) that in order to find the point of

contact of a tangent drawn from a point T in the directrix, we
must join T with the focus S^ and draw through S& straight line
at right angles to ST; this line will meet the curve in the point
of contact.

In the figure of Art. (98) we know that the straight line through
S, parallel to eA or CL, meets the curve in a point at an infinite
distance, and also that this straight line is at right angles to SD,
since SD is at right angles to CD. Hence the tangent from D,
that is the line from D to the point at an infinite distance, is
perpendicular to DS and therefore coincident with OD.

The asymptotes therefore touch the curve at an infinite

distance.

101. Def. If an hyperbola be described, having for

its transverse and conjugate axes, respectively, the con-
jugate and transverse axes of a given hyperbola, it is
called the corrugate hyperbola,
7—2
100 The Hyperbola.
It is evident from the preceding article that the conju-
gate hyperbola has the same asymptotes as the original
hyperbola, and that the distances of its foci from the centre
are also the same.

The relations of Art. (92) and its Corollary are also true,
mutatis mutandis, of the conjugate hyperbola; thus, in
Art (92), if P
be a point in the conjugate hyperbola,

and GM^ : PM'^^AG'' :: BG'^ : AG\

Dep. a straight line drawn through the centre and
terminated hy the conjugate hyperbola is also called a
diameter of the original hyperbola.

102. Prop. YII. If from any point Q in one of the

asymptotes, two straight lines QPN, be drawn at QBM
right angles respectively to the transverse and conjugate
axes, and meeting the hyperbola in P, p, and the conju-
gate hyperbola in R, r,

QP.QP =BG\
and QB.Qr=AC\

\fi"\\^^^
\r \w H^Oyf
X y

\ /^ \.
B
^_^^^
y

"^
P

X 9.
V

qm : BG^ :: GN^ : AG^;

/. QN^^BG^ : BG' :: GN^-AG^ : AG'
: Pm : L?6^;
 The Hyparholn. 101
.\ QN^-BC^=PN\
or QN'^PN''=BG^;
i. a QP.Qp = BC^

Similarly, QM^ AG^ : :: CM^ BG^; :

.-. QM^-AG^: AG^ :: GM^-BG^ BG\ :

EM^ AG^;
:: :

/. QM^-EM^ = AG^
or QR,Qr=AG\
These relations may also be given in the form,

QP.Pq = BG\ QR . i?g' = AG\

CoR. If the point Q be taken at a greater distance
from G, the length QN and therefore Q/? will be increased
and may be increased indefinitely.
But the rectangle QP . Qp is of finite magnitude ;

hence QP
be indefinitely diminished, and the curve,
will
therefore, as it recedes from the centre, tends more and
more nearly to coincidence with the asymptote.
A further illustration is thus given of the remarks in
Art. (loo).

103. If in the preceding figure the line Qq be pro-

duced to meet the conjugate hyperbola in E and e, it can
be shewn, in the same manner as in Art. (102), that

QE.Q6 = BG''\
102 The Hyperhda.
and this equality is still true when the line Qq lies between
G and A, in which case Qq does not meet the hyperbola.

Properties of the Tangent a^id Normal,

104. Prop. VIII. The tangent at any point bisects

the angle between the focal distances of that pointy and the
normal is equally inclined to the focal distances.
Let the normal at P meet the axis in G.

Then, Art. (15),

SG : SP :: SA : AX,
and JS'G : S'P :: SA : AX;
.\ SG S'G : :: SP SP; :

and therefore the angle between SP and S^P produced is

bisected by PG.
Hence PTthe tangent, which is perpendicular to PG,
bisects the angle SPS\
Cor. 1. li andPT GP
produced meet, respectively,
the conjugate axis in t and g, it can be shewn, in exactly
the same manner as in the corresponding case of the ellipse,
Art. 64, that the circle which circumscribes SPS' also
passes through t and g.

CoR, 2. If an ellipse be described having S and S' for

its foci, and if this ellipse meet the hyperbola in P, the
normal at P to the ellipse bisects the angle SPS\ and
therefore coincides with the tangent to the hyperbola.

Hence, if an ellipse and an hyperbola be confocaL that

is, have the same foci, they intersect at right angles.

105. Prop. IX. Every diameter is bisected at the

centre, and the tangents at the ends of a diameter are
parallel.

Let PCp be a diameter, and PN, pn the ordinates.

Then CN'^ : Cn^ :: Pm : pn\
:: GN^-AG^ : Cn^^AC-,
 The Hyperbola. 103

hence CN=Cn,
and :.CF=Cp,

Again, FT, pt be the tangents,

if

The triangles PCS, pCS' are equal in all respects,

and therefore SPS'p is a parallelogram.
Hence the angles SPS\ SpS' are equal, and therefore
SPT=S'pt.
But JSPG=S'pOy
/. the difference TPC= the difference tpG, and PT
is parallel to pL
It can be shewn in exactly the same manner, that, if
the diameter be terminated by the conjugate hyperbola,
it is bisected in C, and the tangents at its extremities are
parallel.

Cor. The distances SP, Sp are equally inclined to the

tangents at and p. P
106. Prop. X. The perpendiculars from the foci
on any tangent meet the tangent on the auxiliary circle,
and the semi-conjugate axis is a mean proportional be-
tween tlwir lengths.
Let SY, S'Y' be the perpendiculars, and let /S'F pro-
duced meet S'P in L,
Then the triangles SPY, LPY are equal in all re-
spects,

and>S'F=ZF.
104 The Hyperbola.
Hence, (7 being the middle point of aS'aS'' and Fof aSZ,
(7Fis parallel to S'L, and S'L=2GY.

But S'L=S'F-'PL=S'P-'SP = 2AC;

.-. CY=Aa,
and Y is on the auxiliary circle.
So also Y^ is a point in the circle.

Let /S'F produced meet the circle in Z, and join Y^Z;

then, Y^YZ being a right angle, ZY^ is a diameter and
passes through C. Hence, the triangles SCZ, S'G Y' being
equal,
S'Y=SZ,
and SY,S'Y=SY.SZ=^SA.SA' = BC^.
Cor. 1. HP'
be the other extremity of the diameter
PC, the tangent at P' is parallel to P
F, and therefore Z
is the foot of the perpendicular from S on the tangent
atP^
Cor. 2. If the diameter BCD', drawn parallel to the
tangent at P, meet S'P, SP in and E', Eis a PECY
parallelogram
.\PE=GY=AGy
and so also PE'=^GY'=AG.
107. Prop. XI. 7b draw tangents to an hyperbola
from a given point.
 The Hyperbola. 105

The construction of Art. (14) may be employed, or, as in

the cases of the ellipse and parabola, the following.
Let Q be the given point ; join SQ^ and upon SQ as

diameter describe a circle intersecting the auxiliary circle

in Fand F';
Q Y and Q Y' are the required tangents.
Producing aST to Z, so that YL = SY, draw S'L
cutting Q Fin P, and join SP,
The triangles SPY^ LP Y are equal in all respects,
and S'P-SP=S'L=2GY=2AG,
,\ P is a point on the hyperbola.
Also QPbisects the angle SPS\ and is therefore the
tangent at P. A similar construction will give the other
tangent QP\
If the point Q be within the angle formed by the
asymptotes, the tangents will both touch the same branch
of the curve but if it lie within the external angle, they
;

will touch opposite branches.

108. Prop. XII. If two tangents he drawn from any

point to an hyperbola they are equally inclined to the
focal distances of that point.
106 The Hyperbola.
Let PQ, P'Q be the tangents, aST, S'T, SZ, S'Z' the
perpendiculars from the foci; join YZ, Y'Z'.

Then the angles YSZ^ Y'S'Z' are equal, for they are
the supplements of YQZ, Y'QZ'.

Also 8Y.S'Y'^SZ.S'Z\ Art. (106);

or SYxSZv.S'Z' xS'Y'-,

:. the triangles YZS^ Y'S'Z' are similar,

and the angleYZS=Z' Y'S\

But the angle YQS= YZS, and Z'QS'=ZTS'
:. YQS==Z'QS'.
That the tangent QP, and the tangent
is, P^Q pro-
duced, are equally inclined to SQ and S'Q,
Or, producing S'Q, QP and QP^ are equally inclined
to QS and S'Q produced.
In exactly the same manner it can be shewn that if
QP, QP touch opposite branches of the curve the angles
PQS, P'QS' are equal.
Cor. If Q be a point in a confocal hyperbola, the nor-
mal at Q bisects the angle between SQ and S^Q produced
and therefore bisects the angle PQP\
Hence, iffrom any point of an hyperbola tangents he
drawn to a confocal hyperbola, these tangents are equally
 The Hyperbola. 107
inclined to the normal or the tangent at the pointy accord^
ing as it lies within or without that angle formed by the
asymptotes of the confocal which contains the transverse
cuves.

109. Prop. XIII. If FT, the tangent at F, meet the

transverse axis in T, and FN
he the ordinate,

GN. CT=A(P.
Let fall the perpendicular Sy upon FT, and join yN,
Cy, SF, and aS'P.

ThGmg\eCyT=S'Fy
^SFy
= the supplement of SNy
= GNy',
also the angle yCT is common to the two triangles CyT,
CyN\ these triangles are therefore similar,

and GN : Gy :: Gy : GT,
or GN,GT=Gy'^ = AG^,
Cor. 1. Hence GN.NT=GN^-GN.GT
^GN^-AG^
=AN.NA\
Cor. 2. Hence alsp it follows that

If any number of hyperbolas be described having the

same transverse axis^ and an ordinate be drawn cutting
108 The Hyperbola,
the hyperbolas, the tangents at the points of section will
all meet the transverse axis in the same point.

Cor. 3. If CN
be increased indefinitely, h dimi- CT
nished indefinitely, and the tangent ultimately passes
through Gy as we have already shewn, Art. (100).

110. Prop. XIV. If the tangent at P meet the con-

jugate axis in t^ and PN he the ordinate^
Ct,PN=BG\
For, Fig. Art. (109),
Then Ct . PN m CT NT .
-,

.-. Ct,PN: PN^ CT CN CN NT

:: . : ,

::Aa:AN.NA\
.-. Ct. PN : AC^ PN^ AN, NA\
:: :

v.BC^:AC\
and Ct.PN=BC\
111. Prop. XV. If the normal at P meet the trans-
verse axis in G, the co7ijugate axis in g^ and the diameter
parallel to the tangent at in F, P
PF.PG=BC^^ii^PF.Pg=AG^.
Let NP, PM, perpendicular to the axes, meet the dia-

meter CF in K and Z, and let the tangent meet the axes

in T and t.
 The Hyperbola, 109

Then KNG, KFG being right angles, a circle can be

described about KFNG, and therefore
PF, PG=PK. PN^ a PN .

^BG\

Similarly a circle can be drawn through FLMg ;

/. PF. Pg=PL. PM= CT. CN,

CoR. Hence PG Pg : :: BG^ : AG\

Also PNG, PMg are similar triangles;

/. NG MP PG Pg, : :: :

or NG GN BC^ AGl : :: :

Hence GG : (7iV^ :: aS'C^^ : AG^,

As in the case of the ellipse, it can be shewn that

GG,GT=Gg,Gt = SG'',
and that Gg : PN :: SG^ : ^(7^.

112. Prop. XVI. If PGp be a diameter, and QV

an ordinate, and if the tangent at Q meet the diameter
Pp in T,
GV.GT=GP\
110 The Hyperbola.
Let the tangents at P and p meet the tangent at Q in
R and r ;

Then the angle SPR=Spr, Cor. Art. (105),

and therefore if EN, rn be the perpendiculars on SP, sp,
the trianglesEPN, rpn are similar.
Draw RM, rm perpendiculars on SQ.
Then TR Tr RP rp,: :: :

:: iZiV' : m,
:: /2Jf rm, Cor. Art.
:
(13),

:: RQ : rQ.

Hence, Q F, RP, and rp being parallel,

TP:Tp::PV:pV;
.-. TP+Tp: Tp-TP::PV+pV:pV^PV,
or 2aP 2ar ; :: 2(7r : 2CP,
or CV.CT=CP\
 The Hyperbola. Ill
113. Prop. XVII. A diameter bisects all chords
parallel to the tangents at its extremities.
Let PCp hQ the diameter, and QQ' the chord, parallel

to the tangents at P
and p. Then if the tangents TQ^
TQ,' at Q and Q' meet the tangents at and p^ in the P
points E. E\ e, e\
EP = E'P and ep=-e'p, Art. (16);
/. The point T is on the line Pp ;

but 7!P bisects QQ' -,

that is, the diameter j[?(7P produced bisects QQ\

Def. The line DGd, drawn parallel to the tangent at
P, and terminated hy the conjugate hyperbola^ that is, the
diameter parallel to the tangent at P, is said to be con-
jugate to PCp.
A diameter therefore bisects all chords parallel to its
conjugate.

114. Prop. XVIII. If the diameter DCd be conju-

gate to PCp, then will PCp be conjugate to DCd,
Let the chord Q Vq be parallel to CD and be bisected
in V by CP produced.
Draw the diameter qCR, and join BQ meeting CD
in U.
Then BC= Cq and QV=Vq',
/. QR is parallel to CP,
112 The Hyperbola.
Also QU UR Cq
: :: : GR,
and QU=UR
/.

that is, CD
bisects the chords parallel to (7P, and PCp is

therefore conjugate to DCd,

Hence when two diameters are conjugate, each bisects

the chords parallel to the other.

Def. Chords drawn from the extremities of any

diameter to a point on the hyperbola are called sup-
plemental chords.

Thus, qQ, QR are supplemental chords, and they are

parallel to CD and CP; supplemental chords are there-
fore parallel to conjugate diameters.

Def. a line Q F, drawn from any point Q of an

hyperbola, parallel to a diameter DCd, and terminated
by the conjugate diameter PCp, is called an ordinate of
the diameter PCp, and if QV produced meet the curve
in Q\ Q VQ' is the double ordinate.

This definition includes the two cases in which QQ' may

be drawn so as to meet the same, or opposite branches of
the hyperbola.

115. Prop. XIX. Any diameter is a mean pro-

portional between the transverse axis and chord
the focal
parallel to the diameter.
This can be proved as in Art. 76.
 The Hyperbola. 113

Properties of Asymptotes,

116. Prop. XX. Iffrom any point Q in an asymp-

tote QPpq hedrawn meeting the curve in P, p and the
other asymptote in q^ and if CD he the semi-diameter
parallel to Qq,
QP.Pq = CJ}^ and QP =pq.
Through andP D
draw EPr, DTt perpendicular to
the transverse axis, and meeting the asymptotes.

Then QP EP : :: CD DT,
:

and Pr CD Dt;
Pq : :: :

:. QP.Pq EP,Pr CD^ DT,Dt.

: :: :

But EP.Pr = BC^ = DT.Dt, Art. (103),

QP.Pq =CD\ .-.

Similarly qP'PQ= CD^;

.-. QP.Pq = qp.pQ;
or, if V be the middle point of Qq,
QV^-PV^=QV^-pV\
Hence PV=pV,
and /. PQ=pq.
We
have taken the case in which Qq meets one branch
of the hyperbola. It may however be shewn in the same
manner that the same relations hold good for the case in
which Qq meets opposite branches.
B. C. S. 8
114 The Hyperhola,
Cor. If a straight line PP'p'p meet the hyperbola in
P, p^ and the conjugate hyperbola in P\p\ PP'=pp\
For, if the line meet the asymptotes in Q, ^,

and PQ = QP\
/. PP'=^pp\

117. Prop. XXI. The portion of a tangent^ which is

terminated by the asymptotes, is bisected at the point of
contact, and is equal to the parallel diameter,

LEI being the tangent. Fig. Art. (116), and DCd the
parallel diameter,draw any parallel straight line QPpq
meeting the curve and the asymptotes.
Then QP=pq\ and, if the line move parallel to itself
until it coincides with LI, the points P and p coincide with
island.-. Z^=^^.
Also QP Pq = (7i>^, always, and therefore
.

LE.El=CD\
or LE=CD.

It may be noticed that since the asymptotes are tangents,

the fact that LE — El is a particular case of the general property
demonstrated in Art. (16).

Properties of Conjugate Diameters.

118. Prop. XXII. Conjugate diameters of an hyper-

bola are also conjugate diameters of the conjugate hyper-
bola, and the asymptotes are diagonals of the parallelch
gram formed by the tangents at their extremities,
PCp and DCd being conjugate, let QVq, a double
ordinate of CD, meet the conjugate hyperbola in Q
and q^.

Then QV^Vq,
and QQ' = qq. Cor. Art. (116);

/. Q^V=Vq\
 The Hyperbola. 115

That is, CD bisects the chords of the conjugate hyperbola

parallel to (7P.

Hence CD and CP are conjugate in both hyperbolas,

and therefore the tangent at is parallel to CP,D
Let the tangent at P meet the asymptote in L ; then
PL = CD, Art. (117).

Hence LD is parallel and equal to CP;

but the tangent at D parallel to CP
is

.*. LD is the tangent at D,

Completing the figure, the tangents at p and d are
parallel to those at P and Z>, and therefore the asymptotes
are the diagonals of the parallelogram Lll'L\

Cor. Hence, joining PD, it follows that PD is parallel

to the asymptote ICL'^ since LP = PL\ and LD — Dl.
119. Prop. XXIII. If QV he an ordinate of a dia-
meter PCp^ and DCd the conjugate diameter,

QV^ : PV, Vp :: CD^ : (7Pl

Let Q F, and the tangent at P, meet the asymptote in

R and Z.
Then LP being equal to CD,
Rr' : CD^ :: CV^ :: CP";
8—2
116 Tlie Hyperbola.

But RV^'-QV^=CD\

Hence ^1^2 : CD"^ :: CV^^CP^ : (7PS

or Qr2 : PF. Vp :: aZ)^ : CPl

120. Prop. XXIY. If he an ordinate of a dia- QV

meter PCp, and if the tangent at Q meet the conjugate
diameter, DCd, in tj

ct,Qv=cm
For, fig. Art (113),

Ct : QV CT VT,:: ;

and /. Ot.QV : QV^ CV.CT :: : CV. FT.

But CV.CT=CP^, Art. (112),

and GV. VT=CJ^''CF.CT=CF^-GP^;

.-. Ot.QF : QF^ :: CP^ : OF^-GP^,
:: (7i>2 : QF^. Art. (119).

Hence Gt.QF=GD\

121. Prop. XXY. 7)^ AGa, BGh he conjugate dia-

meters, and PGp, DGd another pair of conjugate dior
meters, and ifPN, DM he ordinates ofAGa,

GM PN AG : :: : BG,
and DM GN : :: BG : -4C1
 Tlie Hyperbola. 117

Let the tangents at P and D meet A Cain T and t]

then CN. CT=AG' = CM. Ct, Arts. (112) and (120),

/. CM CN : :: CT : Ct,

:: Pr : (7i>,

:: PN : 2>if/,

:: CN : ifeT^;

.-. CN'' = CM , Mt = CM^ + CM ,Ct

= CM^+AC%
and CM^^CN^-AC\
But PiV2 : Cm-AC^ ^5(72 ^67^; :: :

/. PiVT (7i^f
: BC ^(7; :: :

and, similarly, DM CN BC AC,

: :: :

Cor. We have shewn in the course of the proof, that

CN''-CM^=ACl
Similarly, if Pn, Dm be ordinates of BC,
Cm^-Cn^=BC^',
that is, DM^- PN' = BC^
and it must be noticed that these relations are shewn for
any pair of conjugate diameters ACa, BCb, including of
course the axes.
118 The Hyperbola,
122. Prop. XXVI. If CP, CD he conjugate serni-
diameters, and AG, BG the semi-axes,
Cr'-GD'^ = AG^-BGK
For, drawing the ordinates PN, DM, and remembering
that in this case the angles at N and M are
right angles,
we have, from the figure of the previous article,
CP'=CN^ + PN\
CD^ = CM^ + DM\
But CN^- CM^=AC^ and DM^-Pm = BG'^;
:, CP'-CD'=AG^-BGl

123. Prop. XXVII. If the normal at P meet the axes

in G and g,
PG CD : :: BC : AC,
and Pg : CD :: AC : BC.
For the proofs of these relations, see Art. (79).

Observe also that

PG.Pg = CD%
and that
Gg : CD :: SC^ : AC.BG.
124. Prop. XXVIII. The area of the parallelogram
formed by the tangents at the ends of conjugate diaineters
is equal to the rectangle contained by the axes.

Let CP, CD
be the semi-diameters, and PN, DM the
ordinates of the transverse axis.
 The Hyperbola, 119
Let the normal at P meet CD in F, and the axis in
G. Then PNG, CDM are similar triangles, and, exactly
as in Art. (80), it can be shewn that
PF,CD=^AG.Ba
125. Prop. XXIX. If SP, JS'P be the focal dis-
tance of a point P, and CD be conjugate to CP,
SP.S'P=CDl
Attending to the figure of Art. (106), the proof is the
same as that of Art. (81).

126. Prop XXX. If the tangent at P meet a pair

of conjugate diameters in T and t, and CD be conjugate
to CPy
PT.Pt=CD^.
This can be proved as in Art. (82).

It can also be shewn that if the tangent at P meet

two parallel tangents in T^ and f,
pr.Pf=CD\
127. Prop. XXXI. Xf the tangent at P meet the
asymptotes in L and L\
CL.CU=SC\
Let the tangent at A meet the asymptotes in K and

X'\
120 The Hyperbola.
K'; then, Arts. 118 and 124, the trian§
\
triangles LCL\ KGK are
of equal area, and therefore
/herefore

CL : CK' :: CK : GL, Euclid, Book vi.,

or CL,CL'^CK^

CoR. If PH, PH' be drawn parallel to, and ter-

minated bj the asymptotes,
4..PH.PH'^CS^,
for CL^^PH\ and CL' = 2PH,

128. Prop. XXXII. Pairs of tangents at right angles

to each other intersect 07i a fixed circle,

PT,QT being two tangents at right angles, let SY^

perpendicular to PT^ meet S'P in K,

Then, Art. (108), the angle

S'TY'=QTS,
and obviously, KTP = P TS;
therefore S'TY' is complementary to KTP, and S'TKis
a right angle.
 The Hyperbola. 121

Hence

= 2 ^7^4-2
. . CS"" by Euclid n. 12 and 13;

and the iocus of T is a circle.

If -4 (7 be less than BG, this relation is impossible.

In this case, however, the angle between the asymp-

totes is greater than a right angle, and the angle PTQ
between a pair of tangents being always greater than the
angle between the asymptotes is greater than a right angle.
The problem is therefore ci priori impossible for the
hyperbola, but becomes possible for the conjugate hyper-
bola.

As in the case of the ellipse, the locus of T is called

the director circle.

129. Prop. XXXIII. The rectangles contained hy the

segments of any two chords which intersect each other
are in the ratio of the squares on the parallel diameters.

Through any point in a chord QOQ' draw the dia-

W
meter ORR' and
; let CD be parallel to QQ\ CP conjugate
to CDy and bisecting QQ in V,
122 The Hyperbola.
Draw RUsLii ordinate of OP,
Then EU^ : CU^^-CF^ :: CD^ : CP^,

But RU"" : cm :: Or2 : CF';

.-. az>2 . cu^ az>2+Qr_or2
..
; C7r2,

or Ciy : CD^+QV^-OV^ C£^2 ::

. cjr2^

:: (7i22 : CO^;
.-. C7i>2 : Qr2-C)r2 :: CR^ : CG'-CR'',
or CD'^ : QO,OQ' :: Ci?^ : OR, OR'.
Similarly, if g'O^' be any other chord, and Cd the
parallel semi-diameter,

CdP^ : qO.O<i :: C722 : OR. OR-,

.-. QO.OQ' : qO.Oq; :: OD^ : (7^2.

that is, the ratio of the rectangles depends only on the

directions of the chords.

Prop. XXXIY. If a circle intersect an hyperhola

in four points, the several pairs of the chords of inter-
section are equally inclined to the axes.

For the proof, see Art. (87).

 Examples, 123

Examples.

1. If a circle be drawn so as to touch two fixed circles

externally, the locus of its centre is an hyperbola.

2. If the tangent at B to the conjugate meet the latus

rectum in D, the triangles SCD^ SXD are similar.

3. Thestraight line drawn from the focus to the directrix,

parallel to an asymptote, is equal to the semi-latus-rectum, and
is bisected by the curve.

4. Given the asymptotes and a focus, find the directrix^

5. Given the centre, one asymptote, and a directrix, find

the focus.

6. Parabolas are described passing through two fixed points,

and having their axes parallel to a fixed line the locus of their
;

foci is an hyperbola.

7. The base of a triangle being given, and also the point of

contact with the base of the inscribed circle, the locus of the
vertex is an hyperbola.

8. If the normal at P meet the conjugate axis in g, and

gN be the perpendicular on /SP, then PN—AQ,
9. Draw a tangent to an hyperbola, or its conjugate, parallel
to a given line.

10. If A A' be the axis of an ellipse, and PNP' a double

ordinate, the locus of the intersection of ^'P and P'A is an hy-
perbola.

11. The tangent at P bisects any straight line perpendicular

to AA\ and terminated by APy and A'P,
12. If P(7jp be a diameter, and if Sp meet the tangent at P
inr,
SP=ST.
13. Given an asymrtote, the focus, and a point; construct
the hyperbola.

14. A circle can be

drawn through the foci and the inter-
sections of any tangent with the tangents at the vertices.
15. Given an asymptote, the directrix, and a point; con-
struct the hyperbola.
124 The Hyperbola.
16. If through any point of an hyperbola straight lines are
drawn parallel to the asymptotes and meeting any semi-diameter
CQ in P and R,
CP CR = CQ\
,

17. PN is an ordinate and NQ parallel ir\ AB meets the

conjugate axis in Q; prove that QB . QB^ — PN'^.
18. NP is an ordinate and Q a point in the curve; AQ,
A'Q meet NP in D and ^ prove that ND NE=NP\
; .

19. If a tangent cut the major axis in the point T, and per-
pendiculars STf HZ be let fall on it from the foci, then
AT.A'T=YT.ZT,
20. In the tangent at Pa point Q is taken such that PQ is

proportional to CD ; shew that the locus of Q is an hyperbola.

21. Tangents are drawn to an hyperbola, and the portion of

each tangent intercepted by the asymptotes is divided in a con-
stant ratio; prove that the locus of the point of section is an
hyperbola.

22. If the tangent and normal at P meet the conjugate

axis in t and K respectively, prove that a circle can be drawn
through the foci and the three points P, t, K,
Shew also that

GK : SK :: SA : AX,
and St : tK :: £0 : CD,
CD being conjugate to CP.

23.Sliew that the points of trisection of a series of conter-

minous on branches of two hyperbolas ; and
circular arcs lie
determine the distance between their centres.

24. If the tangent at any point P cut an asymptote in T,

and if SP cut the same asymptote in Q, then SQ=QT,
25. A
series of hyperbolas having the same asymptotes is
cut by a straight line parallel to one of the asymptotes, and
through the points of intersection lines are drawn parallel to the
other, and equal to either semi-axis of the corresponding hyper-
bola: prove that the locus of their extremities is a parabola.

26. Prove that the rectangle P7

PY' in a,n ellipse is equal
.

to the square on the conjugate axis of the confocal hyperbola

passing through P,
 Examples, 125
27. If the tangent at P
meet one asymptote in T, and a
line TQ
be drawn parallel to the other asymptote to meet the
curve in Q; prove that if PQ be joined and produced both ways
to meet the asymptotes in R and B! , RR' will be trisected at the
points P and Q,
28.The tangent at a point P of an ellipse meets the hyper-
bola having the same axes as the ellipse in C and D. If Q be
the middle point of CD, prove that OQ, and OP are equally
inclined to the axes, being the centre of the ellipse.

29.Given one asymptote, the direction of the other, and

the position of one focus, determine the position of the vertices.

30. Two points are taken on the same branch of the curve,
and on the same side of the axis ; prove that a circle can be
drawn touching the four focal distances.
31. Supposing the two asymptotes and one point of the
curve to be given in position, shew how to construct the curve ;
and find the position of the foci.
32. Given a pair of conjugate diameters, construct the axes.
33. If PH, PK be drawn
parallel to the asymptotes from a
point P on a line through the centre meet them
the curve, and if

in i2, T, and the parallelogram PRQT be completed, Q is a point

on the curve.
34. The ordinate NP at any point of an ellipse is produced
to a point Q, such that NQ is equal to the subtangent at P;
prove that the locus of Q is an hyperbola.
35. If a given point be the focus of any hyperbola, passing
through a given point and touching a given straight line, prove
that the locus of the other focus is an arc of a fixed hyperbola.

36. An ellipse and hyperbola are described, so that the foci

of each are at the extremities of the transverse axis of the other
prove that the tangents at their points of intersection meet the
conjugate axis in points equidistant from the centre.

37. A
circle is described about the focus as centre, with a
radius equal to one-fourth of the latus rectum : prove that the
focal distances of the points at which it intersects the hyperbola
are parallel to the asymptotes.

38. The tangent

at any point forms a triangle with the
asymptotes determine the locus of the point of intersection of
:

the straight lines drawn from the angles of this triangle to bisect
the opposite sides.
126 The Hyperbola.
39. If SYf S'Y' be the perpendiculars on the tangent at /*,
a circle can be drawn through the points F, Y', iV, C,

40. The straight lines joining each focus to the foot of the
perpendicular from the other focus on the tangent meet on the
normal and bisect it.

41. If the tangent and normal at P meet the axis in T and

42. If the tangent at P meet the axes in T and ^, the angles

PSit^ STP are supplementary.

43. If the tangent at P meet any conjugate diameters in T

and t, the triangles SPT^ S'Pt are similar.

44. If the diameter conjugate to CP meet SP and S'P in E

and E'f prove that the circles about the triangles SCEy S'CE' are
equal.

45. The locus of the centre of the circle inscribed in the tri-
angle SPS' is a straight line.

46. If PN be an ordinate, and NQ parallel to AP meet CP

in Q, AQ is parallel to the tangent at P.

47. If an asymptote meet the directrix in i>, and the tan-

gent at the vertex in ^, AD
is parallel to SE,

48. The radius of the circle touching the curve and its
asymptotes is equal to the portion of the latus rectum produced,
between its extremity and the asymptote.
49. If (? be the foot of the normal, and if the tangent meet
the asymptotes in L and M^ GL=-GM.

50.With two conjugate diameters of an ellipse as asymp-

totes,a pair of conjugate hyperbolas is constructed prove that :

if one hyperbola touch the ellipse, the other will do so likewise;

prove also that the diameters drawn through the points of con-
tact are conjugate to each other.

51. If two tangents be drawn the lines joining their inter-

sections with the asymptotes will be parallel.

52. The locus of the centre of the circle touching SP, S'P
produced, and the major axis, is an hyperbola.

53. If from a point P in an hyperbola, PK

be drawn parallel
to an asymptote to meet the directrix in K, then PK=SP,
54. If PD
be drawn parallel to an asymptote, to meet the
conjugate hyperbola in i>, CP and CD are conjugate diameters.
 Examples. 127
55. If QR be a chord parallel to the tangent at P, and if
QL^ PNj RM be drawn parallel to one asymptote to meet the
oiher,
CL.CM=CN^.
56. If a circle touch the transverse axis at a focus, and pass
through one end of the conjugate, the chord intercepted by the
conjugate is a third proportional to the conjugate and transverse
semi-axes.

57. A through one of the vertices, terminated by two

line
lines drawn through the other vertex parallel to the asymptotes,
is bisected at the other point where it cuts the curve.

58. If PSQ be a focal chord, and if the tangents at P and Q

meet in T, the difference between PTQ, and half PS'Q is a right
angle.

59. a straight line passing through a fixed point C meet

If
two OA^ OB m. A and B, and if P be taken in AB
fixed lines
such that GP^^CA CB^ the locus of P is an hyperbola, having
.

its asymptotes parallel to 0-4, OB,

60. If from the points P and Q, in an hyperbola there be

drawn PL, QM parallel to each other to meet one asymptote,
and PRf QN also parallel to each other to meet the other asymp-
tote, PZ Pi2 = Qif QA^.
. .

61. Prove that the locus of the point of intersection of two

tangents to a parabola which cut at a constant angle is an
hyperbola, and that the angle between its asymptotes is double
the external angle between the tangents.

62. An ordinate VQ any diameter CP is produced to

of
meet the asymptote in R, and the conjugate hyperbola in Q'
prove that QV^ + Q'V^ = 2R VK
Prove also that the tangents at Q and Q' meet the diameter
CP in points equidistant from (7.

63. A chord QPL meets an asymptote in L, and a tangent

from L is drawn touching at jK ; if PMj RE, QN, be drawn
parallel to the asymptote to meet the other,
PM+QN=2,RB.
64. Tangents are drawn from any point in a circle through
the foci ; prove that the lines bisecting the angle between the
tangents, or between one tangent and the other produced, ail
pass through a fixed point.
128 The Hyperbola.
65. If a circle through the foci meet two confocal hyper-
bolas in P and Q, the angle between the tangents at P and Q is
equal to PSQ,

66. If SYf S'Y' be perpendiculars on the tangent at P, and

if PiV be the ordinate, the angles PNYj PNY' are supplementary.

67. Find the position of P when the area of the triangle

YGY' is the greatest possible, and shew that, in that case,

PN,SC=-BC\
68. If the tangent at P meet the conjugate axis in *, the areas
pf the triangles SPS\ StS' are in the ratio of CD^ : St\

69. If SYf SZ be perpendiculars on two tangents which meet

in Ty YZ is perpendicular to S'T,

70. A through a focus, and having its centre

circle passing
on the transverse touches the curve; shew that the focal
axis,
distance of the point of contact is equal to the Latus Kectum.

71. If CQ be conjugate to the normal at P, then is CP con-

jugate to the normal at Q.

72. From a point in the auxiliary circle lines are drawn

touching the curve in P and P^ ; prove that SP, S^P' are parallel.

73. If the tangent and normal at P meet the axis in T and G,

CT. ca=scK
74. Find the locus of the points of contact of tangents to a
series of confocal hyperbolas from a fixed point in the axis.

75. Tangents to an hyperbola are drawn from any point in

one of tbe branches of the conjugate, shew that the chord of con-
tact will touch the other branch of the conjugate.

76. An ordinate NP meets the conjugate hyperbola in Q

prove that the normals at P and Q meet on the transverse axis.

77. A
parabola and an hyperbola have a common focus S
and same direction. If a line SPQ cut the curves
their axes in the
in P and Q, the angle between the tangents at P and Q is equal
to half the angle between the axis and the other focal distance of
the hyperbola.

78. If a hyperbola be described touching the four sides of a

quadrilateral which is inscribed in a circle, and one focus lie on
the circle, the other focus will also lie on the circle.
 Examples. 129

79. A is drawn touching the asymptotes of an

conic section
hyperbola. Prove that two of the chords of intersection of the
curves are parallel to the chord of contact of the conic with the
asymptotes.

80. A parabola P and an hyperbola ^have a common focus,

and the asymptotes of H are tangents to P
prove that the tangent
;

at the vertex of /* is a directrix of H, and that the tangent to

P at the point of intersection passes through the further vertex
oiH,
From a given point in an hyperbola draw a straight
81.
line such that the segment intercepted between the other inter-
section with the hyperbola and a given asymptote shall be equal
to a given line.

When does the problem become impossible ?

82. an ellipse and a confocal hyperbola intersect in P, an

If
asymptote passes through the point on the auxiliary circle of the
ellipse corresponding to P.

83. P
is a point on an hyperbola whose foci are *S and H;

another hyperbola is described whose foci are S and P, and whose

transverse axis is equal to SP-2PII: shew that the hyperbolae
will meet only at one point, and that they will have the same
tangent at that point.

84. A point D is taken on the axis of an hyperbola, of which

the excentricity is 2, such that its distance from the focus S is
equal to the distance of S from the further vertex A'; P being
any point on the curve, A'P meets the latus rectum in K, Prove
that DK and SP intersect on a certain fixed circle.

85. Shew that the locus of the point of intersection of tan-

gents to a parabola making with each other a constant angle
equal to half a right angle, is an hyperbola.

86. The tangent and normal at any point intersect the

asymptotes and axes respectively in four points which lie on a
circle passing through the centre of the curve.

The radius of this circle varies inversely as the perpendi-

cular from the centre on the tangent.

87. The difference between the sum of the squares of the

distances of any point from the ends of any diameter and the
sum of the squares of its distances from the ends of the conjugate
IS constant.
B. C. S.
9
130 The Hyperbola.

83. If a tangent meet the asymptotes in L and M, the angle

subtended by LM
at the farther focus is half the angle between
the asymptotes.

89. If PN be the ordinate of P, and PT the tangent,

prove that SP : ST :: AN : AT.

90. an ellipse and an hyperbola are confocal, the asymp-

If
totes pass through the points on the auxiliary circle of the
ellipse which coirespond to the points of intersection of the two
curves.

91. Two adjacent sides of a quadrilateral are given in

magnitude and position; if the quadrilateral be such that a

circle can be inscribed in it, the locus of the point of intersection

of the other two sides is an hyperbola.

92. The tangent at P meets the conjugate axis in t, and

tQ is perpendicular to SP ;
prove that SQ is of constant length.

93. An hyperbola, having a given transverse axis, has one

focus fixed, and always touches a given straight line; the locus
of the other focus is a circle.

94. A chord PEVQ nieets the directrices in R and V; shew

that PR VQ
subtend, each at the focus nearer to it, angles
and
of which the sum is equal to the angle between the tangents at
P and Q.

95. A
circle is drawn touching the transverse axis of an
hyperbola at its centre, and also touching the curve ; prove that
the diameter conjugate to the diameter through either point of
contact is equal to the distance between the foci.

96. A
parabola is described touching the conjugate axes of
an hyperbola at their extremities; prove that one asymptote is
parallel to the axis of the parabola, and that the other asymptote
is parallel to the chords of the parabola bisected by the first.

If a straight line parallel to the second asymptote meet the

hyperbola and its conjugate in P, P\ and the parabola in Q, Q^,
it may be shewn that PQ = P'Q\
97. If two points E and B' be taken in the normal PG such
that PE=PE'-CI), the loci of ^and E' are hyperbolas having
their axes equal to the sum and difference of the axes of the
given hyperbola.
 Examples, 131

98. The angular point ^ of a triangle ABC is fixed, and

the angle A is given, while the points B and C move on a fixed
straight line; prove that the locus of the centre of the circle
circumscribing the triangle is an hyperbola, and that the envelope
of the circle is another circle.

99. If a conic be described having for its axes the tangent

and normal at given ellipse, and touching at its

any point of a
centre the axis-raajor of the given ellipse, and if another conic
be described in the same manner but touching the minor axis at
the centre, prove that the foci of these conies lie in two circles
concentric with the given ellipse, and having their diameters
equal to the sum and difference of its axes.

100. An ellipse and an hyperbola are confocal ; if a tangent

to one intersect at right angles a tangent to the other, the locus
of the point of intersection is a circle.

Shew also that the difference of the squares on the distances

from the centre of parallel tangents is constant.

101. If a circle passing through any point P of the curve,

and having its centre on the normal at P, meets the curve again
in Q and 72, the tangents at Q and R intersect on a fixed straight
line.

102. If the tangent at P meet an asymptote in T, the angle

between that asymptote and S'P is double the angle STP,

103. Four tangents to an hyperbola form a rectangle. If

one side AB oi the rectangle intersect a directrix in jP, and S be
the corresponding focus, the triangles FSA^ FBS are similar,

104. An ellipse and hyperbola have the same transverse

axis, and their eccentricities are the reciprocals of one another;
prove that the tangents to each through the focus of the other
intersect at right angles in two points and also meet the conjugate
axis on the auxiliary circle.

105. The tangent and normal at any point of an hyperbola

intersect the asymptotes and axes respectively in four points
which lie on a circle passing through the centre of the hyperbola,
and the radius of this circle varies inversely as the distance of
the tangent from the centre.
9—2
 CHAPTER V.

THE RECTANGULAR HYPERBOLA

If the axes of an hyperbola be equal, the angle between

the asymptotes is a right angle, and the curve is called
equilateral or rectangular,

130. Prop. 1. In a rectangular hyperbola

CS'^=2AG\ dndSA^ = 2AX^
For CS^=AG^ + BC'' = 2AC^,
mid SA AX SO AG;
: :: :

SA^ = 2AXl
.'.

Observe that in the figure of Art. (9S), SDG is an

isosceles triangle, since

SD = BG,^ndGI> = AG,
and therefore SD = DG,
131. Prop. II. The asymptotes of a rectangular hy-
perbola bisect the angles between any pair of conjugate
diameters.
For, in a rectangular or equilateral hyperbola,

GA = GB,
and therefore, since GP^-GD'^=GA^-GB^,
GP = GD,
GP, GD being any conjugate semi-diameters.
 The Rectangular Hyperbola. 133
Also, figure Art. (118), the parallelogram CPLD is a
rhombus, and therefore CL bisects the angle PCD,
Cor. Supplemental chords are equally inclined to the
asymptotes, for they are parallel to conjugate diameters.

132. Prop. III. If CY

he the perpendicular from
the centre on the tangent at P, the angle PGY
is bisected
by the transverse axis, and half the transverse axis is a
mean proportional between CY
and CP,

For the angle

PCL = DCL
= YCL\
and .'. PCA=ACY.

Hence it follows that the triangles PCN, TCY are

similar, and that
CY CT : :: CN CP;
:

.-. CY,CP = CT.CN=AC\

134 The Rectangular Hyperbola,
133. Prop. IY. Diameters at right angles to each
other are equal.

Let CP, GP' be semi-diameters at right angles to each

other,and CD conjugate to CP,

Then, if (7Z, CD be the asymptotes, the angle

PCD = PCD
= DCL\
:, CP'=CD = CP,

134. Prop. V. If the normal at P meet the axes in

G and g^
CN= NG and PG^Pg = CD,
CD "being conjugate to CP.
For, Art. (Ill),

NG CN BC^
: :: : ^(7^
NG = CN, .-.

Also PF,PG=^BC^ and PF,Pg = AC^\

:, PG=^Pg,
Farther, Art. (123),

PG CD : :: EC AC\ :

:, PG^CD.

135. Prop. VI. If QV he an ordinate of a diameter

PCp,
QV^ = PV.Vp.
For QV^ : PV,Vp :: CD'^ : CP\
and CD^GP\
QV'^ = PF, Vp^CV^-CP^.
 The Rectangular Hyperbola. 135
136. Prop. VII. The angle between a chord PQ, and
the tangent at P, is equal to the angle subtended by PQ
at ttie other extremity of the diameter through P.

Let PQ and the tangent at P

meet the asymptote in
I and L, Then, if (7 F be conjugate to PQ,
the angle LPQ = PLG- VIG
^LCP-Va
r^VCP
^QpP.

Or thus, let QU parallel to the tangent at P, meet CP pro-

duced in U,

Then Qm=PU. Up,

or, QU PU
: :: Up : UQ,

Therefore the triangles PQ,Ui QJJp are similar, and the angle
QpU=P(iU=LPQ,

137. Prop. VI II. Any chord subtends, at the ends

of any diameter, angles which are equal or supple-
mentary.

This theorem divides itself into four cases, which aro

shewn in the appended figures.

Let QR be the chord, and Pp the diameter. Then, if

ZP be the tangent at P, fig. (1), the angle
LPQ = QpP,
136 The Rectangular Hyperbola,
and LPR=RpP',
/. QPR = QpR.

In fig. (2), {{2^1 be the tangent at^, parallel to PL,

QpR = Qpl + IpR = Qpl -\-pPR,

and QPR = QPL + LPR = Q;?P + LPR

/. QpR+QPR = lpP + LPp,

that is, Q^i2 and QPi2 are together equal to two right
angles.

In fig. (3)

QPR = QPL + LPp +pPE

= QpP-hPpUlpR
= QpR,
 Tlie Rectangular Hyperbola, 137

In fig. (4)

and EPL'=EpP;
/. QpR = QPL + EPr;

therefore QpE and QPE are together equal to two right

angles..

Hence it will be seen that when QE, or QE produced,

meet the diameter Pp between P and p, the angles sub-
tended at P and p are equal; in other cases they are
supplementary.

138. Prop. IX. If a rectangular h^jperhoJa circum-

scribe a triangle, it passes through the orthocentre.

Note. The orthocentre is the point of intersection of

the perpendiculars from the angular points on the oppo-
site sides.
138 The Rectangular Hyperbola,
If O be the ortliocentre, the triangles LOP, LQR are
similar, and
LO : LP LQ LR-,
:: :

.'. LO.LR = LP.LQ.

But, if a rectangular hyperbola pass through P, Q, i?,

the diameters parallel to LR, PQ
are equal hence is a
;

point on the curve.

139. Prop. X. 1/ a rectangular hyperbola circuiU'

scribe a triangle, the locus of its centre is the nine-point
circle of the triangle.
If PQR be the triangle, let L, L' be the points in
which an asymptote meets the sides PQ, PR,

Join (7, the centre of the hyperbola, with E and P, the

middle points of PR and PQ,
 Tlie Rectangular Hyperbola, 139

Then CF is conjugate to PQ, and CE to PR\ there-

fore the angle
FCE=FCL + L'GE
^CLF^EL'G
^PLU + PLL
^FPE
= FDE,
if D be the middle point of QR,
The circle passing through Z>, E, F
therefore passes
through C\ that is, C lies on the nine-point circle.

A similar proof is applicable to the case in which the

points P, Q, R lie on the same branch of the hyper-
bola.

140. The proof of Prop, (xxxiv), Art. (129), appears to fail

in this case, since it does not follow, when two diameters are
equal, that they are equally inclined to the axes.

It is however obvious a circle intersect an hyperbola,

that, if

either the four points of intersection are all onone branch of the
curve, or there are two on each branch on the other hand, ;

of two conjugate diameters, or of two diameters at right angles,

one meets the curve and the other does not. Hence if chords be
drawn parallel to these diameters one chord will meet opposite
branches, and the other will meet one branch only ; the cases
are therefore distinct, and the proof holds good.

Examples.

1. A circle is described on the transverse axis as diameter.

Prove that if any tangent be drawn to the hyperbola, the straight
lines joining the centre of the hyperbola with the point of con-
tact and with the middle point of the chord of intersection of the
tangent with the circle, are inclined to the asymptotes at com-
plementary angles.

2. POP is a transverse diameter, and Q T an ordinate ; shew

that Q F is the tangent at Q, to the circle circumscribing the tri-
angle PQp.
140 Examples.

3. If the tangent at P meet the asymptotes in L and M,

and the normal meet the transverse axis in G^ a circle can be
drawn through (7, Z, My and (?, and LGM is a right angle.
4. Find the locus of the middle point of a line cutting off a
constant area from the corner of a square.

5. If A A' be any diameter of a circle, PP' any ordinate to

it, then the locus of the intersections of AP, A'P' is a rectan-
gular hyperbola.

6. If from the extremities of any diameter lines be drawn

to any point in the curve, they will be equally inclined to the
asymptotes.

7. Given an asymptote and a tangent at a given point,

construct a rectangular hyperbola.

8. If CP, CDy and CP', CD' be two pairs of conjugate semi-

diameters, prove that the angles PCP\ DOIf are equal.

9. Focal chords parallel to conjugate diameters are equal.

10. Focal chords at right angles to each other are equal.

11. The points of intersection of an ellipse and a confocal

rectangular hyperbola are the extremities of the equi-conjugate
diameters of the ellipse.

12. If (7P, CD be conjugate semi-diameters, and PNj DM

ordinates of any diameter, the triangles PCN, DCM are equal in
all respects.

13. The distance of any point from the centre is a geome-

tric mean between its distances from the foci.

14. If P be a point on an equilateral hyperbola, and if the

tangent at Q meet CP in T^ the circle circumscribing CTQ,
touches the ordinate Q V conjugate to CP.

15. If a circle be described on SS' as diameter, the tangents

at the vertices will intersect the asymptotes in the circumference.

16. If two concentric rectangular hyperbolas be described,

the axes of one being the asymptotes of the other, they will
intersect at right angles.

17. If the tangents at two points Q and Q'meet in T, and if

CQi CQ! meet these tangents in R and K
the circle circumscrib-
^

ing RTR' passes through C,

 Examples. 141

18. If from a point Q in the conjugate axis QA be drawn

and
to the vertex, QR parallel to the transverse axis to meet the
curve, Qfi=:AQ.

19. Straight lines, passing through a given point, are

bounded by two fixed lines at right angles to each other; find
the locus of their middle points.

20. Given a point Q and a straight line ^^, if a line QCP

be drawn cutting ^^ in 0, and P be taken in it, so that PB
being a perpendicular upon ABj CD may be of constant magni-
tude, the locus of P is a rectangular hyperbola.

21. Every conic passing through the centres of the four

circles which touch the sides of a triangle, is a rectangular hyper-
bola.

22. Ellipses are inscribed in a given parallelogram, shew

that their foci lie on a rectangular hyperbola.

23. If two focal chords be parallel to conjugate diameters,

the lines joining their extremities intersect on the asymptotes.

24. If P, Q be two points of a rectangular hyperbola, centre

0, and QN the perpendicular let fall on the tangent at P, the
circlethrough 0, iV, and P will pass through the middle point of
the chord P, Q.
Having given the centre, a tangent, and a point of a rectan-
gular hyperbola, construct the asymptotes.

25. If a right-angled triangle be inscribed in the curve, the

normal at the right angle is parallel to the hypothenuse.

26. On opposite sides of any chord of a rectangular hyper-

bola are described equal segments of circles
; shew that the four
points, in which the which these segments belong,
circles, to
again meet the hyperbola, are the angular points of a parallelo-
gram.

27. Two lines of given lengths coincide with and move

along two fixed lines, in such a manner that a circle can always
be drawn through their extremities the locus of the centre is a
;

rectangular hyperbola.

28. If a rectangular hyperbola, having its asymptotes coin-

cident with the axes of an ellipse, touch the ellipse, the axis of
the hyperbola is a mean proportional between the axes of the
ellipse.
142 Examples.
29. The tangent at a point P of a rectangular hyperbola
meets a diameter QCQ^ in T. Shew that CQ, and TQ^ subtend
equal angles at P,

30. If A be any point in a rectangular hyperbola, of which

is the centre, BOG the straight line through at right angles
to OA, D any other point in the curve, and DB^ DG parallel to
the asymptotes, prove that a circle can be drawn through By D,
Ay and (7.

31. The angle subtended by any chord at the centre is the

supplement of the angle between the tangents at the ends of the
chord.

32. If two rectangular hyperbolas intersect in ^, J5, C, D;

the circles described on ABy GJ) as diameters intersect each other
orthogonally.

33. Prove that the triangle, formed by the tangent at any

point and its intercepts on the axes, is similar to the triangle
formed by the straight line joining that point with the centre,
and the abscissa and ordinate of the point.

34. The angle of inclination of two tangents to a parabola is

half a right angle; prove that the locus of their point of inter-
section is a rectangular hyperbola, having one focus and the cor-

responding directrix coincident with the focus and directrix of

the parabola.

35. P is a point on the curve, and PMy PN are straight

lines making equal angles with one of the asymptotes if MPy ;

NP be produced to meet the curve in P' and ^, then P'Q,' passes

through the centre.

36. A circle and a rectangular hyperbola intersect in four

points and one of their common chords is a diameter of the hyper-
bola; shew that the other common chord is a diameter of the
circle.

37. a chord of a circle and a diameter of a rectangular

-4 jB is

hyperbola; P
any point on the circle; AP^ BP, produced if
necessary, meet the hyperbola in Q, Q'y respectively; the point of
intersection of BQ^ A(^ will be on the circle.
 Examples, 143
38. is any diameter, Q any point on the curve, PRy
PP'
PR' drawn at right angles to PQ,
are F
Q respectively, inter-
secting the normal at Q, in 72, i2'; prove that QR and QR' are
equal.

39. tangents are drawn to a series of confocal

Parallel
ellipsesprove that the locus of the points of contact is a rectan-
;

gular hyperbola having one of its asymptotes parallel to the

tangents.

40. If tangcLts, parallel to a given direction, are drawn to a

system of circles passing through two fixed points, the points of
contact lie on a rectangular hyperbola.

41. The chords which subtend a right angle at a point P of

the curve are all parallel to the normal at P,

42. From the point of intersection of the directrix with one

of the asymptotes of a rectangular hyperbola a tangent is drawn

to the curve and meets the other asymptote in T : shew that CT

is equal to the transverse axis.

43. The normals at the ends of two conjugate diameters

intersect on the asymptote, and are parallel to another pair of
conjugate diameters.

44. If the base AB oi 2i triangle ABO be fixed, and if the

difference of the angles at the base is constant, the locus of the
vertex is a rectangular hyperbola.

45.The locus of the point of intersection of tangents to an

ellipsewhich make equal angles with the transverse and conjugate
axes respectively, and are not at right angles, is a rectangular
hyperbola whose vertices are the foci of the ellipse.

46. If 02* is the tangent at the point of a rectangular

hyperbola, and PQ a chord meeting it at right angles in T, the
two bisectors of the angle OCT bisect OP and OQ,
 CHAPTER VI.

THE CYLINDER AND THE CONE.

Definition.

141. If a straight line move so as to pass through the

circumference of a given circle, and to be perpendicular
to the plane of the circle, it traces out a surface called a
Right Circular Cylinder, The straight line drawn through
the centre of the circle perpendicular to its plane is the
Axis of the Cylinder.

It is evident that a section of the surface by a plane

perpendicular to the axis is a circle, and that a section by
any plane parallel to the axis consists of two parallel
lines.

142. Prop. I. Any section of a cylinder by a plane

not parallel or perpendicular to the axis is an ellipse.
\i APA' be the section, let the plane of the paper be
the plane through the axis perpendicular to APA\
Inscribe in the cylinder a sphere touching the cylinder
in the circle EFand the plane APA'in the point S,

Let the planes APA^, EF

intersect in XK, and from
any point P of the section draw PK
perpendicular to
XK.
 The Cylinder and the Cone, 145

Draw through P the circular section Q^j cutting ^P^

in PN, so that PN is at right angles to A A' and there-
fore parallel to XK.
Let the generating line through P meet the circle EF
in R and join SP.
;

Then PS and PB are tanjsfents to the sphere

.-. SP = PR = EQ.
Bat EQ : NX :: AE ^X ;

:: SA : ^X,
and NX^PK,
:, SP : PJT :: .S'^ : AX,
Also, being less than AX, SA is less than AX,
-4jE?
and the curve APA^ is therefore an ellipse, of which S is
the focus and XK
the directrix.

If another sphere be inscribed in the cylinder touching

AA^ in S', aS" isthe other focus, and the corresponding
directrix is the intersection of the plane of contact EP
with APA\
B, C. S.
10
146 The Cylinder and the Cone.

Producing the generating line RP to meet the circle

E^F' in R we observe that S'P=^PR\ and therefore
SP + S'P = BR' = EE'
= AE+AE'
= AS-^AS';
and AS' = AE' = A'F=A'S,
.'.SP+S'P=AA\
The transverse axis of the section is AA' and the con-

jugate, or minor, axis is evidently a diameter of a circular

section.

143.Def. If (9 be a fixed point in a straight line

OE drawn through the centre E
of a. fixed circle at right
angles to the plane of the circle, and if a straight line
QOP move so as always to pass through the circumference
of the circle, the surface generated by the line QOP is
called a Right Circular Cone,

The line OE is called the axis of the cone, the point

Q a'

is the vertex., and the constant angle POE is the semi-

vertical angle of the cone.
 TJie Cylinder and the Cone, 147
It is evident that any section by a plane perpendicular
to the axis, or parallel to the base of the cone, is a circle ;
and that any section by a plane through the vertex consists
of two straight lines, the angle between which is greatest
and equal to the vertical angle when the plain contains
the axis.
Any plane containing the axis is called a Principal
Sectio7i.

144. Prop. II. The section of a cone hy a plane,

which is not perpendicular to the axis, and does not pass
through the vertex, is either an Ellipse, a Parabola, or
an Hyperbola.

Let UAP be the cutting plane, and let the plane of the
paper be that principal section which is perpendicular to
the plane UAP-, OF, OAQ being the generating lines
in the plane of the paper.

Let ^ ^
be the intersection of the principal section
FOQ by the plane PA U
perpendicular to it, and cutting
the cone in the curve AP.
Inscribe a sphere in the cone, touching the cone in the
10- 2
148 The Cylinder and the Cone,

circle ^i^and the plane AP in the point S, and let XK

be the intersection of the planes AP, EF, Then XK \&
perpendicular to the plane of the paper.

Taking any point P

in the curve, join OP cutting the
circleEFin E, and join SP,
Draw through P the circular section QPV cutting the
plane ^P in PiV which is therefore perpendicular to AN
and parallel to XX.
Then, SP and PE being tangents to the sphere,
PE = £Q;
JSP =

and EQ NX AE AX
: :: :

:: AS AX. :

Also NX=PK;
.'. SP : PK :: SA : AX.
The curve ^P
is therefore an Ellipse, Parabola, or Hy-

perbola, according as SA is less than, equal to, or greater

than AX. In any case the point aS' is a focus and the cor-
responding directrix is the intersection of the plane of the
curve with the plane of contact of the sphere.

(1) If A U be parallel to V, the angle

AXE= OFE= OEF=AEX,

and therefore
SA = AE=AX,
and the section is therefore a parabola when the cutting
plane is parallel to a generating line, and perpendicular to
the principal section which contains the generating line.

(2) Let the line A U meet the curve again in the point
A on the same side of the vertex as the point A,
Then the angle
AEX=OFE
^FXA.
 The Cylinder and the Cone, 149

and therefore AE<AX,

that is SA<AX,
and the curve is an ellipse.

In this case another sphere can be inscribed in the

cone, toucliing the cone along the circle E'F' and touching
the plane AP in S\

It may be shewn as before that S' is a focus and that

the corresponding directrix is the intersection of the planes
E'F", APA\

(3) Let the line UA produced meet the cone on the

other side of tlie vertex. The section then consists of two
separate branches.

Also the angle AEX=A 'FK

<AXF,
an d therefore AE>AX,
that is AS>AX,
150 The Cylinder and the Cone.

and the curve ^P is one branch of an hyperbola, the other

branch being the section A P\

Taking P^ in the other branch the proof is the same as

before that
Sr : P'K' :: SA : AX.
In this case a sphere can be inscribed in the other
branch of the cone, touching the cone along the circle WF',
and the plane TJA'P' in S\ and it can be shewn that S' is
the other focus of the hyperbola, and that the directrix is
the intersection of the cutting plane with the plane of con-
tact E'F'.
Hence the section of a cone by a plane cutting ATI m
the principal section VOQ perpendicular to it is an Ellipse,
Parabola, or Hyperbola, according as the angle isEAX
 The Cylinder and the Cone. 151

greater than, equal to, or less than, the vertical angle of

the cone.
Further, it is obvious that, if any plane be drawn parallel
to the plane AP, the ratio of to AE ^X
is always the

same ; hence it follows that all parallel sections have the

same eccentricity.

145.This method of determining the focus and direc-

trix Mr Pierce Morton, of Trinity College,
was published by
in the first Volume of the Cambridge Philosophical Trans-
actions,

The method was very nearly obtained by Hamilton, who

gave the following construction.
First finding the vertex and focus, and S, take A AE
along the generating line equal to AS^ and draw the cir-
cular section through E^ the directrix will be the line of
intersection of the plane of the circle with the given plane
of section.

Hamilton also demonstrated the equality of SP and

PR.

146. Prop. III. To prove that, in the case qf an

elliptic section,

SP-¥S'P=AA\
Taking the 2nd figure,

SP = PR and S'P = PR' ;

SP-^S'P=RR' = EE
.-.

=AE+AE
=^AS-¥AS\
But A'S' = A F' = FF' -A'F
= EE-A'S,
also A'S' + SS' = A'S\
:. 2A'S' + SS' = EE\
Similarly 2AS-{- SS' = EE'
.*. A S'=AS,
find AS' = A'S.
152 The Cylinder and the Cone.
Hence SP-\-S'P = AA\
and the transverse, or major axis —EE',
In a similar manner it can be shewn that in an hyper-
bolic section
S'P-SP = AA'.
147. Prop. IV. To shew that, in a parabolic section^
PN^-=4AS.AN.
Let A
be the vertex of the section, and let AJDE b3
the diameter of the circular section through A.

From 2> let fall DS perpendicular to AN;

Then PN^^QN.NQ
= QN.AE
= 4NL.AD,
if -4Z be perpendicular to NQ.
But the triangles ANL, ADS being similar,
NL AN AS AD; : :: :

.\NL.AD=AN,AS,
and PN^=4AS,AN
 The Cylinder and the Cone, 153

148. Prop. V. To shew that, in an elliptic section,

PN^ is to AN. NA' in a constant ratio.
Draw through P the circular section QPQ\ bisect A A'
in C, and draw through C the circular section EBE\

Then QN AN : :: CE : AG,
and NQ' ',NA' ::CE':A'G;
:. QN.NQ' : AN.NA' :: EG.CE' : AG\
or PN'^ : AN.NA :: EG.GE -.AC-,
and, the transverse axis being AA\ the square of the semi-
minor iix\s = £G^=EG. GE,
Again, if ADF
be perpendicular to the axis, AD = DF,
and, ^(7 being equal to GA\ GD
is parallel to A'F,

and therefore GE' = FD = AD.

Similarly, GE=A'D\ the perpendicular from A^ on the
axis
.-. BG^ = AD.A'D\
that is, the semi-minor axis is a mean proportional be-
tween the perpendiculars from on the axis of
the vertices
the cone.
154 The Cylinder and the Gone.

In exactly the same manner it can be shewn for an

hyperbolic section, that

PN^ ; AN. NA' GE GE :: . : AG\

and that GE=AD, ,

and GE'=A'D\
Hence BG'^=AD.A'D\ AA' being the transverse
axis.

We observe also that the conjugate axis is equal to the

tangent from G to the circular section passing through G,
CoR. If H, H' be the centres of the two spheres, a
circlecan be drawn through AHA'H\ and it will be seen
that the triangles ASH^ A'H'jy are similar, so that

SH AD' AH A'H' AD
: :: : :: : S'H\
and SH 8'H' = AE. AU
.

.'. the semi-conjugate axis is a mean proportional

"between the radii of the spheres.
 The Cylinder and the Cone. 155

149. Prop. VI. The two straight lines in which a

cone is intersected hy the plane through the vertex parallel
to an hyperbolic section are parallel to the asymptotes of
the hyperbola.
Taking the preceding figure, let the parallel plane cut
the cone in the lines OG, 0G\ and the circular section
through 6' in tlie line 6^Z6r', which will be perpendicular
to the plane of the paper, and therefore perpendicular to
EE' and to OL,
Hence GU-^EL.E'E
But EL EC OL A'G,
: :: :

and EL E'G OL AG;

: :: :

.-. GL^ : EG. E'G:: OL' : AG",

or GL :OL EG AG;
:: :

therefore, Art. (98), OG and OG' are parallel to the

asymptotes of the hyperbola.

Hence for all parallel hyperbolic sections, the asymp-

totes are parallel to each other.

If the hyperbola be rectangular, the angle GOG' is a

right angle ; but this is evidently not possible if the verti-
cal angle of the cone be less than a right angle.

When the vertical angle of the cone is not less than a

right angle, and when GOG' is a right angle, is half LOG
a right angle, and therefore
OL = LG,
and 2.0L^ = 0G^ = 0E\
and the length OL is easily constructed.
Hence, placing OL, and drawing the plane GOG' per-
pendicular to the principal section through OL, any section
by a plane parallel to GOG' is a rectangular hyperbola.

150. Prop. VII. If two straight lines be drawn

through any point, parallel to two fixed lines, and inter-
secting a given cone, the ratio of the rectangles formed by
156 The Cylinder and the Cone,

the segments of the lines will be independent of the posi-

tion of the point.

Thus, if through E, the lines EPQ, EP'Q' be drawn,

parallel to two given lines, and cutting the cone in the

points P, Q and P\ Q\ the ratio of EP,EQ to EP'. EQ'

isconstant.

Through draw OK parallel to the given line to which

EPQ and let the plane through OK^ EPQ,
is parallel,
which contains the generating lines OP, OQ, meet the
circular section throu^rh E in R and S, and the plane base
in the straight line DFK^ cutting the circular base in D
and F.
Then DFKand ERS being sections of parallel planes
by a plane are parallel to each other.
Also, EPQ is parallel to 0K\
Therefore ERP, ODK are similar triangles, as are
also ESQ, OFK',
:, EP : ER :: OK DK, :

and EQ : ES :: OK FK;
:
 The Cylinder and the Cone. 157

.-. EP.EQ \ ER, ES :: OK^ : DK FK

,

:: OK^ : KT\
if KT be the tangent to the circular base from K,
If a similar construction be made for EP'Q' we shall
have
EP'. EQ' : ER ,ES' :: OK"^ : K'T\
But ER,ES=^ER,ES''y
therefore the rectangles . EP EQ
and EP^ . J5^Q' are each
in a constant ratio to the same rectangle, and are therefore
in a constant ratio to each other.

Since the plane through EPQ, EP'Q! cuts the cone in

an ellipse, parabola, or hyperbola, this theorem includes
as particular cases those of Arts. 49, 55, 77, 8G, 92, 119 and
129.

The proof is the same if the point P

be within the cone,
or if one or both of the lines meet opposite branches of the
cone.
If the chords be drawn through the centre of the sec-
tion PEP\ the rectangles become the squares of the semi-
diameters.

Hence the parallel diameters of all parallel sections of a

cone are proportional to each other.
If the lines move until they become tangents the rect-
angles then become the squares of the tangents; therefore
if a series of points be so taken that the tangents from
them are parallel to given lines, these tangents are always
in the same proportion. The locus of the point will be E
the line of intersection of two fixed planes touching the
cone, that is, a fixed line through the vertex.

Examples.
1. Shew how to cut from a cylinder an ellipge whose eccen-
tricity shall be the same as the ratio of the side of a square to its
diagonal

2. Shew how to cut from a cone an ellipse whose eccentricity

is the ratio of one to two.
158 The Cylinder and the Cone,

3. Find the least^ angle of a cone from which it is possible to

cut an hyperbola, whose eccentricity shall be the ratio of two
to one.

4. Shew that all sections of a right cone, made by planes

parallel to tangent planes of the cone, are parabolas, and that
the foci lie on a cone having with the first a common vertex and
axis.

5. The centre of a spherical ball moveable in a vertical

is

plane which is equidistant from two candles of thesame height

on a table; find its locus when the two shadows on the ceiling are
always just in contact.

6. Prove that all sections of a cone by parallel planes are

conies having the same eccentricity.

7. Eind the locus of the foci of the sections made by a series

of parallel planes.

8. Give a geometrical construction, by which a cone may be

cut, so that the section may be an ellipse of given eccentricity.
9. If two plane sections of a right cone be taken, having the
same directrix, the foci corresponding to that directrix lie on a
straight line which passes through the vertex.

10. Different elliptic sections of a right cone are taken,

having equal major axes ; shew that the locus of the centres of
the sections is a spheroid, and determine in what cases it is oblate
or prolate respectively.

11. The vertex of a cone and the centre of a sphere inscribed

within it are given in position: a plane section of the cone, at
right angles to any generating line of the cone, touches the sphere
prove that the locus of the point of contact is a surface generated
by the revolution of a circle, which touches the axis of the cone
at the centre of the sphere.

12. Given a right cone and a point within it, there are but
two sections which have this point for focus ; and the planes of
these sections make equal angles with the straight line joining
the given point and the vertex of the cone.

13. If the curve formed by the intersection of any plane

with a cone be projected upon a plane perpendicular to the axis;
prove that the curve of projection will be a conic section having
its focus at the point in which the axis meets the plane of
projection.
 Examples. 159

14. An ellipse and an hyperbola are so 55ituated that the

vertices of each curve are the foci of the other, and the curves are
in planes at right angles to each other. If P
be a point on the
ellipse, and a point on the hyperbola, S the vertex, and
Q A the
interior focus of that branch of the hyperbola, then

PQ + AS^PS + AQ.
15. The shadow is cast by a candle on an inclined
of a ball
plane in contact with the ball; prove that, as the candle burns
down, the locus of the centre of the shadow will be a straight
line.

16. If sections of a right cone be made, perpendicular to

a given plane, such that the distance between a focus of a section
and that vertex which lies on one of the generating lines in
the given plane be constant, prove that the transverse axes, pro-
duced if necessary, of all sections will touch one of two fixed
ci)cles.

17. If the vertical angle of a cone, vertex F, be a right

angle, P any point of a parabolic section, and PN perpendicular
to the axis of the parabola,

VP^2AS^AN,
A being the vertex and S the focus.

18. two cones be described touching the same two spheres,

If
the eccentricities of the two sections of them made by the same
plane bear to one another a ratio constant for all positions of the
plane.

19. If elliptic sections of a cone be made such that the

volume betwe^iu the vertex and the section is always the same,
the minor axis will be always of the same length.

20. The vertex of any right circular cone which contains a

given ellipse will lie on a certain hyperbola, and the axis of the
cone will be a tangent to the hyperbola.

21. Different elliptic sections of a right cone are taken such

that their minor axes are equal; shew that the locus of their
centres the surface formed by the revolution of an hyperbola
is

about the axis of the cone.

22. If (7, E
be the centres of the spheres inscribed in a cone,
and touching a given section, the sphere described on CE as
diameter will intersect the plane in the auxiliary circle of the
section.
 CHAPTER VII.

The Similarity of Conies^ the Areas of Conies, and the

Curvatures of Conies,

SIMILAR CONICS.
151. Def. Conies which have the same eccentricity
are said to he sim,ilar to each other.
This definition is justified by the consideration that the
character of the conic depends on its eccentricity alone,
while the dimensions of all parts of the conic are entirely
determined by the distance of the focus from the directrix.
Hence, according to this definition, aU parabolas are
similar curves.

152. Prop. I. If radii he drawn from the vertices

of two paraholas making equal angles with the axes^
these radii are always in the same proportion.

Let A P, ap be the radii, FN and pn the ordinates,

the angles PAN, pan, being equal.
Then AN : an :: AP ap, :

and PN : pn :: AP ap. :

But JPN^ :pn^ :: AS.AN : as, an;

:, AP^ : ap^ :: AS, AP : as ap,

.

or AP : ap :: AS : as.

It can also be shewn that focal radii making equal

angles with the axes are always in the same proportion.

153. Prop. II. If two ellipses he similar their axes

are in the same proportion, and any other diameters,
making equal angles with the respective axes, are in the
proportion of the axes.
 Similar Conies, 161

Let CA, CB be the semi-axes of one ellipse, ca, ch of

the other, and CP, cp two radii such that the angle
PGA = pea.
Then, since the eccentricities are the same, we have,
if S, s be foci,

AG SG : V. ac : sc ;

/. AG' AG'-SG^
: :: ac'' : ac^-sc\

or AG^ : BG^ :: ac^ : hc\

Hence it follows, if PiV, pn be ordinates, that

PN^ AG^- GN^ : :: pn^ : ac^-cn^ ;

but, by similar triangles,

PN : pn :: GN : en,

therefore GN^ :AG^- GN^ :: cn^ : ac^-cn^

and GN^ : AG"" :: cn^ : ac\
Hence GP : cp :: GN : cw
:: AG : ac.

So also lines drawn similarly from the foci, or any other

corresponding points of the two figures, will be in the ratio
of the transverse axes.

Exactly the same demonstration is applicable to the

hyperbola, but in this case,if the ratio of SG to in AG
two hyperbolas be the same, it follows from Art. (98)
that the angle between the asymptotes is the same in both
curves.

In the case of hyperbolas we have thus a very simple

test of similarity.

The Areas bounded by Gonics,

164. Prop. III. If AB, be two tangents AG to a

parabola, the area betrceen the curve and the chord BG is
two-thirds of the triangle ABG,
B. c. s. 11
162 Areas.

Draw the tangent DPE parallel to BC] then

AP = PN,
and BG=^2,DE\
therefore triangle BPC= 2ADE.

BP in M,
Again, draw the diameter Z>Qil^f meeting
By the same reasoning, FQG being the tangent parallel
to BP, the triangle PQB = 2FDG.
Through F draw the diameter FEL, meeting PQ in
L, and let this process be continued indefinitely.

Then the sum of the triangles within the parabola is

double the sum of the triangles without it.

But, since the triangle BPCis half ABC, it is greater
than half the parabolic area BQPC;
Therefore, Euclid, Bk. xii., the difference between the
parabolic area and the sum of the triangles can be made
ultimately less than any assignable quantity ;
 Areas, 163

And, the same being true of the outer triangles, it

between the curve and £G is double
follows tliat the area
of the area between the curve and AB, AG, and is there-
fore two-thirds of the triangle ABC.
Cor. Since PNbisects every chord parallel to it BC
bisects the parabolic area BPG; therefore, completing
the parallelogram PNB U, the parabolic area BPN
is two-

thirds of the parallelogram UN,

155. Prop. IV. The area of an ellipse is to the area

of the auodliary circle in the ratio of the conjugate to the
transverse axis.
Draw a series of ordinates, QPN, Q'P'N\.., near
each other, and draw PR, QR
parallel to AG.

Then, since
PN QN BG
: :: : AG,
the area PN' QN': :. BG : AG,
and, this being true for all such areas, the sum of the
parallelograms PN' is to the sum of the parallelograms
QN' 2i^ BG to AG.
But, if the number be increased indefinitely, the sums
of these parallelograms ultimately approximate to the
areas of the ellipse and circle.

Hence the ellipse is to the circle in the ratio of BG

to AG.
The student will find in Newton's 2nd and 3rd Lemmas
{Principia, Section i.) a formal proof of what we have
11-2
164 Areas,

here assumed as suflSciently obvious, that the sum of the

parallelograms PN
is ultimately equal to the area of the
ellipse.

156. Prop. V. If P, Q be two points of an hyper-

bola, and PL, QM parallel to
if one asymptote meet the
other in L and M, the hyperbolic sector CPQ is equal to
the hyperbolic trapezium PLMQ.

For the triangles GPL, CQM are equal, and, if PL

meet CQ in B, it follows that the triangle (7Pi2 = the
trapezium LRQM hence, adding to each the area
;
RPQ
the theorem is proved.

157. Prop. VI. If points L, M, N, K be taken in an

asymptote of an hyperbola, such that
CL CM ON CK, : :: :

arid if LP, MQ, NR, KS, parallel to the asymptote, meet

the curve in P, Q, R, S, th^ hyperbolic areas CPQ, CRS
will be equal.

Let QR and PS produced meet the asymptotes in F,

F', G, G' ;

then RF= QF' and SG = PG\ Art. (116);

.-.NF= CM and KG = CL.

Hence NF KG CM CL : ::

CK CN :: :

:: RN SK,
I therefore SP is parallel to QR
 Areas. 165
The diameter CUV conjugate to PS bisects all chords
parallel to PS, and therefore bisects the area PQRS ;

also the triangle CPV=CS V,

and OQU=CUE;
therefore taking from CPV and CSV
the equal triangles
CQU, GRU, and the equal areas PQUVy SRUV, the
remaining areas, which are the hyperbolic sectors GPQ,
CRS, are equal.
Cor. Hence if a series of points, L, M, iV,... be taken
such that CLj CM, CN, CK,.. are in continued proportion,
it follows that the hyperbolic sectors CPQ, CQR, CRS, &c.

will be all equal.

It will be noticed in this case that the tangent at Q

will be parallel to PR, the tangent at R parallel to QS,
and so also for the rest.

The Curcature of Conies,

158. Dep. If a circle touch a conic at a point P, and

pass through another point Q of the conic, and if the point
Q move near to, and ultimately coincide with P, the circle
in its ultimate condition is called the circle of curvature
at P.
166 Curvature.

Prop. VII. The chord of intersection of a conic

with tlie circle of curvature at any point is inclined to
the axis at the same angle as a tangent at the point.

It has been shewn that, if a circle intersect a conic in

four points P, Q, R, F, the chords PQ, are equally RV
inchned to the axis.

Let P and Q coincide with each other then the tan- ;

gent at P and the chord R V are equally inclined to the

axis.

Let the point V

now approach to and coincide with P ;

the circle becomes the circle of curvature at P, and the

chord VR becomes PR
the chord of intersection.

Hence PR and the tangent at P are equally inclined

to the axis.

159. Prop. VIII. If the tangent at any point of P

a parabola meet the axis in T^ and if the circle of cur-
vature at P
meet the curve in Q,
PQ^^.PT.
Draw the ordinate PNP
then taking the figure of
-,

the next article, TP' the tangent at P\ and the angle

is
P'TF=PTF=PFT', therefore PQ
is parallel to TP\
and is bisected by the diameter P'E.
Hence PQ = 2 ,PE=4.P'T
. =4Pr.
160. Prop. IX. To find the chord of curvature
through the focus and the diameter of curvature at any
point of a parabola.
lict the circle meet PS produced in F, and the normal
PG, produced, in 0.
The angle PFS=PTS=SPT

since PT'is a tangent to the circle.

Therefore Q F is parallel to the axis,

and PV : SP :: PQ : PF.
 Curvature, 167

Hence PV=4..SP.
Again, the angle POQ = PVQ = PSN;

/. PO PQ : :: SP : PN,
or PO SP : :: 4:PT : PN
:: 4SP : aST,
if /S'Fbe perpendicular to PT.
Cor. Since the normal bisects the angle between
1.

SP and the diameter through P, it follows that the chord

of curvature parallel to the axis is 4SP,

Cor. 2. The diameter of curvature, PO, may also be

expressed as follows
Let GLbe the perpendicular from G on SP ; then PL
= the semi-latus rectum = 2^ *S'.
Also P VO being a right angle,
PO PG
: PV PL:

4.SP : PL
4.SP, PL PU, :
168 Curvature.

but 4.SF.FL = SSr.AS=8SY^=2PG^;

.'. P0:FG::2FG^ \FL\

161. Prop. X. If the chord of intersection, FQ, of

an or hyperbola, with the circle of curvature at F,
ellipse,
meet CD, the semi-diameter conjugate to CF, in K,
FQ.FK=2CD^.

Drawing the ordinate FNF\ the tangent at P' is

parallel to FQ, as in the parabola, and FQ is therefore

bisected in V, by the diameter CF\
Let FQ meet the axes in U and U' ; then, U'C being
parallel to FF\
FV : FU' :: VF' : CF'
:: UT : CT,
since FU,F'T are parallel.
Also UT CT FU FK : :: :

FV FW FU FK.
:. : :: :

Hence FV FK=FU
. FU' = FT FT=CD\ . ,

observing that FU--FT, and FU' = FT\ by the theorem

of Art. (158);

and .-. FQ.FK=2CD\

 Curvature, 169

162. Prop. XT. If the chm-d of curvature PQ\ of an

ellipse or hyperbola in any direction, meet CD in K\
Pq , PK'=2, CD\
170 Curvature.

Let PO be the diameter of curvature meeting CD iu

F; then PQO, PQ'O are right angles, and a circle can be
drawn through Q'K'FO ;

/. Pq.PK'^PF.PO
=PK.PQ = 2. GD\
Cor. 1. Hence PO being the diameter of curvature,
PF.PO = 'l. CB\
CoR. 2. If PQ' pass through the focus,
PK' = AC,
and PQ' .AC=2,CD\
CoR. 3. If PQ' pass through the centre,

PQ' .GP=^2.CD\

163. We can also express the diameter of curvature

as follows :

PG being the normal, let GL be perpendicular to SP^

and PRhQ the chord of curvature through S,
let

Then GL is parallel to OR,

and PO PG : :: PR PL :

:: PR.PL PL\ :

But PR.AC=2,CD^;
.-. Pi? : .^a :: 2 . CZ>« : ^(T^
:: 2 . PG^2 .
^q^^

and Pi? . PZ AC PL: , :: 2 . PG^ : ^(72.

But, PL being equal to the semi-latus rectum,

PL.AC=BG';
.'. PR PL = 2 PG\, .

and PO : P(3^ :: 2PG^ : PXl

iT^wc^, in any conic, the radius of curvature at any
point is to the normal at the point as the square of the
normal to the square of the semi-latus rectum.
 Curvature. 171

EXAMPLES.

1. The radius of curvature at the extremity of the latus

rectum of a parabola is equal to twice the normal.

2. The circle of curvature at the end of the latus rectum in-

tersects the parabola on the normal at that point.

3. The chord of curvature at a point P in the parabola

passing through the vertex A ia to APY :: PY : AP.

4. The circle of curvature at a point P in a parabola cuts

off from the diameter at P a portion equal to the parameter of
that diameter.

5. P and p are points on a parabola on the same side of the

axis; PN and pn are perpendiculars on the axis; the normals at P
and p meet at a point Q: shew that the distance of Q from the
axis is to 2 . PN in the ratio of the rectangle pn {PN+pn) to the
square on the latus rectum.

Deduce an expression for the radius of curvature at any point

of a parabola.

6. If P be a point of an ellipse equidistant from the axis

mirjor and one of the directrices, prove that the circle of curvature
at P will pass through one of the foci.

7. The chord of curvature through the focus, at any point, is

equal to the focal chord parallel to the tangent at the point.

8. Prove that the locus of the middle points of the common

chords of a given parabola and its circles of curvature is a para-
bola, and that the envelope of the chords is also a parabola.

9. The circles of curvature at the extremities P, i> of two

conjugate diameters of an ellipse meet the ellipse again in Q, i2,
respectively, shew that PE is parallel to DQ.

10. In the rectangular hyperbola, the radius of curvature at

a point P varies as CP^,
172 Examples,
11. The tangent at a point P of an ellipse who&e centre is O
meets the axes in T and t', if CP produced meet in L the circle
described about the triangle TCtf shew that PL is half the chord
of curvature at P in the direction of 0, and that the rectangle
contained by (7P, CX, is constant.

12. If i* be a point on a conic, Q a point near it, and if QEy

perpendicular to PQ, meet the normal at P in E, then ulti-
mately when Q coincides with P, PE is the diameter of curva-
ture at P.

13. Prove that the ultimate point of intersection of conse-

cutive normals is the centre of curvature.

14. If a tangent be drawn from any point of a parabola to

the circle of curvature at the vertex, the length of the tangent
will be equal to the abscissa of the point measured along the
axis.

15. The circle of curvature at a point where the conjugate

diameters are equal, meets the ellipse again at the extremity of
the diameter.

16. Find the points at which the radius of curvature is a

mean proportional between the semi-major and semi-minor axes
of an ellipse.

17. The chord of curvature at P perpendicular to the major

axis is to PM, the ordinate at P, :: 2 . CD'^ : BG'\

18. Prove that there is a point P on an ellipse such that if

the normal at P meet the ellipse in Q, PQ is a chord of the
circle of curvature at P, and find its position.

19. If be the focal distance of a point P of a parabola,

SP
and 8Q, perpendicular to /SP, meet the normal at P in Q, PQ is
half the radius of curvature at P.

20. The chord of curvature at a point P of a rectangular hj'per-

bola, perpendicular to an asymptote, is to CD :: CD : 2 . PN,
where PN is the distance of P from the asymptote.
21. be the foot of the normal at a point P of an ellipse,
If G
and GK, perpendicular to PGj meet CP in Ky then KE, parallel
to the axis minor, will meet PG in the centre of curvature at P.
 Examples, 1 73
22. If the normal at a point P of a parabola meet the
directrix in X, the radius of curvature at is equal to 2 PL. P .

23. The normal at any point P of a rectangular hyperbola

meets the curve again in Q; shew that PQ is equal to the
diameter of curvature at P.

In the rectangular hyperbola, if CP be produced to Q,

24.
80 that PQ = CP,
and QO be drawn perpendicular to CQ to
intersect the normal in 0, is the centre of curvature at P.

25. If S and ff be the foci of an ellipse, B the extremity of

the axis minor, a circle described through S, H and B, will cut
the minor axis in the centre of curvature at B.

26. at any point P in an ellipse, of which S

The tangent
and H are the meets the axis major in T^ and TQR bisects
foci,

HP in Q and meets SP in R ; prove that PR is one-fourth of the

chord of curvature at P through S.

27. An ellipse, a parabola, and an hyperbola, have the

same vertex and the same focus ; shew that the curvature, at the
vertex, of the parabola is greater than that of the hyperbola, and
less than that of the ellipse.

28. The circle of curvature of an ellipse at P passes through

the focus *S^, and SE is drawn parallel to the tangent at to meet P
in E
the diameter through P
; shew that it divides the diameter

in the ratio of 3 1. :

29. The curvature at a point of an ellipse cuts the

circle of
curve in the tangent at
Q, ; P
is met by the other common

tangent, which touches the curves at and P, in T; if PQ E

meet TEF in 0, TEOF is cut harmonically.

80. If the common tangents to an ellipse and a concentric

circle are parallel to the common diameters, prove that the areas
of the ellipse and circle are equal.

31. If E is the centre of curvature at the point P of a

parabola,

32. Find the locus of the foci of the parabolas which have a
given circle as circle of curvature.
 CHAPTER VIII.

PROJECTIONS.

164. Dep. The projection of a point on a plane is

the foot of the perpendicular let fall from the point on
the plane.
If from all points of a given curve perpendiculars be
let fall on a plane, the curve formed by the feet of the
perpendiculars is the projection of the given curve.
The projection of a straight line is also a straight line,
for it is the line of intersection with the given plane of
a plane through the line perpendicular to the given
plane.

Parallel straight lines project into parallel lines, for the

projections are the lines of intersection of parallel planes
with the given plane.

165. Prop. I. Parallel straight lines, offinite lengths,

are projected in the same ratio.
That is, if ab, pq be the projections of the parallel
lines AB, PQ,
ah : AB :: pq : PQ.
For, drawing AG ab and meeting
parallel to Bb in C,
andPR parallel to pq and meeting Qq in E, ABC and
PQR are similar triangles therefore ;

AG AB PE PQ, : :: :

and AG=ab, PE=pq.

166. Prop. II. The projection of the tangent to a
curve at any point is the tangent to the projection of the
curve at the projection of the point.
 Projections, 175

For \i p, q be the projections of the two points P, Q of

a curve, the the projection of the line PQ, and
line pq is
when the line PQ
turns round until Q coincides with P, P
pq tun IS round p until q coincides with p, and the ultimate
position oipq is the tangent at jo.

167. Prop. III. The projection of a circle is an

ellipse.

Let aba' be the projection of the circle ABA',

^ h

Tnke a chord PQ parallel to the plane of projection,

then its projection pq — PQ,
Let the diameter ANA' perpendicular to meet PQ
in F the plane of projection, and let aa'F be the pro-
jection of AA'F.

Then aa' bisects pq at right angles in the point w, and

an : AN :: aF AF,:

a'n : A'N :: aF AF;:

.'. AN.NA' an na' AF'^ : . :: : aP2.

but AN,NA' = PN^=pn^,
pn^ .'. : an , na' :; AF^ : aF^,
and the curve apa' is an ellipse, having its axes in the
ratio of
aF AF,
: or of aa' : A A'.
176 Projections,

Moreover, since we can place the circle so as to mako

the ratio of aa' to A A' whatever we please, an ellipse of
any eccentricity can be obtained.
In this demonstration we have assumed only the
property of the principal diameters of an ellipse. Properties
of other diameters can be obtained by help of the pre-
ceding theorems, as in the following instances.

1C8. Prop. IV. The locus of the middle points of

parallel chords of an ellipse is a straight line.
For, projecting a circle, the parallel chords of the
ellipse are the projections of parallel chords of the circle,
and as the middle points of these latter lie in a diameter
of the circle, the middle points of the chords of the ellipse
lie in the projection of the diameter which is a straight
line, and is a diameter of the ellipse.

Moreover, the diameter of the circle is perpendicular

to the chordsit bisects hence ;

Perpendicular diameters of a circle project into con-

jugate diameters of an ellipse.

169. Prop. V. If two intersecting chords of an

ellipse he parallel to fixed lines^ the ratio of the rectangles
contained by their segments is constant.

Let OPQy ORS be two chords of a circle, parallel to

and opq^ ors their
fixed lines, projections.
Then OP OQ is to op
, . og' in a constant ratio, and
OR OS is to
, or . 05 in a constant ratio ; but
OP ,OQ = OR,OS,
Therefore op oq is to or 05 in a constant ratio ; and
, .

opq, ors are parallel to fixed lines.

170. Prop. VI. Tf qvq' he a double ordinate of a

diameter cp, and if the tangent at q meet cp pro-
duced in ty
cv.ct=cp'^.

The lines qvq'and cp are the projections of a chord

Q VQ' is bisected by a diameter CPs and
of a circle which
t is the projection of T the point in which the tangent at

Q meets CP produced.
 Frojections. 177
But, in the circle,
CV,CT=CP\
or CV CP OP CT
: :: :

and, these lines being projected in the same ratio, it

follows that

CV : cp :: cp : ct,

or CV . ct = cp\
Hence it follows that tangents to an ellipse at the ends
of any chord meet in the diameter conjugate to the chord.

The preceding will serve as sufficient illustrations of

the application of the method.

171. Prop. VIL An ellipse can be projected into a

circle.

This is really the converse of Art. (167), but we give

a construction for the purpose.

Draw a plane through AA\ the transverse axis, per-

pendicular to the plane of the ellipse, and in this plane
describe a circle on AA^ as diameter. Also take the chord
AD, equal to the conjugate axis, and join A'D, which is
perpendicular to AD.
Through AD draw a plane perpendicular to A'D, and
project a principal chord PNP' on this plane.

B. c. s. 12
178 Projections,

Then PN^ : AN, NA' :: BG^ : AC\

But PN=pn,
An : AN AD :: : AA'
:: BG : AG,
and Dn : ^'iV :: ^(7 : AG.
Henco An.nD : AN ^^^
. iVr.4' :: : AG^,
and therefore pn?=An nD, .

and the projection ^jt?Z) is a circle.

This theorem, in the same manner as that of Art. (167),
may be employed in deducing properties of oblique dia-
meters and oblique chords of an ellipse.

172. Prop. VII. The projection of a parabola is a

parabola.
For if PNP' be a principal chord, bisected by the axis
AN, the projection pnp' will be bisected by the pro-
jection an.
Moreover pn : PN will be a constant ratio, as also
will be an : AN
And PN^=4AS.AN,
Hence pn^ will be to 4:A>S
a?i in a constant ratio, and
.

tlie projection is a parabola, the tangent at a being parallel

to pn.

173. Prop. VIII. An hyperbola can be always pro-

jected into a rectangular hyperbola.
For the asymptotes can be projected into two straight
cV at right angles, and
lines cl, if PM, PN be parallels to
the asymptotes from a point P of the curve, PM PN , is

constant.
But/?^?^ : PiJf and /?7i : PiV are constant ratios ;

/. pm , pn is constant.
And since pra and pn are perpendicular respectively
to cl and cl\ it follows that the projection is a rectangular

hyperbola.
The same proof evidently shews that any projection of
an hyperbola is also an hyperbola.
The explanations of this chapter apply to a particular
 Examples. 179

ciise only of the general method of projections; in strict-

ness we should have defined the method as the method of
orthogonal projections.

EXAMPLES.

1. Prove by the method of projections the theorems of Arts.

65, 70, 71, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 81, 83, 84, and 86.

2. A parallelogram is inscribed in a given ellipse ; shew that

its sides are parallel to conjugate diameters, and find its greatest
area.

3. TP, TQ are tangents to an ellipse, and CP\ CQ! are

parallel semidiaraeters ; PQ is parallel to P^QI,

4. Determine the greatest triangle which can be inscribed

in an ellipse having an angular point fixed at a point in its peri-
meter.

5. If a straight line meet two concentric, similar, and simi-

larly situated ellipses, the portions intercepted between the curves
are equal.

6. Find the locus of the point of intersection of the tangents

at the extremities of pairs of conjugate diameters of an ellipse.

7. Find the locus of the middle points of the lines joining

the extremities of conjugate diameters.

8. If a tangent be drawn at the extremity of the major axis

meeting two equal conjugate diameters (7P, CD produced in T
andt; thenPi>3 = 2^n
9. If a chord AQ drawn from the vertex be produced to
meet the minor axis in 0, and GP be a semidiameter parallel to
it, then^ie. A0=2CPK

10. OQ, OQ! are tangents to an ellipse from an external

point Of and OR is a diagonal of the parallelogram of which OQ,
OQ! are adjacent sides prove that if R be on the ellipse,
; will
lie on a similar and similarly situated concentric ellipse.

12—2
 180 Projections.

11. A parallelogram is inscribed in an ellipse, and from any

point on the ellipse two straight lines are drawn parallel to the
sides of the parallelogram ; prove that the rectangles under the
segments of these straight lines, made by the sides of the paral-
lelogram, will be to one another in a constant ratio.

12. Aparallelogram circumscribes an ellipse, touching the

curve at the extremities of conjugate diameters, and another
parallelogram is formed by joining the points where its diagonals
meet the ellipse prove that the area of the inner parallelogram
:

is half that of the outer one.

and similarly situated ellipses be inscribed

If four similar
in the spaces between the outer parallelogram and the curve,
prove that their centres lie in a similar and similarly situated
ellipse.

13. If a parallelogram be inscribed in an ellipse, so that the

diameter bisecting two opposite sides is always divided by either
side in a constant ratio, its area will be constant.

14. If a parallelogram circumscribe an ellipse, and if one of

its diagonals bear a constant ratio to the diameter it contains,
the area of the parallelogram will be constant.

15. About a given triangle PQR is circumscribed an ellipse,

having for centre the point of intersection ( 0) of the lines from
Pf Q, R bisecting the opposite sides, and PC, QC, RC are pro-
duced to meet the curve in P', Q\ R' ; shew that, if tangents be
drawn at these points, the triangle so formed will be similar to
PQR, and four times as great.

16. locus of the middle points of all chords of an ellipse

The
which pass through a fixed point is an ellipse similar and simi-
larly situated to the given ellipse, and with its centre in the
middle point of the line joining the given point and the centre of
the given ellipse.

17. Prove that an ellipse can be inscribed in a parallelogram

so as to touch the middle points of the four sides, and that it is

the greatest of all inscribed ellipses.

18. A polygon of a given number of sides circumscribes an

ellipse. Prove that, when its area is a minimum, any side is
parallel to the line joining the points of contact of the two
adjacent sides.
 Uxamj)les. 181

19. The greatest triangle which can be inscribed iu an

has one of its sides bisected by a diameter of the ellipse,
ellipse
and the others cut in points of trisection by the conjugate dig^-
ineter.

20. ^^ is a given chord of an ellipse, and C any point in

the ellipse shew that the
; loc\is ofthe point oi intersection of
lines drawn from A, B^ C to the middle points of the opposite
sides of the triangle ABC is a. similar ellipse.

21. CPy CD are conjugate semidiameters of an ellipse ; if

an ellipse, similar and similarly situated to the given ellipse, be
described on PD as diameter, it will pass through the centre of
the given ellipse.

22. If an hyperbola and its conjjugate are described having

a pair of conjugate diameters of an ellipse for asymptotes, and
cutting the ellipse in the points a, &, c, d taken in order, shew
that the diameters Oa, Oe, and Oh, Od are conjugate diameters
in the ellipse ; and also that Oa, Od, and 06-, Oe are conjugate
diameters in the hyperbolas,

23. Q IS a, point in one asymptote, &ikI q in the other. If

Qq move parallel to itself, find the locus of intersection of

tangents to the hyperbola from Q and q.

24. PTf pt are tangents at the extremities of any diameter

Pp an ellipse; any other diameter meets PT in T and it& con-
of
jugate meets pt in t; also any tangent meets PT in T' and pt in
if; shew that PT : PT' :: pf : pt,

25. From the ends P, D of conjugate diameters of an ellipse

lines are drawn parallel to any tangent line; from the centre C
any line is drawn cutting these lines and the tangent in p, dy tj

respectively ; prove that Cp^ + Cd^ = Ct'^,

26. If CP, CD be conjugate diameters of an ellipse, and if

BPj BD be joined, and also AD^ A'P, these latter intersecting

in 0, the figure BDOP will be a parallelogram.

27. T is a point on the tangent at a point P of an ellipse, so

that a perpendicular from T on the focal distance SP is of constant
length ; shew that the locus of T is a similar, similarly situated
and concentric ellipse.
 CHAPTER IX

OF CONICS IN GENERAL.

The Construction of a Conic,

174. The method of construction, given in Chapter I.,

can be extended in the following manner.

Let fSn be any straight line drawn through the focus

S, and draw Ax from the vertex parallel to fS, and meet-

ing the directrix in x.

Divide the Ime fSn in a and a' so that

Sa : af :: Sa' : a'/ :: SA : Ax-,
then a and a' are points on the curve, for if ak be the [>er-

pendicular on the directrix,

ak \ af :\ AX : Ax^
and therefore Sa : ak :: SA : AX.
 Of Conies in general. 183
Take any point e in the directrix, draw the lines eSl^ ea
through aS' and a, and draw SP making the angle PSl
equal to ISn,
Through P draw FPl parallel to fS, and meeting eS
produced in /,

then Pl=SP,
and PI PF : :: Sa : af\
.-. SP PF : :: JSa : af,

and SP \PK :: Sa \ ak\

therefore P is a point in the curve.
The other point of the curve in the line FP may be
found as in Art. 9.

175. The construction for the point (a) gives a simple proof
that the tangent at the vertex is perpendicular to the axis. For
when the angle ASa is diminished, Sa approaches to equality
with SA^ and therefore the angle aAB is ultimately a right
angle.

176. Prop. I. To find the points in which a given

straight line is intersected hy a conic of which the focus,
the directrix, and the eccentricity are given.

* IT
184 Of Conies in general.

Let FPP' be the straight line, and draw Ax parallel

to it. D
Join FS^ and find the points E
and such that
DF SE EF SA Ax.
SB : :: : :: :

Describe the circle on DE as diameter, and let it inter-

sect the given line in P and P\

Join DP, EP and draw SG, FH2X right angles to EP.

Then DPE, being the angle in a semicircle, is a right
angle, and DP
is parallel to SG and FH.

Hence SG : .PiZ :: /S'JSr : EF

SD : Di^
PG PH\ :

therefore the angles SPG. FPH are equal, and therefore

PD bisects the angle SPF,

Hence SP : PF :: aS'Z) : Z)i^ :: SA : ^^,

and P is a point in the curve.

Similarly P' is also a point in the curve, and the per-

pendicular from 0, the centre of the circle, on FPP' meets
it in F, the middle point of the chord PP',

Since SE EF : :: SA \ Ax
and SD DF : \\ SA : Ax\
.\ SE^SD : 2>^ :: SA : ^^,
or SO : 0Z> :: /S14 : Ax,
a relation analogous to
SG : ^(7 :: aS'^ : AX.
We have already shewn, for each conic, that the middle
points of parallel chords lie in a straight line; the following
article contains a proof of the theorem which includes all
the three cases.

177. Prop II. To find the locus of the middle points

of a system of parallel chords.
Let P'P one of the chords be produced to meet the
directrix in F, draw Ax parallel to FP, and divide FS so
that
SD : DF SE EF SA
:: : :: : Ax ;
 Of Conies in general. 185
then, as in the preceding article, the perpendicular OV
upon PP' from the middle point of DBy bisects PP.
Draw the parallel focal chord aSa^ ; then Oc parallel to
the directrix bisects aa' in c. Also draw SG perpendicular
to the chords, and meeting the directrix in G,

Then, if F meet aa' in w,

Vn : nO :: SF : SO,
:: Sf : Sc,

and, since ncO, SG/ are similar triangles,

nO : nc :: SG : /^T;

/. Vn : nc:: SG : /^c,

and the line Vc passes through G,

The straight line (rc is therefore the locus of the mid-

dle points of all chords parallel to aSa\

The ends of the diameter GO may be found by the con-

struction of the preceding article.
186 Of Conies in general.

Cor. When the conic is a parabola, SA^AX,

and Sa : af :: AX Ax :

:: SX : Sf.

So Sa' : a'/:: SX ; Sf;

.'. Sc : ac :: SX : Sf,

and ac : cf :: aSX : /?/:

Hence >^c : cf :: SX'' : ^/^

:: GX.Xf: Gf.fX
:: (9X :
Q/j
and therefore Gc is parallel to SX^ that is, the middle
points of parallel chords of a parabola lie in a straight line
parallel to the axis.

178. Prop. III. To find the locus of the middle points

of all focal chords of a conic.
Taking the case of a central conic, and referring to the
figure of the preceding article, let Oc meet SC in N;
 Examples, 187
tlieu cN NS : :: fX : SX,
and cN NO : GX :: G^X :
',

.-. ciV2 : SN.NG fX GX SX GX :: . : .

:: /S'X^ : aS'X . C7X.

Hence it follows that the locus of c is an ellipse of

which SG the transverse axis, and such tliat the squares
is
of its axes are as SX
GX, or, Cor. Art. (59), as
:

BG^ : AG\
Hence the locus of c is similar to the conic itself.

EXAMPLES.
1. If an ordinate, PNP\ to the transverse axis meet the
tangent at the end of the latus rectum in T,
TP.TP'=SN'\
Shew also that SP = TN.
2. A focal chord PSQ of a conic section is produced to
meet the Kj and KM,
directrix in are drawn through the KN
feet of the ordinates PM, Q,N of P and Q. If KN produced
meet PN produced in i2, prove that
PR = PM.
3. Focal chords of an ellipse or hyperbola are in the ratio
of the squares on the parallel diameters.

4. at P and Q, two points in a conic, inter-

The tangents
sect in T through P, Q, chords be drawn parallel to the
] if

tangents at Q and P, and intersecting the conic in j) and q

respectively, and if tangents at p and q meet in T, shew that Tt
is a diameter,

5. Two tangents TP, TQ are drawn to a conic intersecting

the directrix in P\ Q\
If the chord PQ cut the directrix in E, prove that
SP" : SQ' :: RP' : BQ'.

6. Tangents from a point T touch the curve at P and Q if ;

PQ meet the directrices in R and R', PR and QR' subtend equal

angles at T.
188 Of Conies in general,

7. The chord of a conic PP

meets the directrix in K, and
the tangents at P
and P' meet in T\ if RKR'^ parallel to 6T,
meet the tangents in R and R\
KR^KR'.
8. The tangents at P and P', intersecting in T^ meet the
latus rectum in jD and prove that the lines through
/>' ; and D
B\ respectively perpendicular to 8P and &P\ intersect in ST,

9. P&P' is a focal chord; shew that any line through 8 is

divided harmonically by the directrix and the tangents at and P
F.
10. Having given a focus, a tangent, and the eccentricity
of a conic section ;
prove that the locus of its centre is a circle.

11. If P, Q be two points on a conic, and jp, q two points

on the directrix such that ipq^ subtends at the focus half the angle
subtended by PQ, either P'p and Qn or Pq, and Qp meet on the
curve.

12. A
chord PP' of a conic meets the directrix in P, and
from any point T in PP
TLL' is drawn parallel to SF and
^

meeting /SP, SP' in L and Z' ; prove that the ratio of SL or

SL' to the distance of T from the directrix is equal to the ratio
iiiSA :AX,
13. If an ellipse and an hyperbola have their axea coincident
and proportional, points on them equidistant from one axis have
the sum of the squares on their distances from the other axis
constant.

14. If Q be any point in the normal PG^ QR the perpendi-

cular on SP, and QM
the perpendicular on PN,
QR : PM :: SA : AX,
15. The normals at tbe extremities of a focal chord PSQ of
a conic intersect in K, and KL is drawn perpendicular to PQ ;
KF is a diagonal of the parallelogram of which SK, KL are

adjacent sides prove that

: KF
is parallel to the transverse axis

of the conic.

16. Given a focus of a conic section inscribed in a triangle,

find the points where it touches the sides.
17. PSQ is any focal chord of a conic section ; the normals
at P and Q intersect in K^ and KN
is drawn perpendicular to
PQ ;
prove that PN is equal to SQ, and hence deduce the locus
of iV.
 Examples. 189
18. Through the extremity P, of the diameter PQ of an
ellipse, TFT' is drawn meeting two conjugate dia-
the tangent
meters in Ty T, From P, Q the lines PR^ QR are drawn paral-
lel to the same conjugate diameters. Prove that the rectangle
under the semiaxes of the ellipse is a mean proportional between
the triangles PQ^R and CTT.

19. Shew that a conic may be drawn touching the sides of a

triangle, having one focus at the centre of the circumscribing
circle, and the other at the orthocentre.

20. The perpendicular from the focus of a conic on any

tangent, and the central radius to the point of contact, intersect
on the directrix.

21. AB, AC are tangents to a conic at B^ and (7, and

DEOF drawn from a point D in AO^
is parallel io AB and
cutting the curve in E and P, and BG in 6^ ; shew that
DG''=DE,DF,
22. A diameter of a parabola, vertex P, meets two tangents
in D and E and their chord of contact is shew that (?,

FG''=-EB . PP.
23. If a straight line parallel to an asymptote of an hyper-
bola meet the curve in P and also meet two tangents in D and
E and their chords of contact in G ;

FG'' = FD .FE.
24. P and Q are two fixed points in a parabola, and from
any other point R in the curve, PP, RQ are drawn cutting a
fixed diameter, vertex P, in B and C; prove that the ratio of
EB to EC is constant.
The same theorem is also true for an hyperbola, if a fixed

line parallel to an asymptote be substituted for the diameter of

the parabola.

25. If the normal at P meet the transverse axis in </, and gJs
be perpendicular to SP, Pk is constant ; and if M parallel to the
transverse axis meet the normal at P in Z, M is constant.

26. A system of conies is drawn having a common focus S

and a common latus lectnm. LSL\ A fixed straight line through
S intersects the conies, and at the points of intersection normals
are drawn. Prove that the envelope of each of these normals is
a parabola whose focus lies on LSL', and which has the given
line as tangent at the vertex.
 CHAPTER X.

HARMONIC PROPERTIES, POLES AND POLARS.

179. Def. a straight line is harmonically divided

in two points when the whole line is to one of the extreme
parts as the other extreme part is to the middle part.
Thus AD h harmonically divided in C and B, when
AD AG : :: BD : BG.
This definition, be seen,
it will is the same as that of
Art. (17), for BD = AD-AB, and BG=AB-AG,
A C B D

Under these circumstances the four points A, G^ By D

constitutean Harmonic Bange, and if through any point
O four straight lines OA, OG, OB, OD be drawn, these
four lines constitute an Harmonic Pencil.

180. Prop. I. If a straight line he drawn parallel

to one of the rays of an harmonic pencil^ its segments
made by the other three will he equal, and any straight
line is divided harmonically hy the four rays.

Let AGBD be the given harmonic range, and draw

EGF i\\YO\x.g\\ G parallel to OD, and meeting OA, OB in
E and F.
Then AD AG : :: OD : BG,
and BD BG : :: OD : GF
but from the definition
AD AG : :: BD BG :

.'.EG=GF,
 Harmonic Properties. 191

and any otlier line parallel to ECF is obviously bisected

by Oa
Next, let achd be any straight line cutting the pencil,
and draw ^r/ parallel to Od\ so that ec — cf.

Then ad \ ac \\ Od : ec^

and hd \ he :: Od : cf\

,', ad : ac ;: bd : be;

that is, acbd is harmonically divided.

If the line c^ba be drawn cutting AO produced,

then ad : ac :: Od : ec,

and /3S : /3c :: Od : r/;

/. ad : ac :: /3S : /3c,

or ac : aS :: ^c : ^8,

and similarly it may be shewn in all other cases that the

line is harmonically divided.

181. Prop. II. The pencil formed by two straight

lines and the bisectors of the angles between litem is an
harmonic pencil.
For, if OA, OB be the lines, and 00, OD the bisec-
tors, draw KPL parallel to 00 and meeting OA, ODy
192 Harmonic Properties.

OB. Then the angles OKL. OLK are obviously equal,

and the angles at P are right angles; therefore KP = PL,

and the pencil is harmonic.
182. Prop. III. If ACBD, Achd he harmonic
ranges, the straight lines Cc, Bb, Dd will meet in a point,
as also Cd, cD, Bb.
For, if <7c, Ddmeet in F, join Fb ; then the pencil

F (Acbd) is harmonic, and will be cut harmonically by

AD,
 Harmonic Properties, 193
Hence Fh produced will pass through B,
Similarly, if Cd, cD meet in E,
E{Achd) harmonic, and therefore
is hE produced will
pass through B,

Harmonic Properties of a Quadrilateral,

In the preceding figure, let CcdD be any quadri-

lateral ; and let dc^ DC meet in A, Cd^ cD in E, and (7c,

Dd in F.
Then taking h and so as to divide Acd and B ACD
harmgnically, the ranges Acbd and are harmonic, ACBD
and therefore Bh passes through both and F. E
Similarly can be shewn that
it AF is divided harmoni-
cally in L and M, by Dc and dG.
For E{Acbd) is harmonic and therefore the transversal
ALFM is harmonically divided.

183. Prop. IY. If ACBD he an harm^onic range^

arid E the middle point of CD,
EA.EB=EC\
A ~B 1 D
For AD AC BD BG, ; :: :

or AE+EC AE-EC EC+EB : :: : EC-EB-,

AE EC EC ^^, /. : :: :

or AE.EB = EC'-=EDl
Hence also, conversely, if EC^=ED^ = AE EB, . the
range ACBD is harmonic, (7 and 2> being on opposite
sides of E,

Hence, if a series of points -4, a, j5, &,... on a straight

line be such that
EA Ea=EB Eh=EC Ec...
. . ,

^EP\
B. c. s. 13
194 Harmonic Properties.

and if EQ = EP, then the several ranges {APaQ), {BPhQ\

&c. are harmonic.

184. Def. a system of pairs of points on a straight

line such that

EA Ea=EB Eb = .„
. . =EP'=EQ\
is calleda system in Involution, the point E being called
the centre and P, Q the foci of the system.
Any two corresponding points A, a, are called conju-
gate points, and it appears from above that any two con-
jugate points form, with the foci of the system, an harmo-
nic range.

It will be noticed that a focus is a point at which con-

jugate points coincide, and that the existence of a focus is
only possible when the points and a are both on theA
same side of the centre.

185. Prop. V. Having given two pairs of points A

and a, B and b, it is required to find the centre and foci
of the involution.
If E be the centre,
EA : EB :: Eh \ Ea\

Q E A B

.-. EA AB : :: Eb : ab,

or EA Eb : :: AB : ab.

This determines E, and the foci P and Q are given by

the relations
EP'=EQ^=EA . Ea,
We shall however find the following relation useful

Since EA Eb : :: EB \ Ea\
,\ EA Ab : :: EB : aB,
or EA :EB :: Ab : aB;
 Harmonic Properties. 195

but Eh : EA :: ah : AB
/. Eh : EB :: Ah ^^ Ba.
. ha :: .

Again, Q& : Ph :: QB PB :

:. Qh'-Ph : P6 :: QB-PB PB, :

or 2,EP Ph : :: 2.EB : BP;

,\ Ph^ : P^2 .. ^p2 .
j^j^2^

:: ^& : ^^
:: Ah .ha : AB . Ba.
This determines the ratio in which Bh is divided by P.

186. If QAPa be an harmonic range and E the middle

point of PQ, and
if a circle be described on as dia- PQ
meter, the lines joining any point on this circle with B P
and Q will bisect the angles between and aR. AR
For EA Ea==EP^=ER^: .

.-. ^^ : ^i2 :: ^i2 : Ea,

and the triangles ARE, aRE are similar.

Hence AR : «i2 :: ^^ : ER
:: ^^ : EP.
But ^P
jE^a : :; EP EA\ \

.-. aP EP : :: .4P : jE:^.

Hence AR ai2 : :: AP : aP,

and -4i?a is bisected by RP.
13—2
196 Harmonic Properties.

Hence, if A and a, B
and h be conjugate points of a
system in involution of which and Q are the foci, it P
follows that AB
and db subtend equal angles at any point
of the circle on PQ
as diameter.

This fact also affords a means of obtaining the relations

of Art. 185.

We must observe that if the points A, a are on one

side of the centre and B, h on the other, the angles sub-
tended by AB, ab are supplementary to each other.

187. Prop. VI. If four points form an harmonic

range, their conjugates also form, an harmonic range.

Let A, B, C, D be the four points,

a, b, c, d their conjugates.

d ch a A B G D
Q E P

Then, as in Art. 185,

Ua : HD :: ad : AD;
:.AD ,Ea=ED.ad,
Similarly AG .Ea=EG ,ac,
BD .Eb=ED,bd,
BG.Eb=EC.bc.
But, ABGD being harmonic,

AD AG : :: BD BG; :

.-. ED.ad EG. : ac ::ED .bd : EG. be.

Hence ad i ac \: bd : be,

or the range of the conjugates is harmonic.

188. Prop. VII. If a system of conies pass through

four given points, any straight line will be eut by the
system in a series of points in involution.
 Harmonic Properties. 197
The four fixed points being (7, i>, E^ F, let the line
meet one of the conies in A and a, and the straight lines
CF, ED, in B and h.

Then the rectangles AB

Ba, CB . . are in BF the
ratio of the squares on parallel diameters, as also are
Ah . ha and Dh . hE,

But the squares on the diameters parallel to GF^ ED

are in the constant ratio KF KG KE KD
. ; and, the
: .

line Bh being given in position, the rectangles GB . BF

and Dh &jE7 are given ; therefore the rectangles
. . Ba, AB
Ah . &a are in a constant ratio.

But, Art. 185, this ratio is the same as that of PB

PIP; ifP be a focus of the involution A, a, B, h.
Hence P is determined, and all the conies cut the line
Bh in points which form with B, h a system in involution.

We may observe that the foci are the points of contact

of the two conies which can be drawn through the four
points touching the line, and that the centre is the inter-
section of the line with the conic which has one of its
asymptotes parallel to the line.

189. Prop. VIII. If through any point two tangents

he drawn to a any other straight line through the
conic,
point will he divided harmonically hy the curve and the
chord qf contact.
198 Hannmio Properties,

Let AB, AC be the tangents, ADFE the straight

line.

Through D and E draw GDHK, LEMN parallel

to Ba
Then the diameter through A bisects DH, and BG,
and therefore bisects GK, hence GD = HK, and similarly

Also LE : ^i\r :: GD D^; :

LE.EN
.-. : LE^ :: 6^i> . i)^ : GD\
Of LE,LM GD : . Gff :: Z^^ : 6^2)2

:: LA^ : GA\
But LE.LM GD. GH : :: Z^2 . ^^2
hence ^Z : ^(^ :: BL : BG,

and therefore AE : ^Z> :: FE : jPZ>,

that is, ADFE is harmonically divided.

190. Prop. IX. be drawn to a conic,

If two tangents
any third tangent harmonically divided by the two
is
tangents^ the curve, and the chord of contact.
Let DEFG be the third tangent, and through G, the
 Harmonic Properties. 199

point in which it meets AC, draw parallel to AB, GHKL

cutting the curve and the chord of contact in H, K, L,

Then GH. GL : GC' :: AW : AC^

:: GK^ : GC'^;
.\GH. GL = GK\
Hence DG^ DE^ GK^ EB^
: :: :

GH. GL : EB^
GF^ : EF^ ;

that is, DEFG is an harmonic range.

191. Prop. X. If any straight line meet two tangents
to a conic in P
and Q, the chord of contact in T and the
conic in R and V,
FR.FF : QR. QV :: FT^ : QT^.
Taking the preceding figure, draw the tangent DEFG
parallel to FQ.
Then FR FV , : EF^ :: FB'' : BE''
:: FT^ : DE";
and QR.QV : GF'^ :: QC^ : GC^
:: QT^ : BG';
but EF DE : :: GF FG : ;

.-. FR FV FT^
. : :: QR.QV QTK :
 200 Harmonic Properties.

192. Prop. XI. If chords of a conic he drawn through

a fix-ed point the pairs of tangents at their extremities
will intersect in a fixed line.
Let B be the fixed point and G the centre, and let CB
meet the curve in P.

Take A in CP such that

CA : OF :: CP : CB;
then Bis the middle point of the chord of contact of the

tangents AQ, AR.

Draw any chord BBF and let the tangents at JEJ and F

meet in G : also join CG and draw FN

parallel to FF,
Then if CG meet FF in K and the tangent at F in T,
CK.CG=CN.CT;
/. CG CT CN CK
: :: :

CF : CB
CA : CF ;

hence AG is parallel to FT, and the point G therefore

lies on a fixed line.
 Poles and Polars. 201

If the conic be a parabola, we must take AP equal

to BP then, remembering that
:
KG and NT are bisected
by the curve, the proof is the same.

193. If A be the fixed point, and if the chord AEF bo

drawn through A, then, as before,
CK.CG=^GN.CT,

and CG : GT GN GK :

GP : GA
GB : GP',
therefore BG
is parallel to PjT and coincides with the
chord of contact QR,
Hence, conversely, if from points on a straight line
pairs of tangents be drawn to a conic, the chords of con-
tact will pass through a fixed point.

194. Def. The locus of the points of intersection of

tangents at the extremities of chords through a fixed point
is called the polar of the point.

Also, if from points in a straight line pairs of tangents

be drawn to a conic, the point in which all the chords of
contact intersect is called the pole of the line.
If the pole be without the curve the polar is the chord
of contact of tangents from the pole.
202 Poles and Polars.

If the pole be on the curve, the polar is the tangent

at the point.

195. Prop. XII. A straight line drawn through any

point is divided harmonically by the point, the curve,
and the polar of the point.

If the point be without the conic this is already proved

in Art. (189).

If it be within the conic, as B

in the figure of Art. (192),
then, drawing any chord FBEV
meeting in V
the polar
of jB, the chord of contact of tangents from passes V
through B, by Art. (192), and the line VJEBF is therefore
harmonically divided.
Hence the polar may be constructed by drawing two
chords through the pole and dividing them harmonically
the line joining the points of division is the polar.

196. Prop. XIII. The polars of two points intersect

in the pole of the line joining the two points.

For, if ^, ^
be the two points and the pole of AB,
the line -^0 is divided harmonically by the curve, and
therefore the polar of A
passes through the point 0,
Similarly the polar of B passes through ;

That is, the polars of A and B intersect in the pole

ofAB.

197. Prop. XIV. If a quadrilateral be inscribed in

a conic, its opposite sides and diagonals will intersect in
three points such that each is the pole of the line joining
the other two.

Let A BCD F
be the quadrilateral, and G the points
of intersection of AD, BG, and of DC, AB.
Let EG meet FA, FB, in L and M.
Then, Art. (182), FDLA and FCMB are harmonic
ranges

Therefore L and 31 are both on the polar of F, Art

(195), and EG is the polar of F.
 Poles and Folars, 203
Similarly, EF
is the polar of G, and therefore E is
the pole of i^G^; Art. (196).

198. Def. If each of the sides of a triangle be the

polar, with regard to a conic, of the opposite angular point,
the triangle is said to be self-conjugate with regard to the
conic.

Thus the triangle UGF in the above figure is self-

oonjugate.
To construct a self-conjugate triangle, take a straight
line AB and find its pole G.

Draw through G any straight line GD cutting ^^ in

D, and find the pole E
of (7Z>, which lies on AB then
:

GDE is self-conjugate.

199. Prop. XV. If a quadrilateral circumscribe a

conic, its three diagonals form a self conjiuf ate triangle.
Let the polar of F
(that is, the chord of contact P'P)y
meet FG in R\ then, since R is on the polar of F, it
follows that F is on the polar of R.
Now F (AEBG) is harmonic. Art. (182), and if FE meet
P'P in T, P'TPR is an harmonic range hence, by the ;

theorem of Art. (195), i^^is the polar of R,

204 Poles and Polars.

Similarly, if the other chord of contact QQ' meet FG in

R\ ^^isthepolarofi^'j

E the pole of RR, that of LK.

.-. is is,

Again, DEBK harmonic, and, if QP meet AG

is in. S
and GK in QSP V is harmonic, and
V, .*. S is on the polar
of V\ hence, S being on the polar of (7, GV, that is GK^
is the polar of S.
Similarly, if P'Q' meet AGm S\AK\% the polar of S'-,

/. K is the pole of SS', that is, of EL,

ELK is therefore a self-conjugate triangle.
2Q0. Prop. XVI. If a system of conies have a com-
mon self-conjugate triangle, any straight line passing
through one of the angular points of the triangle is cut
ina series ofpoints in involution.
For, if ABG be the triangle, and a line APDQ meet
BG in Z>, and the conic in P and Q, APDQ is an har-
monic range, and all the pairs of points P, Q form with
D
A and an harmonic range.
Hence the pairs of points form a system in involution,
of which A and D are the foci.
 Poles and Polars, 205
201. Prop. XVII. The pencil formed hy the polars
of the four points of an harmonic range is an harmonic
pencil.
Let A BCD be the range, the pole of AD,
Let the polars Oa, Ob, Oc, Od meet AD ma, b, c, d,
and let AD
meet the conic in and Q. P
d
Q
h c a
PA d B~~ir~
Then APaQ, CPcQ, &c. are harmonic ranges; and
therefore, Arts. 183, 184, a, c, b, d are the conjugates of
A, Gy B, D,
Hence, Art. (187), the range acbd is harmonic, and there-
fore the pencil {acbd) is harmonic.

Reciprocal Polars,

202. The pole of a line with regard to any conic being

a point and the polar of a point a line, it follows that any
system of points and lines can be transformed into a
system of lines and points.
This process is called reciprocation, and it is clear that
any theorem relating to the original system will have its
analogue in the system formed by reciprocation.
Thus, if a series of lines be concurrent, the corre-
sponding points are collinear; and the theorem of Art.
(201) is an instance of the eflfect of reciprocation.

203. Def. If a point move in a curve ((7), its polar

will always touch some other curve (C) this latter curve ;

is called the reciprocal polar of ((7) with regard to the

auxiliary conic.

Prop. XVII. If a curve C be the polar of (7, then

will G be the polar of G\
For, if P, P' be two consecutive points of (7, the inter-
section of the polars of P
and P' is a point Q, which is
the pole of the line PP\
But the point Q is ultimately, when P and P' coin-
206 Poles and Polars.
cide, the point of contact of the curve which is touched
by the polar of P.
Hence the polar of any point Q of C is a tangent
to the curve (7.

204. So far we have considered poles and pokrs

generally vdth regard to any conic ; we shall now confine
our attention to the simple case in which a circle is the
auxiliary curve.
In this case, if be a line, AB
its pole, and P
the CY
perpendicular from the centre of the circle on AB, the
rectangle .GP GYis equal to the square on the radius
of the circle.
A simple construction is thus given for the pole of a
line, or the polar of the point.

205. As an illustration take the theorem of the exist-

ence of the orthocentre in a triangle.
Let ADD, BOB, GOF be the perpendiculars, O being
the orthocentre.
The polar reciprocal of the line BG is a point A', and
of the point A a line B^G\
To the line AD corresponds a point P
on B'G\ and
since ADB is a right angle, it follows that PSA' is a
right angle, aS' being the centre of the auxiliary circle.
And, similarly, if SQj SE, perpendiculars to SB\ SG\
meet G'A' and A'B in Q and R, these points correspond
to BE and GF.
But AD, BEyGF 2irQ concurrent,
P, Q, R are collinear.
.*.

Hence the reciprocal theorem,

If from any point S lines he drawn perpendicular
respectively to SA\ SB, SG', and meeting B'G% G^A%
A'B' in P, Q, and R, these points are collinear.
As a second illustration take the theorem.
If A, B he two fixed points, and AG, BG at right
angles to each other, the locus of G is a circle.

Taking 0, the middle point of AB, as the centre of

 Poles and Polars, 207
the auxiliary the reciprocals of
circle, and A
are two B
PE, QF, perpendicular io AB\ the
parallel straight lines,
reciprocals of AC, BG
are points P, Q on these lines such
that POQ is a right angle, and PQ
is the reciprocal
of C7.
Hence, the locus of C being a circle, it follows that PQ
always touches a circle.
The reciprocal theorem therefore is,

If a straight line PQ, bounded by two parallel straight

lines, subtend a right angle at a point 0, halfway between
the lines, the line PQ always touches a circle, having O
for its centre.

206. Prop. XVI 1 1. The reciprocal polar of a circle

with regard to another circle, called the auxiliary circle,
is a conic, a focus of which is the centre of the auxiliary
circle, and the corresponding directrix the polar of the
centre of the reciprocated circle.
Let S be the centre of the auxiliary circle, and KX
the polar of G, the centre of the reciprocated circle.

Then, if P be the pole of a tangent QF to the circle

G, SP meeting this tangent in Y,
SP.SY=SX,SG.
208 Poles and Polars.

Therefore drawing SL parallel to QY,

SP SO : : : SX : QL,
But, by similar triangles,
SP SG : : : SN : GL;
.'. SP SG : : : NX : GQ,
or SP PK
: '.
SG : GQ.
Hence the locus of P
is a conic, focus S, directrix jOT,
and having for its eccentricity the ratio of SG to GQ.
The reciprocal polar of a circle is therefore an ellipse,
parabola, or hyperbola, as the point S is within, upon, or
without the circumference of the circle.

207. Prop. XIX. To find the lotus rectum and axes

of the reciprocal conic.
The ends of the latus rectum are the poles of the tan-
gents parallel to SG.
Hence, if SR be the semi-latus rectum,
SR.GQ^SE\
SE being the radius of the auxiliary circle.

The ends of the transverse axis A, A' are the poles

of the tangents at and F
; G
.-. SA.SG=SE\
and SA' SF=SE\
.
 Poles and Polars. 209
Let SU, SU' be the tangents from S, then

SG.SF=SU\

and aS'^SF : :; aS'^2 .

SU\\
Hence AA' FG : :: /S'^2 .
^^72^

or, if be the centre of the reciprocal,

AG : CQ :: /S'^2 .
^^2.
Again, if BOB' be the conjugate axis,

BO^ = SR.AO\
therefore, since SE'^ = SR . CQ,
BO^ : SE'' :: AG : CQ
:: ^^2 .
^^2^
and BO.SU=SE\
The centre G, it may be remarked, is the pole of UU\
For, from the relations (a),

SE^ : Sm :: SA-^SA' : /S'i^+AS'^;^

:: aS'O : SG
:: AS'O./S'Jf : SG.SM;
.\ SO.SM=SE\
208. In the figures drawn, the reciprocal conic is an
hyperbola ; the asymptotes are therefore the lines through
G perpendicular to SU
and SU\ the poles of these lines
being at an infinite distance.

The semi-conjugate equal to the perpendicular

axis is
from the focus on the asymptote, Art. (99), ^. e. if be the GD
asymptote, SD is equal to the semi-conjugate axis.

Further, since GD
is perpendicular to SU, and G is
the pole of UU\ it follows that is the pole of CU, and D
.-. SD.su =SE\
as we have already shewn.
B. c. s. 14
210 Poles and Polars,
Again, Z> being the intersection of the polars of C and
U, is the intersection of jSU and the directrix.

209. If the point S be within the circle, so that the

reciprocal is an ellipse, the axes are given by similar
relations.

Through S draw /S'C/' perpendicular to FG.

Then SF.SG=SU^
and exactly as in the case of the hyperbola,

AG : CQ :: SE^ : SU^
and BG.su =SE\
210. The important Theorem we have just considered
enables us to deduce from any property of a circle, a cor-
responding property of a conic, and we are thus furnished
with a method, which may serve to give easy proofs of
known properties, or to reveal new properties of conies.
In the process of reciprocation we observe that points
become lines and lines points that a tangent to a curve
;

reciprocates into a point on the reciprocal, that a curve

inscribed in a triangle becomes a curve circumscribing a
triangle, and that when the auxiliary curve is a circle, the
reciprocal of a circle is a conic, the latus rectum of which
varies inversely as the radius of the circle.
 Poles and Polars. 211

211. We give a few instances :

Theorem. Reciprocal.
The angles in the same seg- If a moveable tangent of a
ment of a circle are equal. conic meet two fixed tangents,
the intercepted portion sub-
tends a constant angle at the
focus.
Two of the common tan- two conies have the same
If
gents of two equal circles are focus, and equal latera recta,
parallel. the straight line joining two of
their common points passes
through the focus.
If a chord of a circle sub- If two tangents of a conic
tend a constant angle at a fixed move so that the intercepted
point on the curve, the chord portion of a fixed tangent sub-
always touches a circle. tends a constant angle at the
focus, the locus of the intersec-
tion of the moving tangents is

a conic having the same focus

and directrix.
If a chord of a circle pass The rectangle contained by
through a fixed point, the rect- the perpendiculars from the
angle contained by the seg- focus on two parallel tangents
ments is constant. is constant.
If two chords be drawn If two tangents of a conic
from a fixed point on a circle move so that the intercepted
at right angles to each other, portion of a fixed tangent sub-
theline joining theirends passes tends a right angle at the focus,
through the centre. the two moveable tangents meet
in the directrix.
If a circle be inscribed in a If a triangle be inscribed in
triangle, the lines joining the a conic the tangents at the ver-
vertices with the points of con- tices meet the opposite sides in
tact meet in a point. three points lying in a straight
line.
The sum of the reciprocals With a given point as focus,
of the radii of the escribed cir- four conies can be drawn cir-

cles of a triangle is equal to cumscribing a triangle, and the

the reciprocal of the inscribed latus rectum of one is equal to
circle. the sum of the latera recta of
the other three.

14—2
212 Poles and Polars.

EXAMPLES.
1. If a series of circles pass through the same two points,
any transversal will be cut by the circles in a series of points in
involution.

2. If be the centre of the circle circumscribing a triangle

ABC, and jB'CT, C'A\ A'B>, the respective polars with regard
to a concentric circle of the points Ay B, (7, prove that is the
centre of the circle inscribed in the triangle A'B'C,
3. OA, OB, 0(7 being three straight lines given in position,
shew that there are three other straight lines each of which forms
with OA, OB, 00 an harmonic pencil; and that each of the
three OA, OB^ OG forms with the second three an harmonic
pencil.

4. The straight line ABCD is divided harmonically in the

points B, C; prove that if a circle be described on AO as
diameter, any circle passing through B and D will cut it at right
angles.

Three straight lines AD, AE, AF are drawn through a

5.
fixed point A, and fixed points B, C, D
are taken in AD, such
that ABCD is an harmonic range. Any straight line through C
intersects AE and AF in E and F, and BE, DF intersect
in P; DE, BF in Q. Shew that P and Q always lie in a
straight line through A, forming with AD, AE, AF an har-
monic pencil.
6. (74, CB are two tangents to a conic section, a fixed
point in AB, POQ any chord of the conic ;
prove that the inter-
sections of AP, BQ, and also of AQ, BP lie in a fixed straight

line which forms with CA, CO, CB an harmonic pencil.

7. If three conies pass through the same four points, the

common tangent to two of them is divided harmonically by the
third.

8. Two four points, and through the

conies intersect in
intersection of two of their common chords a tangent is
drawn to one of them prove that it is divided harmonically by
;

the other.

9. Prove that the two tangents through any point to a

conic, any line through the point and the line to the pole of the
last line, form an harmonic pencil.
 Examples. 213
10. Shew that the asymptotes of an hyperbola form, with
any pair of conjugate diameters, an harmonic pencil.

11. Shew, from Arts. 195 and 196, that the centre of a conic
is the pole of a line at an infinite distance.

12. PSQ and PS'R are two focal chords of an ellipse ; two
other ellipses are desciibed having P for a common focus, and
touching the first ellipse at Q and R respectively. The three
ellipses have equal major axes. Prove that the directrices of the
last two ellipses pass through the pole of QR.

13. Tangents from T touch an ellipse in P and Q, and PQ

meets the directrices in R and R' ; shew that PR and QR' sub-
tend equal angles at T,

14. The poles of a given straight line, with respect to sections

through it of a given cone, all lie upon a straight line passing
through the vertex of tJhe cone.

15. If from a given point in the axis of a conic a chord be

drawn, the perpendicular from the pole of the chord upon the
chord will meet the axis in a fixed point.

16.Q ia any point in the tangent at a point of a conic ; P

QO perpendicular to CP meets the normal at in (r, and QE P
perpendicular to the polar of Q meets the normal at in ^; P
prove that EG is constant and equal to the radius of curvature
at P.

17. If any triangle be reciprocated with regard to its ortho-

centre, the reciprocal triangle will be similar and similarly
situated to the original one and will have the same orthocentre.

18. If two conies have the same focus and directrix, and a
focal chord be drawn, the four tangents at the points where it
meets the conies intersect in the same point of the directrix.

19. An ellipse and a parabola have a common focus ; prove

that the ellipse either intersects the parabola in two points and
has two common tangents with it, or else does not cut it.

20. Prove that the reciprocal polar of the circumscribed

circle of a triangle with regard to the inscribed circle is an
ellipse, the major axis of which is equal in length to the radius
of the inscribed circle.
214 Poles and Polars,

21. Prove that four parabolas, having a common focus, may-

be described so that each shall touch three out of four given
straight lines.

22. A triangle ABQ circumscribes a parabola, focus S:

through ABC lines are drawn respectively perpendicular to SA,
SB, SC\ shew that these lines meet in a point.

23. A
tangent to an a point P intersects a fixed
ellipse at
tangent in T-, if through a focus S a line be drawn perpendicular
to ST, meeting the tangent at P in Q^ the locus of ^ is a straight
line touching the ellipse.

24. Prove that the distances, from the centre of a circle, of

any two poles are to one another as their distances from the
alternate polars.

25. If P, Q, R be three points on a conic, and Pi2, QR

meet the directrix in p, q^ the angle which pq subtends at the
corresponding focus is half the angle which PQ subtends.
26. Reciprocate the theorems,

(1) The opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed

in a circle are equal to two right angles.

(2) If a line be drawn from the focus of an ellipse

making a constant angle with the tangent, the
locus of its intersection with the tangent is a
circle.

27. The locus of the intersection of two tangents to a para-

bola which include a constant angle is an hyperbola, having the
same focus and directrix.

28. Two ellipses having a common focus cannot intersect in

more than two real points, but two hyperbolas, or an ellipse and
hyperbola, may do so.

29. ABO is any triangle and P any point : four conic sec-
tions are described with a given focus touching the sides of the
triangles ABC, PBO, PCA, PAB respectively, shew that they
all have a common tangent.
30. TP, TQ are tangents to a parabola cutting the directrix
respectively in X and Y ESF
; is a straight line drawn through

the focus S perpendicular to ST, cutting TP, TQ respectively

m E, F; prove that the lines EY, XF
s^tq tangents to the para-

bola.
 Examples. 215
31. With the orthocentre of a triangle as focus, two conies
are described touching a side of the triangle and having the other
two sides as directrices respectively ; shew that their minor axes
are equal.

32, Conies have a focus and a pair of tangents common ; the

corresponding directrices will pass through a fixed point, and all
the centres lie on the same straight line.

38. The focal distances of a point on a conic meet the curve

again in Q, i2 ; shew that the pole of Qi2 will lie upon the normal
at the first point.

34. The tangent at any point A oi b. conic is cut by two

other tangents and their chord of contact in B, C, D ; shew that
{AjBDC} is harmonic.

35. PQ is the chord of a conic having its pole on the chord

AB, (or AB produced); Qq is drawn parallel to AB meeting the
conic in q; shew that Fq bisects the chord A B.
36. Prove that with a given point as focus, four conies can
be drawn circumscribing a given triangle, and ttiat the sum of
the latera recta of three of them will equal the latus rectum of
the fourth.
If the sides of the triangle subtend equal angles at the given
point one of the conies will touch the other three.

Two parabolas have a common focus S; parallel tangents

37.
are drawn to them at P and Q intersecting the common tangent
in P' and Q' prove that the angle PSQ is equal to the angle
;

between the axes, and the angle P'SQ' is supplementary.

Deduce the reciprocal Theorem for two circles.

38. Two circles can be reciprocated into a pair of confocal

conies.

39. A
system of coaxal circles can be reciprocated into a
system of confocal conies.

40. ABG is a given triangle, S a given point ; on BO, CA^

AB respectively, points A\ B\ C are taken, such that each of
the angles ASA\ BSBf, CSC, is a right angle. Prove that
A', B, C lie in the same straight line, and that the latera
recta of the four conies, which have S for a common focus, and
respectively touch the three sides of the triangles ABC, ARC,
A'BC, A' SO are equal to one another.
216 Poles and Polars.
41. S
the focus of a conic; P, Q two points on it such
ia

that the angle FSQ is constant ; through >S^, SJR, ST are drawn
meeting the tangents at P, Qin. B, T respectively, and so that
the angles PSR, QST are constant ; shew that always RT
touches a conic having the same focus and directrix as the
original conic.

42. OAf OB are common tangents to two conies having a

common focus S, CA, OB are tangents at one of their points
of intersection, BD, AE tangents intersecting (74, OB, in i>, E.
Prove that SDE is a straight line.
43. An hyperbola, of which S is one focus, touches the sides
of a triangle J.5(7; the lines -S^^, SB, SO axe drawn, and also lines
SD, SEy SF respectively perpendicular to the former three lines,
and meeting any tangent to the curve in i>, E, F; shew that the
lines AD, BEf OF are concurrent.

44. A rectangular hyperbola circumscribes a triangle ABO

if D, E, F be the feet of the perpendiculars from A, B, (7 on the
opposite sides, the loci of the poles of the sides of the triangle
ABO are the lines EF, FD, DE,

45. Two common chords of a given ellipse and a circle pass

through a given point ; shew that the locus of the centres of all
such circles is a straight line through the given point.

46. If an hyperbola circumscribe an equilateral triangle, and

have the centre of the circumscribing circle as focus, its eccen-
tricity is the ratio of 4 to 3, and its latus rectum is one-third of
the diameter of the circumscribing circle.

47. If a triangle is self-conjugate with respect to each of a

series of parabolas, the lines joining the middle points of its
sides will be tangents the directrices will pass through 0,
; all
the centre of the circumscribing circle ; and the focal chords,
which are the polars of 0, will all touch an ellipse inscribed in
the given triangle which has the nine-point circle for its auxiliary
circle.
 CHAPTER XI.

THE CONSTRUCTION OF A CONIC FROM GIVEN

CONDITIONS.

212. It will be found that, in general, five conditions

are sufficient to determine a conic, but it sometimes hap-
pens that two or more conies can be constructed which
will satisfy the given conditions. We may have, as given
conditions, points and tangents of the curve, the directions
of axes or conjugate diameters, the position of the centre,
or any characteristic or especial property of the curve.

Prop. I. To construct a 'parabola, passing through

three given points, and having the direction of its axis
given.
In this case the fact that the conic is a parabola is one
of the conditions.

Let P, C, Rbe the given points, and let RE parallel

to the given direction meet PQ in E.
218 The Construction of a Conic
If Ebe the middle poiht of PQ, R
is the vertex of the
diameter RE
but, if not, bisecting
; in V, draw the PQ
diameter through V and take such that A
AV RE \ :: QV^ : QE.EP.
Then A is the vertex of the diameter A V,
If the point E
do not fall between and Q, A must P
be taken on the side of PQ which is opposite to R,

The focus may then be found by taking AU such that

QV^=4:AV.,AU,
and by then drawing t^/S' parallel to QV and taking AS
equal to AU,

213. Prop. II. To describe a parabola through four

given points.

First, let ABCD be four points in a given parabola,

and let the diameter CF meet AD in F,

Draw the tangents PT, QT" parallel to AD, EC, and

the diameter QF
meeting JPTin F.
 from given Conditions. 219

Then ED.EA : EC.EB :: TP^ : TQ'

EF"" : EC\
Hence the construction ; in EA take EF such that
i5:F^ : EG'' :: ED .EA : EC.EB,
then Ci^ is the direction of the axis, and the problem is

reduced to the x)reoeding.

If the point i^be taken in ^^
produced, another para-
bola can be drawn, so that, in general, two parabolas can
be drawn through four points.

214. This problem may be treated differently by help

of the theorem of Art. (48), viz.

Iffrom a point 0, outside a parabola^ a tangent DM,

and a chord GAB be drawn, and if the diameter ME
meet the chord in E,
GE'' = GA,GB.

Let Af Bj Cy D
he the given points, and let E, E%
F, F', be so taken that
220 Tlie Construction of a Conic
Oir- = OE^=OA,OB,
and OF'- = OF''' =OG,OD,
Then EF and E'F' are diameters, and KL, the polar
of 0, will meet ^i^and E'F' in M, N, the points of contact
of tangents from 0.

The second parabola is obtained by taking for diameters

EF and E'F.
215. Prop. III. Any conic passing through four
points has a pair of conjugate diameters parallel to the
aoces of the two parabolas which can he drawn through the
four points.

Let TP, TQ be the tangents parallel to 0^5 and OCD,

and such that the angle PTQ is equal to AOG,
Then, if OE^=OA OB and OF'^ = OG. OD,
.

OE^ OF' OA OB OC OD
: :: . : .

::rP2 : TQ2.
/. J^i^ is parallel to PQ.
Hence, if R and V be the middle points of EF and PQ,
OR is parallel to TV\
But taking OF' equal to OP, OR is parallel to EF\
s\ TV and PQ are parallel to EF' and EF\
i.e. the conjugate diameters parallel to TV and PQ
are parallel to the axes of the two parabolas.
 from given Conditions. 221

216. Prop. IV. Having given a pair of conjugate

diameters, PCP\ DCD\ it is required to construct the
ellipse.

In CP tcake E such that PB PC= GD\

. draw PF
perpendicular to CD and take FC equal to FC.

About CEO describe a circle, cutting PF in G and C \

then PG PG' = PE PC= Ciy\

. .

and GCG' is a right angle ; therefore CG and CG' are the

directions of the axes and their lengths are given by the
relations,

PG .PF^BC\
PG\PF=AC\
We may observe that, being the centre of the circle,

AC^+BO' = PF.PG-¥PF.PG'
^2.PF.P0
^I.PG .PN,
222 The Construction of a Conic
if 2V be the middle point of CE,
= PC^ + PG.PE
= CP''+CD\
If PE' be taken equal to PE in CP produced, and the
same construction be made, we shall obtain the axes of an
hyperbola having (7P, CD for a pair of conjugate semi-
diameters.

217. This problem may be treated also as follows.

In PFy the perpendicular on CD, take

PK=PK' = CD,
then PK^ = PG,PG',
and therefore K'GKG'
is an harmonic range and GCG' ;

being a right angle, it follows, Art. 181, that CG and CG'

are the bisectors of the angles between and CK\ CK
Hence, knowing GP and (7i>, G and G' are determined.

218. Prop. V. Having given the focus and three

points of a conic, to find the directrix.

Let A^ B, C, She the three points and the focus.

Produce BA D so that
to

BD AD SB: :: : SA,
and CB to E, so that
BE CE : :: SB : SC;
then DE is the directrix.
The lines BA, ^(7 may be also divided internally in the
same ratio, so that four solutions are generally possible.
Conversely, if three points A, B, C and the directrix
are given, let BA, BG
meet the directrix in and D E \

then S lies on a circle, the locus of a point, the distances of

which from and A B
are in the ratio of ^Z> to DB.

S lies also on a circle, similarly constructed with regard

to BGE\ the intersection of these circles gives two points,
either of which may be the focus.
 from given Conditions. 223
219. Prop. VI. Having given the centre, the direc-
tions of a pair of conjugate diameters, and two points of
an ellipse, to describe the ellipse.

If G be the centre, CA, CB the given directions, and

P, Q the points, draw QMQ', PLP' parallel to CB and

CA, and make Q'Jf=ei»f and P'L = PL.
Then the ellipse will evidently pass through P' and Q'
and if GA, GB be the conjugate radii, their ratio is given
by the relation
(X42 .
CB1 ..
;eP EP'
. : JEQ . EQ\
E being the point of intersection of P'P and Q'Q.
Set up a straight line ND perpendicular to GA and
such that
jS[Z)2 : ]Sfp2 ..
JEP . EP' : EQ . EQ',
and describe a circle, radius GD and centre G cutting GA
in A, and take

GB : GA :: NP : ND.
Then AN.NA'=ND\
and PiV2 .
^^^ jv^^' ..
cB^ .
CA\
Hence GA, GB are determined, and the ellipse passes
through P and Q.
224 The Construction of a Conic
220. Prop. VII. To describe a conic passing through
a given point and touching two given straight lines in
given points.

Let OA^ OB be the given tangents, A and B the points

of contact, N the middle point of AB.

M a
1st. Let the given point D be in ON] then, if
ND = OD^ the curve is a parabola.

But if ND< OD, the curve is an ellipse, and, taking G

such that 00 GN= GD'^y the point
. is the centre.
If ND > OD the curve is an hyperbola, and its centre
is found in the same manner.
2nd. If the given point be E^ not inON, draw GEF,
parallel to AB, and make FL equal to EL.
Take K such that
GK^==GE. GF,
then AKproduced will meet ON in 2>, and the problem
is reduced to the first case.

To justify this construction, observe that if DM be the

tangent at D,
GE.GF : GA^ ;: DM^ : MA""
:: GK^ : GA\
so that GE.GF-=GK\
 from given Conditions, 225

221. Prop. VIII. To draw a conic through Jive given

points.

Let A,B, C,D, E be the five points, and F the inter-

section of BE, AB,

Draw CGf Cff, parallel respectively to AB and ED and

meeting AB in G and H.
ED,
If F and G fall between D afid E, and F and IT be-
tween A and ^, take GP in (76r produced and HQ in (TiH"
produced, such that

CG,GP DG, GE AF FB i>i^. i^^,

: :: , :

and (7i7. HQ ^i7. iZ5

: DF FE AF FB
:: . : .

Then, Arts. (86) and (129), P and Q are points in the

conic.

Also PC, AB being parallel chords, the line joining

their middle points is a diameter, and another diameter is
obtained from CQ and DE.
If these diameters are parallel, the conic is a parabola^
and we fall upon the case of Prop.
II. ; but if they inter-
sect in a point O, this point the centre of the conic,
is

and, having the centre, the direction of a diameter, and

B. c. s. 15
226 The Construction of a Conic
two ordinates of that diameter, we fall upon the case of
Prop. VI.
The figure is drawn for the case in which the pentagon
A EBGD is not re-entering, in which case the conic may be
an elUpse, a parabola, or an hyperbola.
If any one point fall within the quadrilateral formed by
the other four, the curve is an hyperbola.
In all cases the points P, Q must be taken in accord-
ance with the following rule.

The points (7, P, or (7, Q must be on the same or dif-

ferent sides of the points G, or H, according as the points
D, E, or B,A are on the same or different sides of the
points G or H,
Thus, if the point E be between D
and P, and if G be
between Dand E, and H
between A and B, the points P
and O -will be on the same side of G, and G, Q on the same
side of IT, but if H
fall outside A and B, G and Q will be

on opposite sides of H,
Remembering that if a straight line meet only one
branch of an hyperbola, any parallel line will meet only
one branch, and that if it meet both branches, any parallel
will meet both branches, the rule may be established by
an examination of the different cases.

222. The above construction depends only on the ele-

mentary properties of Conies, which are given in Chapters
I, II, III, and IV. For some further constructions »we
shall adopt another method depending on harmonic pro-
perties.

Prop. IX. Havifig given two pairs of lines OA, 0A\

and OB, 0B\ to find a pair of lines OG, 0G\ which shall
make with each of the given pairs an harmonic pencil.
This is at once effected by help of Art. (185).

For, any transversal cut the lines in the points c, a, b,

if

c', b\ a\ the points c, c' are the foci of the involution, in

which a, a' are conjugate, and also &, 6', the centre of the
involution being the middle point of cc'.
 from given Conditions. 227
223. Prop. X. If two points and two tangents of a
conic he given, the chord of contact intersects the given
chord in one of two fixed points*
Let OP, OQ be the given tangents, A and B the given

points, and G the intersection of AB and the chord of con-

tact.

Let OC be the polar of G, and let AB meet OG' in D,

Then G is on the polar of D, and therefore DBGA is
an harmonic range.
n Also, G being on the polar of G\ G'QGP is an harmonic
range.
Hence if two lines OG, OG' be found, which are har-
monic with OJ, OB, and also with OP, OQ, these lines
intersect ABm
two points G and Z>, through one of which
the chord of contact must pass.
Or thus, the tangents meet AB in a and
if find the &,
foci Oand D of the involution AB, ah the chord of con-
\

tact passes through one of these points.

* I am indebted to Mr Worthington for much valuable assist-

ance in thia chapter, and especially for the coDstructions of
Articles 223, 225, 226, and 229.
228 The Construction of a Conic
224. Prop. XI. Having given three points and two
tangents, to find the chord qf contact.

In the preceding figure let OP, OQ be the tangents,

and A, B, IJ the points.

Find 00, 0(7' harmonic with OA, OB, and OP, OQ;
OF,
also find OG harmonic with OA, OE and OP, OQ,

Then any one of the four lines joining (7 or Z) to Por

(t isa chord of contact, and the chord of contact and
points of contact being known, the case reduces to that of
Art. (220).
Hence four such conies can in general be described.

225. Prop. XII. To describe a conic, passing through

two given points, and touching three given straight lines.
Let AB, the line joining the given points, meet the
given tangents QR, RP, PQ, in N, M, L.

Find the foci C, D of the involution A, B and L, M;

Then YZ, the polar of P, passes through C or Z>. Art.
223.

Also find the foci,F, G, of the involution A, B, and

M, N; then XY, the polar of R, passes through or G. F
Let ZX meet PR in T; then T is on the polar of Q,
and Q F is the polar of T.
Hence TXUZ is harmonic
therefore MFVC is harmonic.
 from given Conditions. 229
This determines F, and joining QV, we obtain the
point of contact Y,
Then, joining YG and YF, Z
and X
are obtained, and
X, Yy Z
being points of contact, we have five points, and
can describe the conic by the construction of Art. (221), or
by that of Art. (228).
Since either C or D
may be taken with F or G, there
are in general four solutions of the problem.

226. Prop. XIII. To describe a coniCy having given

four points and one tangent
Let A^B^C^D be the given points, and complete the
quadrilateral.

Then ^is the pole of FG^ and if the given tangent KL

meet FG in jST, E is on the polar of K\ therefore the other
tapgent through K forms an harmonic pencil with KF^
KL, KE,
Hence two tangents being known, and a point in theE
chord of contact, if we find two points P^P' m A^ B, such
that KPj KP' are harmonic with KA^ KB, and also with
KL, KL\ we shall have two chords of contact EP, EP\
and therefore two points of contact for KL
and also
for KL\
Hence two conies can be described.
We observe that if two conies pass through four points,
their common tangents meet on one of the sides of the self-
conjugate triangle EFG.
230 The Construction of a Conic
227. Prop. XIV. Given four tangents and one point,
to construct the conic.

Let ABCD be the given circumscribing quadrilateral,

and E the given point. Completing the figure, draw LEF

through ^ and F, and complete the harmonic range LEFE\

then, since F the pole of HG^ Art. (197), E' is a point in
is
the conic.

Also since ^is the pole of FA^ Art. 199, the chord of
contact of the tangents AB^ AD, passes through K.

Hence the construction is the same as that of Art. 226,

and there are two solutions of the problem.

228. Prop. XV. Given five points, to construct the

conic.

Let A, B,G, D, E be the five points, and complete the

quadrilateral ABCD.
Then ZTis the pole of FG, and FG passes through the
points of contact P, Q of the tangents from H.
Join HE, cutting FG
in K, and complete the harmonic
range HERE'-, then E^ is a point in the conic.
Also AE, BE' will intersect FG in the same point F\
and E'A, EB will also intersect FG in the same point G\
 from given Conditions, 231

But GPFQ and G'PF'Q are both harmonic ranges,

tlierefore P and Q are the foci of an involution of which
F, G and F\ G' are pairs of conjugate points.

Hence, finding these foci, P and Q, the tangents HP^

HQ are known, and the case is reduced to that of Prop. VII.
Hence only one conic can be drawn through five points.

229. Prop. XVI. Given Jive tangents, to find the points

of contact.
Let ABODE be the circumscribing pentagon. Con-

sidering the quadrilateral FBCD, join FC, BD meeting

in^.
232 . The Construction of a Conic, &c.
Then, (Art. 199), K is the pole of the line joining the
intersections of FB, CD, and of FD, BC that \ is, the

chords of contact of BF, CD, and of BG^ FD meet in K,

Similarly if BG, A G meet in Z, the chords of contact of
AB, CG, and of BG, AG meet in L.
Henoe KL the chord of contact of AB,
is GD^ and
therefore determines 31, N
the points of contact.

Hence it will be seen that only one conic can be drawn

touching five lines.
 CHAPTEH XII.

THE OBLIQUE CYLmDER, THE OBLIQUE CONE,

AND THE CONOIDS.

230. Def. If a straight line, which is not perpendi-

cular to the plane of a given circle, move parallel to itself,
and always pass through the circumference of the circle,
the surface generated is called an oblique cylinder.

The line through the centre of the circular base, parallel

to the generating lines, is the axis of the cylinder.

It evident that any section by a plane parallel to the

is

axis consists of two parallel lines, and that any section by

a plane parallel to the base is a circle.
The plane through the axis perpendicular to the base
is the principal section.

The section of the cylinder by a plane perpendicular

to the principal section, and inclined to the axis at the
same angle as the base, is called a subcontrary section.

231. Prop. I. The subcontrary section of an oblique

cylinder is a circle.

The plane of the paper being the principal plane and

APB the circular base, a subcontrary section DPE^ is the
angles BA E, DEA being equal.

Let PQ be the line of intersection of the two circles ;

then PN NQ or Pm = BN NA.
. .
234 The Oblique Cylinder, the Oblique Cone,

But NB = ND,2indNA = NJE;;

.\ PN.NQ = DN.NU,
and DPE is a circle.

232. Prop. II. The section of an oblique cylinder hy

a plane which is not parallel to the base or to a subcon-
trary section is an ellipse.

Let the plane of the section, DPE, meet any circular

PQ, and let
section in the line ^^ be that diameter of the

circular section which is perpendicular to PQ, and bisect

PQ in the point F.
Let the plane through the axis and the Hue AB cut the
section DPE in the line DFE.
Then PF^=AF, FB,
 and the Conoids 235

But if DE be bisected in C, and GKC bo the circular

section through C parallel to APB,
AF FD CG CD,
: :: :

and FB FE (76^ CD,

: :: :

/. AF.FB : 2>i?^. i^^ :: (76?2 : CD'^ ;

hence, observing that CG = (7/ir,

Pi^2 : DF ,FE :: C'iT^ : Ci)^.

But, if a series of parallel circular sections be drawn,

PQ is always parallel to itself and bisected by ; DE
Therefore the curve DPE is an ellipse, of which CD,
CK are conjugate semi-diameters.
233. If a straight line pass always through a
Def.
fixed pointand the circumference of a fixed circle, and if
the fixed point be not in the straight line through the
centre of the circle at right angles to its plane, the surface
generated is called an oblique cone.

The plane containing the vertex and the centre of the

biise, and also perpendicular to the base, is called the prin-
cipal section.

The section made by a plane not parallel to the base,

but perpendicular to the principal section, and inclined to
236 The Oblique Cylinder, the Oblique Cone,

the generating lines in that section at the same angles as

the base, is called a subcontrary section.

234. Prop. III. 77ie subcontrary section of an ob-

lique cone is a circle.

The plane of the paper being the principal section, let

APB be parallel to the base and DPE a subcontrary sec-

tion, so that the angle

ODU=OAB,
and OED = OBA,
The angles DBA, DBA being equal to each other, a
circle can be drawn through BDAE.
Hence, if PNQ be the line of intersection of the two
planes,
DN,NE=BN,NA,
= PN.NQ;
therefore DPE is a circle.

And all sections by planes parallel to DPE are circles.

Planes parallel to the base, or to a subcontrary sec-
tion, are called also Cyclic Planes,
 and the Conoids, 237
235. Prop. IV. The section of a cone by a plane not
parallel to a cyclic plane is an Ellipse, Parabola^ or Hy-
perbola,

(1) Let the section, DPE, meet all the generating

lines on one side of the vertex.

Let any circular section cut DPE in PQ, and take

AB the diameter of the circle which is at right angles to,
and bisects PQ,
The plane OAB will cut the plane of the section in a
line DNE,
Draw OK parallel to DE and meeting in K the plane
of the circular section through D parallel to APB, and
join DKy meeting in F. OE
Then AN ND KD OK, : :: :

and BN NE KF OK; : :: :

therefore AN NB DN NE KD KF
. : . :: . : OK^,
or PN^ : DN. NE :: KD KF OKI
. :

But if a series of circular sections be drawn the lines

PQ will always be parallel, and bisected by DE;
238 The Oblique Cylinder, the Oblique Coney

Therefore the curve DPE

is an ellipse, having for DE
a diameter, and the conjugate diameter parallel to PQ,
and the squares on these diameters are in the ratio of
KD KF to 0K\
.

(2) Let the section be parallel to a tangent plane of

the cone.

If OB
be the generating line along which the tangent
plane touches the cone, and BT
the tangent line at -5 to a

circular section through B, the line of intersection PQ

will be parallel to BT, and therefore perpendicular to the
diameter BA through B,

Let the plane BOA cut the plane of the section in DN.
Then drawing DK parallel to AB,
BN=KD,
and AN ND
'.
KD OK; :: :

therefore AN NB . ND KD KD
: , :: : OK,
or PN^ ND,KD KD
: :: : OK,
and KD, OK being constant, the curve is a parabola
having the tangent at D parallel to PQ.
 and the Conoids, 239
If the plane of the section meet both branches of the

cone, make the same construction as before, and we shall

obtain, in the same manner as for the ellipse,

Pm : DN, NE :: DK KF , : 0K\
OK being parallel to BE.
Therefore, since the point N is not between the points
D and E^ the curve DP is an hyperbola.

Conoids.

236. Def. If a conic revolve about one of its princi-

pal axes, the surface generated is called a conoid.
If the conic be a circle, the conoid is a sphere.
If the conic be an the conoid is an oblate or a
ellipse,
prolate spheroid according as tlie revolution takes place
about the conjugate or the transverse axis.
If it be an hyperbola the surface is an hyperboloid of
one or two sheets, according as the revolution takes place
about the conjugate or transverse axis, and the surface
generated by the asymptotes is called the asymptotic cone.

If the conic consist of two intersecting straight lines,

the limiting form of an hyperbola, the revolution will be
240 The Oblique Cylinder, the Oblique Cone,

about one of the lines bisecting the angles between them,

and the conoid will then be a right circular cone.

237. Prop. V. A
section of a paraboloid by a plane
parallel axis
to the a parabola equal to the generating
is
parabola, and any other section not perpendicular to the
aa'is is an ellipse.

Let P VN be a section parallel to the axis, and take

the plane of the paper perpendicular to the section and

cutting it in VN,

Take any circular section DPE, cutting the section

PVN'mPNP\
Then PN is perpendicular to DE,
and PN^=DN.NE

=^4:AS.AC-4:AS.An
= 4AS. VN;
therefore the curve VP is a parabola equal to EAB,
Again, let BPF
be a section not parallel or perpendi-
cular to the axis, but perpendicular to the plane of the
paper
 and the Conoids. 241
Then, BN.NF=4.SG, VN, OG being the diameter
bisecting BF ;

therefore FN^ : BN NF AS . :: : SG,

and the curve BPN is an ellipse.

Moreover the plane

if BF
move parallel to itself, SG
is unaltered, and the sections ly parallel planes are simi^

lar ellipses.

In exactly the same manner, it may be shewn that the

oblique sections of spheroids are ellipses, and those of hy-
perboloids either ellipses or hyperbolas.

238, Prop. VI. The sections of an hyperholoid and

its asymptotic cone hy a plane are similar curves.

Taking the case of an hyperboloid of two sheets, let

DPF, dP'f, be the sections of the hyperboloid and cone,

P'PN the line in which their plane is cut by a circular sec-

tion G^P^ or ^PVi;.
Through D draw LDl perpendicular to the axis ; then,
uncQPN^=^GN .NK,
B. C. S. 16
242 The Oblique Cylinder^ the Oblique Cone,

and P'N^=gN.Nk,
PW2 : dN, Nf gN Nk
:: , : dN . Nf,
:: LD,W Dd : , Df,
:: BC^ : CE''
ifC^ be the semidiameter parallel to DF;
and PN^ i>iV. iVTF GN NK i>iV^.
: :: , : NF
:: ^(72 : (7^^;
therefore the curves DPF, dPf
have their axes in the
same ratio, and are similar ellipses.
In the same manner the theorem can be established if
the sections be hyperbolic, or if the hyperboloid be of one
sheet.

239. Prop. VII. If an hyperboloid of one sheet be

cut by a tangent plane of the asymptotic cone, the section
will consist of two parallel straight lines.

Let AQ, A'Q' be a section through the axis, the CN

generating line, in the plane AQ, along which the tangent

plane touches the cone and PNP^ the section with this
;

tangent plane of a circular section QPQ'.

Then PN'^=QN.NQ'
= ^(7^, Art. (102);
therefore if BCB' be the diameter, perpendicular to the
plane OA Q, of the principal circular section,
PN=BC and P'N=BV;
 and the Conoids. 243
therefore PB
and P'B' are each parallel to CN) that is,

the section consists of two parallel straight lines.

240. Prop. VIII. The section of an hyperboloid of

one sheet ty a plane parallel to its axis, and touching the
central circular section, consists of two straight lines.

Let the plane pass through A, and be perpendicular to

the radius CA of the central section ; fig. Art. (239).

The plane will cut the circular section QPQ' in a line

RLR, and
RL' = QL.LQ'=^QM^-AC\
if Jf be the middle point of QQ\
But QM'-AC^ : CM^ :: AG^ : BC^ -,

therefore RL : AL :: AG BG \

hence it follows that AR is a fixed line j and similarly AR'

is also a fixed line.

It will be seen that these lines are parallel to the sec-

tion of the cone by the plane through the axis perpendicu-
lar to GA.

241. Prop. IX. If a conoid he cut hy a plane, and

if spheres he inscrihed in the conoid touching the plane,
the points of contact of the spheres with the plane will
he the foci of the section, and the lines of intersection
of the planes of contact with the plane of section will he
the directrices.

In order to establish this statement, we shall first

demonstrate the following theorem ;

If a circle touch a conic in two points, the tangent

from any point of the conic to the circle hears a constant
ratio to its distance from the chord oj contact.

Take the case of an ellipse, the chord of contact being

perpendicular to the transverse axis.

If EME' be this chord, the normal EG is the radius of

16—2
244 The Oblique Cylinder, the Oblique Cone,

the circle, and if PT be a tangent from a point P of the

ellipse,

But EM^-PN^ : CN^-CM^ :: BO^ : AC^,

and CN^- CM^=MN{CM-^ CN),
Let the normal at P meet the axis in G^ ;

then NG' : CN :: ^C^ : AC\

and CM ^(72
iJ/G^ : :: : ^(7^
therefore NG' + MG CN+CM : :: BC^ ^C^. :

Hence EM^-PN^=MN{NG' + MG).

Also iV6^2 - il^6?2 MN {NG + iffG^)

therefore PT^=MN{NG + MG)-'MN{NG' + MG)

=MN.GG\
But (76^ : CM :: /S^^s : AG\
 and the Conoids. 245
and CG' : CN :: SC^ : ^(7^;
therefore GG' : MN :: SG^ : ^C'''.

Hence PT^ : PU
SC^ ^a^
:: :

PZ being equal to MN.

This being established let the figure revolve round the
axis AGy and let a plane section ap of the conoid, per-
pendicular to the plane of the paper, touch the sphere at S
and cut the plane of contact EE' in Ik.
From a point p of the section let fall the perpendi-
cular pm on the plane EE\ draw mk perpendicular to Ik^
and join pk.
Then pm : ^A; is a constant ratio.

Also taking the meridian section through p^ pS is

equal to the tangent from p to the circular section of the
sphere, and is therefore in a constant ratio to pm
Hence Sp is to pk in a constant ratio,
and therefore S is the focus and kl the directrix of the
section ap.

242. If the curve be a parabola focus S\ the proof is as

follows :

PT^ = PG^-EG'^
=^PN^ + NG^-EM'^-MG'^
=MN(NG + MG)-4AS' MN .

= MN{NG + MG)-2MG.MN
^MN\
It will be found that the theorem is also true for an
hyperboloid of two sheets, and for an hyperboloid of one
sheet, but that in the latter case the constant ratio oi PT
toPL is not that of SG to AG.

243. The geometrical enunciation of the theorem also

requires modification in several cases. To illustrate the
difiiculty, take the paraboloid, and observe that if the
246 The Ohliqae Cylinder, the Oblique Cone, c&c.

normal at E cuts the axis in 6r, and if be the centre of

curvature at Ay
AG:>AO,
and the radius of the circle is never less than AO,
This shews that a circle the radius of which is less than
AO cannot be drawn so as to touch the conic in two points.

We may mention one exceptional case in which the

theorem takes a simple form.

In general
I!G'-=EM'+MG' = 4AS'{AM-\-AS')
= 4AS\S'G.
Taking the point g between aS'' and 0, describe a circle
centre g and such that the square on its radius = 4^ aS" S'g. .

Also take a point F in the axis produced such that

AF=Og;
it willthen be found that the tangent from P to the circle
will be equal to NF,

When g coincides with S', the circle becomes a point,

and AF=AS";
we thus fall back on the fundamental definition of a para-
bola.

It will be found that if the plane section of the conoid

pass through S', the point S' is a focus of the section.
 APPENDIX.

244. Jf a circle roll on the inside qf the circumfer-

ence of a circle of double its radius, any point in the area
of the rolling circle traces out an ellipse.
Let G be the centre of the rolling circle, E the point of
contact.

Then, if the circle meet in Q a fixed radius OA of the

fixed circle, the angle EGQ is twice the angle EOA and
therefore the arcs EQ, EA are equal.

Hence, when the circles touch at A, the point Q of the

rolling circle coincides with A, and the subsequent path of
Q is the diameter through A.

P be a given point
Let in the given radius CQ, and
RPN perpendicular to OA ;

Then, OQE being a right angle, EQ is parallel to RP

and therefore CR = CP, and OR is constant.
248 Appendix,
Also PN EN FQ: :: : OR;
therefore, the locus of B being a circle, the locus of P is
an ellipse, whose axes are as PQ : OB,
But OB
is clearly the length of one semi-axis, and PQ
or OB' is therefore the length of the other, OB, OB' being
equal to OC-h and CP CP. 00-
245. Properties of the ellipse are deducible from this
construction.

Thus, as the circle rolls, the point is instantaneously E

at rest,and the motion of P
is therefore at right angles to
UP, i,e, producing EP
to F, in the direction FO,

Therefore, drawing FT parallel to OF, FT is the tan-

gent, and PF
the normal.
A circle can be drawn through EPQT since EFT,
EQT Sire right angles; but the circle through QPJ^ clearly
passes through B; therefore the angle OBT is a right
angle, and
ON OB OB: :: : OT.
or ON,OT=OB\
a known property of the tangent.
Again if PF meet OQ in G, the angles PQG, PFQ
are equal, being on equal bases EQ, OQ'
therefore PG PQ : :: PQ : PF,
or PG,PF=Pqr=OB'\
a known property of the normal.

246. A given straight line has its ends moveable on

two straight lines at right angles to each otJier; the path
of any given point in the moving line is an ellipse.
Let P
be the point in the moving line AB, and C the
middle point of AB,
Let the ordinate NP, produced if necessary, meet 00
in Q; then CQ = CP and OQ is equal to AP, so that tiie
locus of Q is a circle.
 Appendix, 249
Also FN QN PB
: :: : OQ
:: PB PA;:

P
therefore the locus of is an ellipse, and its semi-axes arc
equal to ^P and BP.
247. The theorem of Art, 244 is at once reducible to
this case, for QPQ'
being a diameter of the rolling circle is
of constant length, and the points Q and Q' move along
fixed straight lines at right angles to each other the locus ;

of P is therefore an ellipse of which Q'P and are the PQ

semi- axes.

248. From this construction also properties of the

tangent and normal are deducible.

Complete the rectangle OAEB then, since the direc-

;

tions ofmotion of A and B are respectively perpendicular

to EA and EB, the state of motion of the line AB may be
represented by supposing that the triangle EAB is turning
round the point E.
Hence it follows that EP is the normal to the locus of
P and that PT perpendicular to EP is the tangent.
250 Appendix.

Let OF parallel to PT meet UP in F; then since a

circle can be drawn through OFBE,
the angle PFB = EOB = PBG,
and the triangles PGB^ PFB are similar.

Hence PG PB PB PF,
: :: :

or PG,PF=PB\
where PB is equal to the semi-conjugate axis and, simi- ;

larly, by joining AF^ it can be shewn that Pg .PF=AP\

g being the point of intersection of and AG. PG

Again, a circle can be drawn round EQPB, and, since
EPT, EBTdixe right angles, 2^ is on this circle, and there-
fore TQE is a right angle.
Hence OQN, and OQTscre similar triangles, and
ON OQ : :: OQ : OT,
or ON,OT=AP\
where -4P is equal to the semi- transverse axis.

249. Observing that the circle circumscribing the rect-

angle passes through F, we have
PF.PE=AP.PB', '

hence PE is equal to the semi- diameter conjugate to OP.

This suggests another construction for the problem
solved in Art. (216).

Thus, if OP, OD be the given semi-conjugate diameters,

draw PF perpendicular to OD, and in FP produced, take
PE equal ta OD.
Join OE, bisect it in (7, and take CQ equal to CP)
then OA, OB drawn parallel and perpendicular to PQ,
and meeting GP in A and B, will be the directions of the
axes,and their lengths will be equal to and PB, AP
250. If a given triangle A QB move in its own plane
so that the extremities A, B, of its base AB move on two
 Appendix. 251

Jixed straight lines at right angles to each other, the path

ofthepoird Q is an ellipse.

O A
If be the point of intersection of the fixed lines, and
C the middle point of AB,
the angles COB, CBO are equal,

so that, as ^^ slides, the line CB, and therefore also the

line CQ, turns round as fast as00, but in the contrary
direction.

Produce 00 to P, making 0F= GQ ; then the locus of

iP is a circle radius 00+ OQ.

N X
There is clearly one position of AB for which the points
0, and
(7, Q are in one straight line.
Let OX be this straight line, and let 0(7, CQ, be any
other corresponding positions of the lines
then, if CE is parallel to OX, CE bisects the angle PCQ,
and, drawing PQN and CL perpendicular to OX,
QN=CL-PE, PN=OL + PE,
hence QN PN 00- OP 00+ CP
: :: :

:: 00- CQ 00+ CQ,

:

and .'. the locus of Q is an eUipse of which the s^ni-axes

are 00+ CQ and 00- CQ,
 MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS.
1. On a plane field the crack of the rifle and the thud of
the ball striking the target are heard at the same instant ; find
the locus of the hearer.

2. PQ, P'Q! are two focal chords of a parabola, and PR,

parallel to P'Q!, meets in R the diameter through Q; prove that
pq,,p'q;=pr\
3. OP and CD are conjugate semi-diameters of an ellipse ;

PQ isa chord parallel to one of the axes ; shew that DQ, is

parallel to one of the straight lines which join the ends of the
axes.

4. Aline cuts two concentric, similar and similarly situ-

ated ellipses in P, Q, q, p. If the line move parallel to itself,
PQ . Qp is constant.
5. If the ordinate NP
of a conic be produced so that
NQ=SP, find the locus of Q.

6. If a circle be described passing through any point P of

a given hyperbola, and the extremities of the transverse axis,
and the ordinate NP be produced to meet the circle in Q, the
locus of Q is an hyperbola.

7. PQ is one of a series of chords inclined at a constant

angle to the diameter AR ot a. circle; find the locus of the inter-
section of APyBQ,

8. If from a point T in the director circle of an ellipse,

tangents TPy TP' be drawn, the line joining T with the inter-
section of the normals at P
and P' passes through the centre.

9. The points, in which the tangents at the extremities of the

transverse axis of an ellipse are cut by the tangent at any point
of the curve, are joined, one with each focus ;
prove that the point
of intersection of the joining lines lies in the normal at the point.

10. Having given a focus, the eccentricity, a point of the

curve, and the tangent at the point, shew that in general two
 Miscellaneous Prohlems. 253
conies can be described. If the eccentricity be less than unity,
shew that there are two positions of the tangent for which only one
conic can be described, and if the eccentricity be equal to unity,
describe the form assumed by one of the parabolas.

11. A
parabola is described with its focus at one focus of a
given central conic, and touches the conic; prove that its directrix
will touch a fixed circle.

12. The extremities of the latera recta of all conies which

have a common transverse axis lie on two parabolas.

13. OP, OQ
touch a parabola at the points P, Q; another
line touches the parabola in H, and meets OP, OQ in S, T if "T ;

be the intersection of the lines PT, SQ, 0, H, V are in a straight

line.

14. On all parallel chords of a circle a series of isosceles tri-

angles are described, having the same vertical angle, and having
their planes perpendicular to the plane of the circle. Find the
locus of their vertices ; and find what the vertical angle must be
in order that the locus may be a circle.

15. A series of similar ellipses whose major axes are in the

same straight line pass through two given points. Prove that
the major axes subtend right angles at four fixed points.

16. From the centre of two concentric circles a straight line

is drawn to cut them in P
and Q; through P
and Q straight
lines are drawn parallel to two given lines at right angles to eacli
other. Shew that the locus of their point of intersection is an

17. A
circle always passes through a fixed point, and cuts a
given straight line at a constant angle, prove that the locus of
its centre is an hyperbola.

18. The area of the triangle formed by three tangents to a

parabola is equal to one half that of the triangle formed by joining
the points of contact.

19. If a parabola touch the sides of a triangle its directrix

passes through the orthocentre.

20. S and H
being the foci, P a point in the ellipse, if ffP
be bisected in L, and ALhe drawn from the vertex cutting SP
in Q, the locus of Q is an ellipse whose focus is S,
 254 Miscellaneous Problems,

21. If the diagonals of a quadrilateral circumscribing an

ellipse meet in the centre the quadrilateral is a parallelogram.

22. A
series of ellipses pass through the same point, and
have a common focus, and their major axes of the same length
prove that the locus of their centres is a circle. "What are the
limits of the eccentricities of the ellipses, and what does the
ellipse become at the higher limit?

23. If *S', ff be the foci of an hyperbola, LU any tangent

intercepted between the asymptotes SL IIL = CL LL.
. .

24. Tangents are drawn to an ellipse from a point on a

similar and similarly situated concentric ellipse shew that if
;

P, Q be the points of contact. A, A' the ends of the axis of the

first ellipse, the loci of the intersections of AP, A'Q, and of AQ,

A'P are two ellipses similar to the given ellipses.

25. Draw a
parabola which shall touch four given straight
lines. Under what
condition is it possible to describe a parabola
touching five given straight lines ?
26. A fixed hyperbola is touched by a concentric ellipse. If
the curvatures at the point of contact are equal the area of the
ellipse is constant.

27. A
circle passes through a fixed point, and cuts ofif equal
chords AB, CD from two given parallel straight lines ; prove
that the envelope of each of the chords AD^ BG is a central conic
having the fixed point for one focus.

28. Four points A^ B, (7, i>, are taken, no three of which lie
in a straight line, and joined in every possible way and with ;

another point as focus four conies are described touching respec-

tively the sides of the triangles ABO, BCD, CDA, ;
prove DAB
that the four conies have a common tangent.
29. PQ is any chord of a parabola, cutting the axis in Z,
H, R' are the two points in the parabola at which this chord
subtends a right angle if RR' be joined, meeting the axis in L\
:

LL' will be equal to the latus rectum.

30. If the internal and external bisectors of the angle be-
tw^een two tangents to a central conic meet the transverse axis
in G and T, shew that CG CT is constant.
.

31. Three chords of a circle pass through a point on the

circumference ; with this point as focus and the chords as axes
three parabolas are described whose parameters are inversely
proportional to the chords prove that the common tangents to
;

the parabolas, taken two and two, meet in a point,

 Miscellaneous Problems, 255
32. If PG, pgt the normals at the en da of a focal chord,
intersect in 0, the straight line through parallel to Pp bisect3
Gq.

33. With the orthocentre of a triangle as centre are described

two ellipses, one circumscribing the triangle and the other touch-
ing its sides prove that these ellipses are similar, and their homo-
;

logous axes at right angles.

34. An ellipse and a parabola, whose axes are parallel, have

the same curvature at a point P and cut one another in Q; if the
tangent at P meets the axis of the parabola in T, prove PQ is equal
to four times PT.

35. ABCD is a quadrilateral, the angles at A and (7 being

equal ; a conic is described about ABCD so as to touch the cir-
cumscribing circle of ABQ at the point 5; shew that BD is a
diameter of the conic.

36. The volume of a cone cut off by a plane bears a con-

stant ratio to the cube, the edge of which is equal to the minor

axis of the section.

37. A tangent to an ellipse at P meets the minor axis in t,

and iQ perpendicular to SP', prove that SQ is of constant

is

length, and that if PM

be the perpendicular on the minor axis,
QM will meet the major axis in a fixed point.

38. Describe an ellipse with a given focus touching three

given straight lines, no two of which are parallel and on the
same side of the focus.

Prove that the conic which touches the sides of a tri-

39.
angle,and has its centre at the centre of the nine-point circle,
has one focus at the orthocentre, and the other at the centre of
the circumscribing circle.

40. From Q the middle point of a chord PP' of an ellipse

whose focus is aS, QG is drawn perpendicular to PP' to meet the
major axis in G', prove that 2,SG SP+SP' :: SA AX. : :

An ellipse and parabola have the same focus and direc-

41.
trix tangents are drawn to the ellipse at the extremities of the
;

major axis shew that the diagonals of the quadrilateral formed

:
256 Miscellaneous Problems,

by the four points where these tangents cut the parabola inter-
sect in the common focus, and pass through the extremities of
the minor axis of the ellipse.

42. A straight rod moves in any manner in a plane ;

prove
that, at any instant, the directions of motion of all its particles
are tangents to a parabola.

43. If from a point T on the auxiliary circle, two tangents

be drawn to an ellipse touching it in P and Q, and when pro-
duced meeting the circle again in ^, 5; shew that the angles
PSp and QSc[ are together equal to the supplement of PTQ.

44. Tangents at the extremities of a pair of conjugate dia-

meters of an ellipse meet in T\ prove that ST^ S'T meet the
conjugate diameters in four points which lie on a circle.

45. From the point of intersection of an asymptote and a

directrix of an hyperbola a tangent is drawn to the curve, prove
that the line joining the point of contact with the focus is parallel
to the asymptote.

46. If a string longer than the circumference of an ellipse be

always drawn tight by a pencil, the straight portions being tan-
gents to the ellipse, the pencil will trace out a confocal ellipse.

47. D
is any point in a rectangular hyperbola from which

chords are drawn at right angles to each other to meet the curve.
If P, Q be the middle points of these chords, prove that the circle
circumscribing the triangle PQD
passes through the centre of the
hyperbola.

48. At any point of a conic the chord of curvature through

the centre is to the focal chord parallel to the tangent as the major
axis is to the diameter through the point.

49. a point T in the auxiliary circle tangents are

From
drawn to an touching it in
ellipse, P
and Q, and meeting the
auxiliary circle again in p and q; shew that the angle pCq is
equal to the sum of the angles PSQ and PS^Q.

50. The angle between the focal distance and tangent at

any point of an ellipse is half the angle subtended at the focus by
the diameter through the point.
 Miscellaneous Problems. 257
51. Tangents to an ellipse, foci /S and B, at the ends of a
focal chord PHP' meet the further directrix in Q, Q'. The para-
bola, whose focus is and directrix PP', touches PQ, P'Q\ in
aS^,

Q, Q'; it also touches the normals at P, P', and the minor axis,
and has for the tangent at its vertex the diameter parallel to
PP\
52. /S is a fixed point, and E a point moving on the arc of a

given circle; prove that the envelope of the straight line through
E at right angles to SE is a conic.

53. A
circle passing through a fixed point S cuts a fixed
P, and has its centre at
circle in the lines which bisect the
;

angle SOP all touch a conic of which /S is a focus.

54. RPQV meet the directrices of an ellipse in

If a chord
R and and the circumference in P and Q, then RP and QV
F,
subtend, each at the focus nearer to it, angles of which the sura
is equal to the angle between the tangents at P and Q,

55. The tangent to an ellipse at P

meets the directrix, cor-
responding to S, in Z: through Z a straight line ZQR is drawn
cutting the ellipse in Q, R; and the tangents at Q, 72 intersect
(on SP) in T, Shew that a conic can be described with focus S,
and directrix PZ, to pass through Q, R and T; and that TZ
will be the tangent at T,

56. A sphere is described about the vertex of a right cone

as centre ; the latera recta of all sections made by tangent planes
to the sphere are equal.

57. TP, TQ are tangents to an ellipse at P and Q; one

circletouches TP at P and meets TQ in Q and Q\ another
touches TQ at Q and meets TP in P and P'; prove that PQ' and
QP' are divided in the same ratio by the ellipse.

58. Two tangents are drawn to the same branch of a rectan-

gular hyperbola from an external point; prove that the angles
M'hich these tangents subtend at the centre are respectively equal
to the angles which they make with the chord of contact.

59. If the normal at a point P of an hyperbola meet the minor

axis in g, Pg will be to Sg in a constant ratio.

B. c. s. 17
 258 Miscellaneous Problems.

60. A parabola, focus <S, touches the three sides of a triangle

ABC^ bisecting the baseBCin D ;
prove that ASiBd, fourth pro-
portional to AD, ABy and A 0.

61. An ordinate NP of an ellipse is produced to meet the

, auxiliary circle in Q, and normals to the ellipse and circle at
F and Q meet in ; BK, B BL
are drawn perpendicular to the axes
prove that KPL is a straight line, and also that KP=BO and
LP=AC,
62. If the tangent at any point P cut the axes of a conic,
produced if necessary, in T and T\ and if G be the centre of the
curve, prove that the area of the triangle TOT' varies inversely
as the area of the triangle PCN^ where PN
is the ordinate of P.

63. The circle of curvature of an ellipse at passes through P

the focus S, SM
is drawn parallel to the tangent at to meet P
the diameter of the ellipse in M; shew that it divides this dia-
meter in the ratio of 3 : 1.

64. Prove the following construction for a pair of tangents

from any external point T to an ellipse of which the centre is C\
join CT, let TPCP'T a similar and similarly situated ellipse be
drawn, of which CT is a diameter, and P, P' its points of inter-
section with the given ellipse; TP, TP' will be tangents to the
given ellipse.

65. An ellipse and confocal hyperbola intersect in : prove P

that an asymptote of the hyperbola passes through the point on
the auxiliary circle of the ellipse corresponding to P.

66. Through a fixed point a pair of chords of a circle are

drawn prove that each side of the quadrilateral
at right angles :

formed by joining their extremities envelopes a conic of which

the fixed point and the centre of the circle are foci.

67. A conic section is circumscribed by a quadrilateral

ABCT>\ A is joined to the points of contact of CB, CD; and O
to the points of contact of AB, AD: prove that BD is a diago-
nal of the interior quadrilateral thus formed.

68. Any conic passing through the four points of intersec-

tion of two rectangular hyperbolas will be itself a rectangular
hyperbola.
 Miscellaneoits Problems. 259
69. A focal chord PSQ is drawn to a conic of which C is
the centre; the tangents and normals at P
and Q intersect in T
and JiT respectively; shew that ST, SF, SK, SO form an harmo-
nic pencil.

70. PCP' is any diameter of an ellipse. The tangents at any

two points J) and B intersect in F. PE, F'D intersect in Q.
Shew that FQ is parallel to the diameter conjugate io PCP',

71. If the common tangent of an ellipse and its circle of cur*

vature at P be bisected by their common chord, prove that

CD'' = AG,BG.

72. A parabola and hyperbola have the same focus and direc-
trix, is a line drawn through the focus S to meet the
and SPQ,
parabola in P, and the nearer branch of the hyperbola in Q; prove
that PQ, varies as the rectangle contained by SP and SQ,.

73. i? is the middle point of a chord PQ, of a rectangular

hyperbola whose centre is O. Through i2, RQ'y RP' are drawn
parallel to the tangents at P and Q respectively, meeting CQy
CP in Q, P', Prove that a circle can be described about (7, P\
R,Q.'.

74. The tangents

at two points Q, Q' of a parabola meet
the tangent at P in
R' respectively, and the diameter through
jR,

their point of intersection T meets it in K\ prove that PR = KR\

and that, if QM, Q'M\ TN be the ordinates of Q, Q!, T re-
spectively to the diameter through P, FN
is a mean proportional

between PM and FM',

75. Common tangents are drawn to two parabolas, which
have a common directrix,and intersect in P, Q: prove that the
chords joining the points of contact in each parabola are parallel
to PQ, and the part of each tangent between its points of con-
tact with the two curves is bisected by PQ produced.

76. An ellipse has its centre on a given hyperbola and

touches the asymptotes. The area of the ellipse being always a
maximum, prove that its chord of contact with the asymptotes
always touches a similar hyperbola.

77. A circle and parabola have the same vertex A and a

common axis. BA'C is the double ordinate of the parp.bola
which touches the circle at A\ the other extremity of the dia-
260 Miscellaneous Froblems,

meter which passes through A ; PP' any other ordinate of the

parabola parallel to this, meeting the axis in and the chord N
AB produced in R shew that the rectangle between RP and
:

RP' is proportional to the square on the tangent drawn from N

to the circle.

78. If two confocal conies

intersect, prove that the centre
of curvature of either curve at a point of intersection is the pole
of the tangent at that point with regard to the other curve.

79. Tangents are drawn at two points P, P' on an ellipse.

If any tangent be drawn meeting those at P, P' in jR, R\ shew
that the line bisecting the angle RSR' intersects RR' on a fixed
tangent to the ellipse. Find the point of contact of this tangent.

80. Having given a focus and two tangents to a conic,

shew that the chord of contact passes through a fixed point.

81. Having given a pair of conjugate diameters of an ellipse,

PCP', BGD\ let PP be the perpendicular from P on GD, in PP
take PE equal to GDy bisect GE in 0, and on GE as diameter
describe a circle ;
prove that PO will meet the circle in two
points Q and R such that (7Q, GR are the directions of the semi-
axes, and PQ, PR their lengths.

82. If from any point A a straight line AEK be drawn

parallel to an asymptote of an hyperbola, and meeting the polar
of ^ in ^ and the curve in E^ shew that AE—EK,

83. The foci of all ellipses which have a common maximum

circle of curvature at a fixed point lie on a circle.

84. A is drawn through the angular point A

straight line
of a triangle ABG
meet the opposite side in a; two points
to
0, 0' are taken on Aa^ and (70, GO' meet AB \Vi c and c', and
BOy BO' meet GA in 6, V ; shew that a conic passing through
abh'cc' will be touched by BG.

85. If TP^ TQ are two tangents to a parabola, and any

other tangent meets them in Q and R, the middle point of QE
deecribee a straight line.

86. Lines from the centre to the points of contact of two

parallel tangents to a rectangular hyperbola and concentric circle
make equal angles with either axis of the hyperbola.
 Miscellaneous Prohlems. 261
87. A line moves between two lines at right angles so as to
subtend a right angle and a half at a fixed point on the bisector
of the right angle ; prove that it touches a rectangular hyperbola.

88. Two cones, whose vertical angles are supplementary,

are placed with their vertices coincident and their axes at right
angles, and are cut by a plane perpendicular
to a common gene-
rating line prove that the directrices of the section of one cone
;

pass through the foci of the section of the other.

89. The normal at a point P

of an ellipse meets the curve
again in P', and through 0, the centre of curvature at P, the
chord QOQf is drawn at right angles to PP' prove that ;

QO . OQ; : PO . OP' :: 2 , PO : PP'.

90. From an external point T, tangents are drawn to an

ellipse, tlie point of contact being on the same side of the major
axis. If the focal distances of these points intersect in and M
iV, TM, TN are tangents to a confocal hyperbola, which passes
through M and N.
91. A point moves in a plane so that the sum or difference
of its distances from two fixed points, one in the given plane and
the other external to it, is constant. It will describe a conic,
the section of a right cone whose vertex is the given external
point.

92. QE, touching the ellipse at P, is one side of the

parallelogram formed by tangents at the ends of conjugate
diameters ; if the normal at P meet the axes in G and ^, prove
that QG and Eg are at right angles.

93. If PP' be a double ordinate of an if the

ellipse, and
normal at P meet CP' in 0, prove that the locus of a similar is
ellipse, and that its axis is to the axis of the given ellipse in the
ratio
A(P-BC^ : AC^ + BG\
94. If SY, HZ be focal perpendiculars on the tangent at
P of an ellipse, and SY\ HZ' perpendiculars on the tangents
from P to a confocal ellipse, prove that the rectangle contained
by YY'^ZZ'^ is equal to the difference of the squares on the semi-
axes.

95. from any point P of an hyperbola perpendiculars

If
PE^ PF
be let fall on the asymptotes, the centre of the circle
circumscribing the triangle PEF is on a fixed hypoirbola.
 262 Miscellaneous Problems,

96. A chord of a conic whose pole is T meets the directrices

in Rand R' if ; SR and SR meet in Q, prove that the minor
axis bisects TQ,

97. On a parabola, whose focns three points Q, P, Q'

is S,
are taken such that the angles PSQ, PSQ'
are equal the ;

tangent at Pmeets the tangents at Q, Q' in T, T' shew that :

TQ TQ' : :: SQ : SQ'.
98. If from any point P of a parabola perpendiculars PN^
PL are let fall on the axis and the tangent at the vertex, the
line LN always touches another parabola.
99. PQ is any diameter of a section of a cone whose vertex
is V; prove that VP-i- VQ is constant.

100. From a fixed point are let fall perpendiculars OY,

OZ on the tangent and normal at any point P of a curve and ;

the straight line joining the feet of these perpendiculars passes

through another fixed point C prove that the curve is one of
;

a system of confocal conies.

101. If the axes of two parabolas are in the same direction

their common chord bisects their common tangents.

102. If a chord PQ, of a parabola, whose pole is T, cut

the directrix in P, the tangents from F bisect the angle PFT.

103. A circle is described touching the asymptotes of an

hyperbola and having its centre at the focus. A tangent to
this circle cuts the directrix in P, and has its pole with regard
to the hyperbola at T. Prove that TF touches the circle.

104. Two conies have a common focus their correspond- :

ing directrices will intersect on their common chord, at a point

whose focal distance is at right angles to that of the intersection
of their common
tangents. Also the parts into which either
common tangent is divided by their common chord will subtend
equal angles at the common focus.
If the conies are parabolas, the inclination of their axes will
be the angle subtended by the common tangent at the common
focus.

105. Prove that a chord of a circle which subtends a right

angle at a fixed point always touches a conic, whose focus is at
that point.
 Miscellaneous Problems. 263
106. Find the position of the normal chord which cuts off
from a parabola the least segment.

107. A system of conies have a common focus S and a

common directrix corresponding to S. A fixed straight line
through S intersects the conies, and at the points of intersection
normals are drawn. Prove that these normals are all tangents
to a parabola.

108. From the point in which the tangent at any point P

of an hyperbola meets either asymptote perpendiculars Pilf, FN
are let fall upon the axes. Prove that MN
passes through P.

109. two parabolas whose latera recta have a constant

If
ratio, and whosefoci are two given points S, S' have a contact
of the second order at P, the locus of P is a circle.

110. In the construction of Art. 216, prove that CK' and

CK are respectively equal to the sum and difference of the semi-
axes.

111. If the diagonals of a quadrilateral circumscribing a

conic intersect in a focus, they are at right angles to one
another, and the third diagonal is the corresponding direc-
trix.

112. Given a tangent to an ellipse, its point of contact,

and the director circle, construct the ellipse.

113. If the tangent at a point P of an ellipse meet the

auxiliary circle in Q\ R\ and if Q, P be the corresponding points
on the ellipse, the tangents at Q and R pass through the point
P' on the auxiliary circle corresponding to P.

114. If two ellipses have one common focus S and equal

major axes, and if one ellipse revolves in its own plane about
Sy the chord of intersection envelopes a conic confocal with the
fixed ellipse.

115. If a rectangular hyperbola be intersected by a circle

of any radius whose centre is at a fixed point on one of the axes
of the curve, the lines joining the points of intersection are
either parallel to an axis, or tangents to a fixed parabola.

116. CP, CD are semi-conjugate diameters of an ellipse

if the circles of curvature at P and D
meet the curve again in
Q and P, QD is parallel to PP.
264 Miscellaneous Problems,

117. The tangent at the point P of an hyperbola meets

the directrix in Q another point B is taken on the directrix
;

such that QR subtends at the focus an angle equal to that

between the transverse axis and the asymptote prove that BP
;

envelopes a parabola.
118. The tangent at any point P of an elhpse meets the
axis minor inT and the focal distances SF, HP meet it in P, r.
Also <ST, HT, produced if necessary, meet the normal at P in
Qy q, respectively. Prove that Qr and qB are parallel to the
axis major.

119. Two points describe the circumference of an ellipse,

with velocities which are to one another in the ratio of the
squares on the diameters parallel to their respective directions
of motion. Prove that the locus of the point of intersection of
their directions of motion will be an ellipse, confocal with the
given one.
120. AA' be the axis major of an elliptic section of a
If
cone, vertex F, and if AG, A'G' perpendicular to AV, A'V meet
the axis of the cone in G and G\ and GO, G'O' be the perpen-
diculars let fall on AA\ prove that and 0' are the centres of
curvature at A and A\
121. By help of the geometry of the cone, or otherwise,
prove that the sum of the tangents from any point of an ellipse
to the circles of curvature at the vertices is constant.
122. If two tangents be drawn to a section of a cone, and
from their intersection two straight lines be drawn to the points
where the tangent plane to the cone through one of the tangents
touches the focal spheres, prove that the angle contained by
these lines is equal to the angle between the tangents.

123. A parabola touches the three lines (7P, CA^ AB in

P, Q, P, and through P a line parallel to the axis meets PQ in
JE; shew that ABEG is a parallelogram.

124. If a conic be inscribed in a quadrilateral, shew that the

locus of its centre is a straight line.
Shew also that this line passes through the middle points of
the diagonals.
125. If two circles be inscribed in a conic, and tangents be
drawn to the circles from any point in the conic, the sum or
difference of these tangents is constant, according as the point
does or does not lie between the two chords of contact.
 Miscellaneous Problems, 265
126. If CPi CD are conjugate semi-diameters and if through
C drawn a line parallel to either focal distance of P, the
is
perpendicular from D upon this line will be equal to half the
minor axis.

127. The area

of the parallelogram formed by the tangents
at the ends ofany pair of diameters of a central conic varies in-
versely as the area of the parallelogram formed by joining the
points of contact.

128. tangents to an hyperbola from T meet the direc-

Two
trix in F and jP'
;
prove that the circle, centre T, which touches
SF, SF'y meets the directrix in two points the radii to which
from the point T are parallel to the asymptotes.

129. If T is the pole of a chord of a conic, and F

the inter-
section of the chord Qq with the directrix, TSF is a right angle.
130. The polar of the middle point of a normal chord of a
parabola meets the focal vector to the point of concourse of the
chord with the directrix on the normal at the further end of the
chord.

131. Shew how to draw through a given point a plane

which will have the given point for (1) focus, (2) centre, (3)
vertex, of the section it makes of a given right circular cone:
noticing any limitations in the position of the point which may
be necessary.

132. If two sections of a right circular cone have a common

directrix, the latera recta are in the ratio of their eccentricities.

i»
 :

Catttbritige

PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. & SONS,

AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS,

 May 1893.

A CATALOGUE

EDUCATIONAL W0RK5
Published by

GEORGE BELL & SONS.

CONTENTS.
PAGE
Grammar School Classics 2
Cambridge Greek and Latin Texts 3
Cambridge Texts with Notes 3
Public School Series 4
Critical and Annotated Editions 4
Translations, Selections, &c 5
Lower Form Series 6
Classical Tables 6
Latin and Greek Class-books 6
Cambridge Mathematical Series 8
Cambridge School and College Text-books 9
Bookkeeping, Geometry, Euclid, and Trigonometry 10
Mechanics and Natural Philosophy 11
Foreign Classics 12
French Class-books 12
Gombert's French Drama 13
German Class-books 14
Modern German School Classics 14
Divinity 15
Technology and Agriculture 16
History 16
Psychology and Ethics 17
Dictionaries ... 17
English Class-books 18
Reading Books, &c 19

4 YORK STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON, W.C.

 George Bell and Sons'

GRAMMAR-SCHOOL CLASSICS.
A Series of Greek and Latin Authors, with English Notes,
Fcap. Svo,
Csesar : De Bello Gallico. By George Long, M.A. 4s.
Books I. -in. For Junior Classes. By G. Long, M.A. Is. 6d.

.
Books IV. and V. Is. 6^. Books VL and VIL, Is. 6a.

Books I., II., and III., with Vocabulary, Is. 6d. each.

Catullus, Tibullus, and Propertius. Selected Poems. With Life.

By Rev. A. H. Wratislaw. 2s. 6d.
Cicero: De Senectute, De Amicitia, and Select Epistles. By
George Long, M.A. 3s.
Cornelius Nepos. By Eev. J. F. Macmichael. 2s.

Homer Iliad.: Books I.-Xn. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D.

4s. 6d. Also in 2 parts, 2s. 6d. each.
Horace: With Life. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. 3s. Qd, In
2 parts, 2s. each. Odes, Book I., with Vocabulary, Is. 6d.
Juvenal : Sixteen Satires. By H. Prior, M.A. 3s 6d
Martial: Select Epigrams. With Life. By F. A.Paley,M.A.,LL.D.
4s. 6d.

Ovid : the Fasti. By F. A. Paley, M.A. LL.D. 3s. Qd. Books

, I*
and II., Is. 6d. Books III. and IV., Is. 6d. Books V. and VI., Is. Qd.
SaUust : Catilina and Jugurtha. With Life. By G. Long, M.A.
and J. G. Frazer. 3s. 6d., or separately, 2s. each.

Tacitus : Germania and Agricola. By Eev. P. Frost. 2s. Qd,

Virgil: Bucolics, Georgics, and /Eneid, Books I.-IV. Abridged

from Professor Conington's Edition. 4s. 6d.—^neid. Books V.-XII., 4s. 6d.
Also in 9 separate Volumes, as follows. Is. 6d. each :— Bucolics Georgics, —
I. and II.— Georgics, III. and IV.— ^neid, I. and II.— III. and IV.—V.
and VI.—VII. and VIII.— IX. and X.- and XI. and XII. -Slneid, Book
I., with Vocabulary, Is. 6d.

Xenophon : The Anabasis. With Life. By Eev. J. F. Macmichael.

3s. 6d. Also in 4 separate volumes, Is. 6d. each Book I. (with Life, :
—
Introduction, Itinerary, and Three Maps)— Books IL and III.—IV. and V.
—VI. and VII.
The Cyropaedia. By G. M. Gorham, M.A. 3s. Qd, Books
I. and II., Is. 6d.— Books V. and VI., Is. 6d.

Memorabilia. By Percival Frost, M.A. 3«.

A Grammar School Atlas of Classical Geography, containing

Ten selected Maps. Imperial 8vo. 3s.

Uniform with the Series,

The New Testament, in Greek. With EngUsh Notes, Ac. By
Rev. J. F. Macmichael. 4s. 6d. The Four Gospels and the Acts, separately.
Sewed, 6d. each.
 —

Educational Works.

CAMBRIDGE GREEK AND LATIN TEXTS.

Aeschylus. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 2s.
Csesar De Bello Gallico. By G. Long, M.A. Is. 6^.
:

Cicero: De Senectute et De Amicitia, et EpistolBB SelectaB.

By G. Long, M.A. Is. 6d.
Ciceronis Orationes. In Yerrem. By G. Long, M.A. 2s. 6d.
Euripides. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 3 vols. 2s. each.
Herodotus. By J. G. Blakesley, B.D. 2 vols. 6s,
Homeri Ihas. L-XII. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. Is. 6d.
Horatius. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. Is. 6tZ.
Juvenal et Persius. By A. J. Macleane, M.A. Is. 6cZ.
Lucretius. By H. A. J. Munro, M.A. 2s.
Sallusti Crispi Catilina et Jugurtha. By G. Long, M.A. Is. 6d.
Sophocles. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 2s. 6d.
Terenti Comcediae. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 2s.
Thuoydides. By J. G. Donaldson, D.D. 2 vols. 4s.
Vlrgilius. By J. Conington, M.A. 2s.
Xenophontis Expeditio Cyri. By J. F. Macmichael, B.A. Is. M.
Novum Testamenturi Graece. By F. H. Scrivener, M.A., D.C.L.
4s. 6d.An edition, witli wide margin for notes, half bound, 12s. Editio
Major, with additional Readings and References. 7s. Qd, {See page 15.)

CAMBRIDGE TEXTS WITH NOTES.

A Selection of the most usimlly read of the Qreek and Latin Authors, Annotated for
Schools. Edited by well-lcnown Classical Scholars, Fcap. 8vo, Is, 6d. each,
mth eaceptions.
* Dr. Paley* s vast learning and keen appreciation of the difficulties
of
iBCginners make his school editions as valuable as they are popular. In
many respects he sets a brilliant example to younger scholars.* Athenosutn,
* We hold in high value these handy Cambridge texts with Notes.*—

Saturday Review,

—
Aeschylus. Prometheus Vinctus. Septem contra Thebas. Aga- —
memnon. — Persae. —Bumenides. — Ohoephoroe. By F. A. Paley, M.A. LL. D. ,

—
Euripides. Alcestis. Medea. Hippolytus. — Hecuba. — Bacchae. —
—Ion. 2s.— Orestes.— Phoenissae.—Troades. — Hercules Furens. —Andro-
mache. —Iphigenia in Tauris. — Supplices. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D.
Homer. Iliad. Book I. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. Is.
Sophocles. Oedipus Tyrannus. — Oedipus
Coloneus. Antigone. —
—Electra.— Ajax. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D.
Xenophon. Anabasis. In 6 vols. By J. E. Melhuish, M.A.,
Assistant Classical Master at St. Paul's School.
Hellenics, Book I. By L. D. Dowdall, M.A., B.D. 2s.
Hellenics, Book II. By L. D. Dowdall, M.A., B.D. 2s.
Cicero. De Senectute, De Amicitia, and Epistolas Selectae. By
Q-. Long, M.A.

Ovid. Fasti. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. In 3 vols., 2 book»

in each. 28. each vol.
 George Bell and^Sons'

Ovid. Selections. Amores, Tristia, Heroides, Metamorphoses.

By A. J. Macleane, M.A.
Terence. Andria. —
Hauton Timorumenos. Phormio. Adelphoe. — —
By Professor Wagner, Ph.D.
Virgil. Professor Conington's edition, abridged in 12 vols.
• The handiest as well as the soundest of modem editions.'

Saturday Eevieic.

PUBLIC SCHOOL SERIES.

A Series of Classical Texts annotated by well-known Scholars. Cr.Si'o^
^

Aristophanes. The Peace. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 4s. 6tZ.

The Acharnians. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 4^. 6d.
The Frogs. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 4s. 6d.
Cicero. The Letters to Atticus. Bk. I. By A. Pretor, M.A. 3rd
Edition. 4s. 6d.

Demosthenes de Falsa Legatione. By E. Shilleto, M.A. 7th

Edition. Qs.
The Law of Leptmes. By B. W. Beatson, M.A. 3rd
Edition, 3s. 6d.
Livy. Book XXI. Edited, with Introduction, Notes, and Maps,
by the Rev. L. D. Dowdall, M.A., B.D. 3s. Qd^
Book XXIL Edited, &c., by Eev. L. D. Dowdali, M.A.,
B.D. 3&. 6d.
Plato. The Apology of Socrates and Crito. By W. Wagner, Ph.D,
12th Edition. Cheap Edition, limp cloth, 2s. 6d.
3s. 6d.
The Phaedo. 9th Edition. Bj W. Wagner, Ph.D. 5s. 6^/.
^
The Protagoras. 7th Edition. By W. Wayte, M.A. 4s. 6d,
. The Enthyphro. 3rd Edition. By G. H. Wells, M.A. 3s.
The Euthydemus. By G. H. Wells, M.A. 4s.
The Kepublic. Books I. & II. By G. H. Wells, M.A. 3rd
Edition. 5s. 6d.
Plautus. TheAulularia. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. oth Edition. 4s. GcZ.
The Trinummns. By W.Wagner, Ph.D. oth Edition. 4:S.Qd.
The Menaechmei. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 2nd Edit. 4s. 6^.
The Mostellaria. By Prof. E. A. Sonnenschein. 5s.
Sopliocles. The Trachiniae. By A. Pretor. M.A. 4s. 6d.
The Oedipus Tyrannus. By B. H. Kennedy, D.D. 5s.
Terence. By W. Wagner, Ph.D. 3rd Edition. 7s. 6d
Theocritus. By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 2nd Edition. 4s. 6d.
Thucydides. Book VL By T. W. Dougan, M.A., Fellow of St.
John's College, Cambridge. 3s. 6d.

CRITICAL AND ANNOTATED EDITIONS.

Aristophanis Gomoediae. By H. A. Holden, LL.D. Svo. 2 vols.
Notes, Illustrations, and Maps. 23s. 6d. Plays sold separately.
Caesar's Seventh Campaign in Gaul, B.C. 52. By Bev. W. C.
Compton, M.A., Head Master, Dorer College. 2nd Edition, with Map
and Illustrations. Crown Svo. 4s.
Oalpumius Slculus. By fl. C, Keene, M.A. Crown 8yo. 6»,
 JEdmational Works.

Catullus. A New Text, with Critical Notes and Introduction

by Dr. J. P. Postdate. Foolscap 8vo. 3s.
Corpus Poetarum Latinorum. Edited by Walker. 1 vol. 8vo. I8.9.
Livy. The first five Books. .By J. Prendeville. New Edition,
revised,and the notes in great part rewritten, by J. H. Freese, M.A.
Books IV., and V. Is. 6d. each.
I., II., III.,
Lucan. The
Pharsalia. By C. E. Haskins, M.A., and W. E.
Heitland, M.A. Demy 8vo. 14s.
Lucretius, With Commentary by H. A. J. Munro. 4th Edition.
Vols. I. and II. Introduction, Text, and Notes. 188. Vol. III. Trans-
lation. 6s.
Ovid. P. OvidiiNasonisHeroidesXIV. By A. Palmeii M. A. 8yo.6«.
P. Ovidii Nasonis Ars Amatoria et Amores. By the Rev.
H. Williams, M.A. 3s. 6d.
Metamorphoses. Book XIII. By Chas. Haines Keene, M.A.
2s. Qd.
Epistolarum ex Ponto Liber Primus. ByC.H.Keene,M.A. 85,
Propertius. Sex Aurelii Propertii Carmina. By F. A. Paley, M.A.,
LL.D. 8vo. Cloth, 5s.
Sex Propertii Elegiarum. Libri IV. Recensuit A. Palmer,
Collegii Sacrosanctaa et Individuae Trinitatis juxta Dublinum Socius.
Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6cl.
Sophocles. The Oedipus Tyrannus. By B. H. Kennedy, D.D.
Crown 8vo. 8s.
Thucydides. The History of the Peloponnesian War. By Biohard
Shilleto, M.A. Book I. Svo. 6«. 6d. Book IL 8vo. 5s. 6d.

TRANSLATIONS, SELECTIONS, &c.

Aeschylus. Translated into English Prose by F. A. Paley, M.A.,
LL.D. 2nd Edition. Svo. 7s. 6d.
Translated into English Verse by Anna Swanwiok. 4th
Edition. Post 8vo. 5s.
Calpurnius, The Eclogues of. Latin Text and English Verse.
Translation by E. J. L. Scott, M.A. 3s. Qd.
Horace. The Odes and Carmen Sseculare. In English Verse by
J. Conington, M.A. 11th edition. Fcap. 8vo. Ss. 6d.
The Satires and Epistles. In English Verse by J. Coning-
ton. M.A. 8tli edition. 38. 6d.
Plato. Gorgias. Translated by E.M. Cope, M.A. Svo. 2nd Ed. 7s.
Prudentius, Selections from. Text, with Verse Translation, In-
troduction, &c., by the Rev. F. St. J. Thackeray. Crown 8vo. 7s. Qd,
Sophocles. Oedipus Tyrannus. By Dr. Kennedy. Is.
The Dramas of. Bendered into English Verse by Sir
George Young, Bart., M.A. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
TheoorituB. In EngUsh Verse, by C. S. Calverley, M.A. 3rd
Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Translations into English and Latin. By C. S. Calverley, M.A.
Post 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Translations into English, Latin, and Greek. ByR. C. Jebb, Litt.D.,
H. Jackson, Litt.D., and W. E. Currey, M.A. Second Edition. 8s.
FoUa SilvulsB, sive EclogBB Poetarum Anglicorum in Latinum et
GrsBcum conversaB. By H. A. Holdeii, LL.D. 8to. Vol. II. 4s. 6d.
Sabrinae Corolla in Hortulis Regiae Scholae Salopiensis
Contexuernnt Tres Viri Floribus Legendis. Fourth Edition, thoroughly
RfiVlSPd n.nrl "R.An.rr'ii.Ti wp^I T.nror« •nnof. fi^jn lOo fi/7
 George Bell and Som'

LOWER FORM SERIES.

With Notes and Vocabularies,
Virgil's .ffineid. Book I. Abridged from Conington's Edition.
With Vocabnlary by W. F. R. ShiUeto. Is. 6d.
Caesar de Bello Gallico. Books I., II., and III. With Notes by
George Long, M.A., and Vocabulary by W. F. R. SMlleto. Is. 6d. each.
Horace. Book I. Macleane's Edition, with Vocabulary by
A. H. Dennis. Is. 6d.
Frost. Eologse LatinsB or Fir st Latin Beading-Book, with English
; ,

Notes and a Dictionary. By the late Rev. P. Frost, M.A. New Edition.
Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.
A Latin Verse-Book. An Introductory Work on Hexa-
meters and Pentameters. New Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. Key (for Tutors
only), 5s.
Analeota GrsBoa Minora, with Introductory Sentences,
English Notes, and a Dictionary. New Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 2s.
Wells. Tales for Latin Prose Composition, With Notes and
Vocabulary. By G. H. Wells, M.A. 2s.
Stedman. Latin Vocabularies for Repetition. By A. M. M.
Stedman, M.A. 2nd Edition, revised. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.
Easy Latin Passages for Unseen Translation. Fcap.
8vo. Is. 6d.
Greek Testament Selections. 2nd Edition, enlarged.
with Notes and Vocabulary. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d.

CLASSICAL TABLES.
Latin Accidence. By the Eev. P. Frost, M.A. Is,
Latin Versification. Is.
Notabilia Qusedam or the Principal Tenses of most of the
;

Irregular Greek Verbs and Elementary Greek, Latin, and French Con-
struction. New Edition. Is.
Richmond Rules for the Ovldian Distich, &c. By J. Tate, M. A. Is,
The Principles of Latin Syntax. Is,
Q-reek Verbs. A Catalogue
of "Verbs, Irregular and Defective. By
J. S. Baird, 8th Edition. 2s. 6d,
T.C.D.
G-reek Accents (Notes on). By A. Barry, D.D. New Edition. Is,
Homeric Dialect. Its Leading Forms and Peculiarities. By J. S.
Baird, T.C.D. New Edition, by W. G. Rutherford, LL.D. Is.
Greek Accidence. By the Rev. P. Frost, M.A. New Edition. Is.

LATIN AND GREEK CLASS-BOOKS.

See also Loiver Form Series.
Baddeley. AuzUia Latina. A
Series of Progressive Latin
Exercises. By M. J. B. Baddeley, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. Part I., Accidence.
5th Edition. 2«. Part II. 5th Edition. 28. Key to Part II., 2s. 6d.
Baker. Latin ^ose for London Students. By Arthur Baker,
M.A. Fcap. 8vo. 2s.
Church. Latin Prose Lessons. By Prof. Church, M.A. 9th
Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d.
Collins. Latin Exercises and Grammar Papers. By T. Collins,
M.A.. H. M. of the Latin School, Newport, Salop. 7th Edit. Fcap. Svo.
2s. 6d.
Unseen Papers in Latin Prose and Verse. With Ex-
amination Questions. 6th Edition. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d.
 —
Educational Works,

Collins. Unseen Papers in Greek Prose and Verse. With Ex.

aminatiou Questions. 3rd Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 35.
Basy Translations from Nepos, CsBsar, Cloero, Livy,
&c., for Retranslation into Latin. With Notes. 2s.
Compton. Rudiments of Attic Construction and Idiom. By
the Rev. W. C. Compton, M.A., Head Master Dover College,
of 38.

Clapin. A Latin Primer. By Eev. A. 0. Clapin, M.A. Is.

Frost. EclogflB LatinsB; or, First Latin Beading Book. With
Notes and Vocabnlary by the late Rev. P. Frost, M.A. New Edition,
Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.
Materials for Latin Prose Composition. By the late Rev.
P, Frost, M.A. New Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. Key (for Tutors only) 4s.
Materials for Greek Prose Composition. New Edition,
Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. Key (for Tutors only), 5s.
Harkness. A
Latin Grammar. By A. Harkness. Post 8vo, 6s.
Holden. Foliorum Silvula. Part I. Passages for Translation
into Latin Elegiac and Heroic Verse. By H. A. Holden, LL.D. 12th Edit,
PoBtSvo. 7s. 6d,
Foliorum Part II, Select Passages for Trans.
Silvula.
and Comic Iambic Verse. 3rd Ed, Post 8vo, Ss.
lation into Latin Lyric
Foliorum CenturisB. Select Passages for Translation
into Latin and Greek Prose. 10th Edition. Post 8vo. 8s.
Jebb, Jackson, and Currey. Extracts for Translation in Greek,
Latin, and English. By R. C. Jebb, Litt. D., LL.D., H. Jackson, Litt, D.,
and W. E. Currey, M.A. 4s. 6d.
Key. ALatin Grammar. By T, H. Key, M.A., F,E.S, 6th
Thousand. Post Svo. 8s.
A Short Latin Grammar for Schools. 16th Edition,
Post 8vo. 3s. 6d.
Mason. Analytical Latin Exercises. By C. P. Mason, B.A.
4th Edition. Part I., Is. 6d. Part II., 2s. 6d.
Nettleship. Passages for Translation into Latin Prose.- By
Pro:. H. Nettleship, M.A. 3s. Key (for Tutors only), 4s. 6d.
*The introduction ought to be studied by every teacher.' Gfuarddan,
Paley. Greek Particles and their Combinations according to
Attc Usage. A Short Treatise- By F. A. Paley, M.A., LL.D. 2s. 6d.
Penrose. Latin Elegiac Verse, Easy Exercises in. By the Rev.
J. Penrose. New Edition. 2s. (Key, 3s. 6d.)
Preston. Greek Verse Composition. By G. Preston, M.A.
5th Edition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d.
Pruen. Latin Examination Papers. Comprising Lower, Middle,
and Upper School Papers, and a number of Woolwich and Sandhurst
Standards. By G. G. Pruen, M.A. Crown Svo. 2s. Qd.
Seager. Faciliora. An Elementary Latin Book on a new
principle. By the Rev. J. L. Seager, M.A. 28. 6d.
Stedman. First Latin Lessons. By A. M. M. Stedman, M.A,
Second Edition, enlarged. Crown Svo. 2s.
First Latin Reader. With Notes adapted to the Shorter
Latin Primer and Vocabulary. Crown Svo. Is. 6d.
Easy Latin Exercises on the Syntax of the Shorter and
Revised Latin Primers.With Vocabulary. 3rd Edition. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d.
Notanda Quaedam. Miscellaneous Latin Exercises on
Common Rules and Idioms. Fcap. Svo. ls.6d. With vocabulary 2s,
First Greek Lessons. {In preparation,
Easy Greek Passages for Unseen Translation. Fcap.
Svo. Is. 6(1.
 George Bell and Sons'

Stedman. Easy Greek Exercises on Elementary Syntax.

[Injjreparaiion,
Greek Vocabularies for Repetition. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.
Thackeray. Anthologia Grseca. A
Selection of Greek Poetry,
with Noteg. By F. St. John Thackeray. 5th Edition. 16mo. is. 6d.
Anthologia Latina. A
Selection of Latin Poetry, from
Na3vins to Boethius, with Notes. By Rev. F. St. J. Thackeray. 5th Edit.
'

16mo. 43. 6d.

Donaldson. The Theatre of the Greeks. By J. W. Donaldson,

D.D. 10th Edition. Post 8vo. 5s.
Keightley. The Mythology of Greece and Italy. By Thomas
Keightley. 4th Edition. Revised by L. Schmitz, Ph.D., LL.D. 5s.
Mayor. A Guide to the Choice of Classical Books. By J. B.
Mayor, M.A. 3rd Edition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d.
Teuffel. A History of Koman Literature. By Prof. W. S.
Teuffel. 6th Edition, revised by Prof. L. Schwabe, and translated by
Prof. G. 0. W. Warr, of King's College. 2 vols, medium 8vo. 15s. each.

CAMBRIDGE MATHEMATICAL SERIES.

Arithmetic for Schools. By C. Pendlebury, M.A. 6th Edition,
with or without answers, 4s. 6d. Or in two parts, 2s. 6d. each. Part 2 con-
tains the Commercial Arithmetic. Key to Part 2, for tutors only, 7s. 63. net.
Examples (nearly 8000), without answers, in a separate vol. 3s.
In use at St. Paul's, Winchester, Wellington, Marlborough, Charterhouse,
Merchant Taylors', Christ's Hospital, Sherborne, Shrewsbury, &c. &c.
Algebra. Choice and Chance. By W. A. Whitworth, M.A. 4th
Edition. 6s.

Enclid. Newly translated from the Greek Text, with Supple-

mentary Propositions, Chapters on Modern Geometry, and numerous
Exercises. By Horace Deighton. M.A., Head Master of Harrison College,
Barbados. New Eflition, Revised, with Symbols and Abbreviations.
Crown 8vo. 4s. 6cl. Key, for tutors only, 5s. net.
Book I Is. Books I. to III.
I
... 2s. 6d.
Books I. and II. ... Is. 6d. Books III. and IV.
| Is. 6d,

Euclid. Exercises on Euclid and in Modern Geometry. By

J. McDowell, M.A. 4th Edition. 6s.
Elementary Trigonometry. By J. M. Dyer, M.A., and Kev.
R. H. Whitcombe, M.A., Assistant Masters, Eton College. 2nd Edit. 4s. 6d.
Trigonometry. Plane. By Eev. T.Vyvyan,M.A. 3rd Edit. 35. 6d.
Geometrical Conic Sections. By H. G. Willis, M.A. 5s.
Conies. The Elementary Geometry of. 7th Edition, revised and
enlarged. By C. Taylor, D.D. 4s. 6d.
Solid Geometry. By W. S. Aldis, M.A. 4th Edit, revised, 6.?.
Geometrical Optics. By W. S. Aldis, M.A. 3rd Edition. 4s.
Rigid Dynamics. By W. S. Aldis, M.A. 4s.
Klementary Dynamics. By W.Garnett,M.A.,D.C.L. 5th Ed. 6s.
Dynamics. A Treatise on. By W. H. Besant, ScD., F.B.S. 2nd
Edition. 7s. 6d.
Heat. An Elementary Treatise. By W. Garnett.M.A., D.C.L. 5th
Edition, revised and enlarged. 4s. 6d.

Elementary Physics. Examples in. By W. Gallatly, M.A. 4s.

 )

Educational Works, 9

Elementary Hydrostatics. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D., F.E.S. 15th

Edition, rewritten. Crown 8vo. 4s. Qd. Key Ss. net.
Hydromechanics. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D., F.K.S. 5th Edition.
Part I. Hydrostatics. 5s.
Mathematical Examples. By J. M. Dyer, M.A., Eton College,
and R. Prowde Smith, M.A., Clieltenham CoUepre. Qs.
Mechanics. Problems in Elementary. By W. Walton, M.A. 6s.
ITotes on Roulettes and Glissettes. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D.,
F.R.S. 2nd Edition, enlarged. Crown 8vo. 5s.

CAMBRIDGE SCHOOL AND COLLEGE

TEXT-BOOKS.
A Elementary Treatises for the use of Students,
Series of
Arithmetic. By Rev. 0. Elsee, M. A. Fcap. 8vo. 14th Edit. 3».6d.
By A. Wrigley, M.A. Ss. 6d.
A Progressive Com-se of Examples. With Answers. By
J. Watson, M.A. 7tli Edition, revised. By W. P. Goudie, B. A. 2s. 6d.
Algebra. By the Rev. C. Elsee, M.A. 8th Edit. 4.?.
Progressive Course oi Examples. By Rev. W. F.
M*Michael,M.A.,and R. Prowde Smith, M.A. Ith Edition. 3s. 6d. With
Answers. 4«.6<i.
Plane Astronomy, An Introduction to. By P. T. Main, M.A.
6th Edition, revised. 4s.
<3onic Sections treated Geometrically. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D.
8th Edition. 4s. 6d, Solution to the Examples. 4s.
Enunciations and Figures Separately. Is.
Statics, Elementary. By Rev. H. Goodwin, D.D. 2nd Edit. 3s.
Mensuration, An Elementary Treatise on. By B.T.Moore, M.A. 3s.6d.
Newton's Principia, The First Three Sections of, with an Appen-
dix ; and the Ninth and Eleventh Sections. By J. H. Evans, M.A. 5th
Edition, by P. T. Main, M.A. 4s.
Analytical Geometry for Schools. By T. G, Vyvyan. oth Edit. 4s. 6ti.
Q-reek Testament, Companion to the. By C. Barrett, M.A A
5th Edition, revised. Fcap. 8vo. 5s.
Book of Common Prayer, An Historical and Explanatory Treatise
on the. By W. G. Humphry, B.D. 6th Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d.
Jilusic, Text-book of. By Professor H. C. Banister. 15th Edition,
revised. 5s.
- Concise History of. By Rev. H. G. Bonavia Hunt,
Mus. Doc. Dublin. 12th Edition, revised. 3s. 6d.

ARITHMETIC, {See also the tico foregoing Series.

Elementary Arithmetic. By Charles Pendlebury, M.A., Senior

Mathematical Master, St. Paul's School; and W. S. Beard, F.R.G.S.,
Assistant Master, Christ's Hospital. With 2500 Examples, Written and
Oral. Crown 8vo. Is. 6d. With or without Answers.
Jirithmetic, Examination Papers in. Consisting of 140 papers,
each containinfi;- 7 questions. 357 more difficult problems follow. A col-
lection of recent Public Examination Papers are appended. By C.
Pendlebury, M.A. 2s. 6d. Key, for Masters only, 5s.
Crraduated Exercises in Addition (Simple and Compound). By
W. S. Beard, C. S. Department Rochester Mathematical School. Is. For
Candidates for Commercial Certificates and Civil Service Exams.
10 George Bell and Sons^

BOOK-KEEPING.
Book-keeping Papers,
set at various Public Examination&.
Collected and Written by J. T. Medhurst, Lecturer on Book-keeping m
the City of London College. 2nd Edition. 3s.
A Text-Book of the Principles and Practice of Book-keeping.
By Professor A. W. Thomson, B.Sc, Royal Agricultural College, Cirences-
ter. Crown 8\ro. 5s.
Double Entry Elucidated. By B. W. Foster. 14th edition.
Fcap. 4to. 3s. Qd.
A New Manual of Book-keeping, combining the Theory and
Practice, with Specimens of a set of Books. By Phillip Crellin, Account-
ant. Crown 8to. 3s. Qd.
Book-keeping for Teachers and Pupils. By Phillip Crellin*
Crown 8vo. Is. 6d. Key, 2s. net.

GEOMETRY AND EUCLID.

Euclid. Books I.-VI. and part A New Translation. By
of XI.
H. Deighton. (See p. 8.)
The Definitions of, with Explanations and Exercises^
and an Appendix of Exercises on the First Book. By R. Webb, M.A,
Crown 8vo. Is. Qd.
BookI. With Notes and Exercises for the use of Pre-
paratory Schools, &c. By Braithwaite Amett, M.A. 8vo. 4s. Qd.
The First Two Books explained to Beginners. By C. P.
Mason, B.A. 2nd Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. Qd.
The Enunciations and Figures to Euclid's Elements. By BeVr
J. Brasse, D.D. New Edition. Without the Figures, Gd..
Fcap. 8vo.
Is.
Exercises on Euclid. By J. McDowell, M.A. (See p. 8.)
Mensuration. By B. T. Moore, M.A. 3s. 6cZ. (See p. 9.)
Geometrical Conic Sections. By H. G. WilHs, M.A. (See p. 8.)
Geometrical Conic Sections. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D. (See p. 9.)
Elementary Geometry of Conies. By 0. Taylor, D.D. (See p. 8.>
An Introduction to Ancient and Modem
Geometry of Conies.
By C. Taylor, D.D., Master of St. John's Coll., Camb. 8vo. 15s.
An Introduction to Analytical Plane Geometry. By W. P»
Tumbull, M.A. 8vo. 12s.
Problems on the Principles of Plane Co-ordinate Geometry.
By W. Walton, M.A. 8vo. 16s.
Trilinear Co-ordinates, and Modem
Analytical Geometry of
Two Dimensions. By W. A. Whitworth, M.A. 8vo. 16s.
An Elementary Treatise on Solid Geometry. By W. S. Aldis,
M.A. 4th Edition revised. Cr. 8vo. 6s.
Elliptic Functions, Elementary Treatise on. By A. Cayley, D.Sc.
DemySvo. [^eu* Edition Preparing..

TRIGONOMETRY,
Trigonometry. By Rev. T. G. Vyvyan. 3s. 6d. (See p. 8.)
Trigonometry, Elementary. By J. M. Dyer, M.A., and Rev* R. H»
Whitcombe, M.A., Asst. Masters, Eton College. 4s. 6d. (See p. 8.)
Trigonometry, Examination Papers in. By G. H. Ward, M.A.,
Assistant Master at St. Paul's School. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.
 Educational Works, \t\

MECHANICS & NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.

Statics, Elementary. By H. Goodwin, D.D. Fcap. 8vo. 2n<i>
Edition. 3s.
Dynamics, A Treatise on Elementary. By W. Gamett, M.A.,,
D.C.L. 5tli Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Dynamics, Eigid. By W. S. Aldis, M.A. 4s.
Dynamics, A Treatise on. By W.H. Besant, So.D.,F.R.S. 7«.6d.
Elementary Mechanics, Problems in. By W. Walton, M.A. New
Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Theoretical Mechanics, Problems in. By W. Walton, M.A. 3rd*
Edition.Demy 8vo. 16s.
Structural Mechanics. By E. M. Parkinson, Assoc. M.I.O.E..
Crown Svo. 4s. 6d.
Elementary Mechanics. Stages I. and II. By J. C. Horobin, B.A^
Is. 6d. each. [Stage III. preparing^
Theoretical Mechanics. Division I. (for Science and Art Ex--
By J. C. Horobin, B.A. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d.
aminations).
Hydrostatics. By W.H.Besant,Sc.D. Cr.Svo. 15th Edit. 4«. 6^..
Hydromechanics, A Treatise on. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D., F.R.S.
Svo. 5th Edition, revised. Part I. Hydrostatics. 58.
Hydrodynamics, A Treatise on. Vol. I., 10s. 6d. ; Vol. II., 12s. 6d.
A. B. Baseet, M.A., F.R.S.
Hydrodynamics and Sound, An Elementary Treatise on. By-
A. B. Basset, M.A., F.R.S. Demy Svo. 7s. 6d.
Physical Optics, A Treatise on. By A. B. Basset, M.A., F.E.S.-
Demy Svo. 16s.

Optics, Geometrical. By W. S. Aldis, M.A. Crown Svo. 3r^

Edition. 4s.
Double Refraction, A Chapter on Fresnel's Theory of. By W. S.
Aldis, M.A. Svo. 2s.

Roulettes and Glissettes. By W. H. Besant, Sc.D., F.E.S. 2ncB

Edition, 5s.
Heat, An Elementary Treatise on. By W. Garnett, M.A. D.C.L.. ,

Crown Svo. 5th Edition. 4s. 6d.

Elementary Physics, Examples and Examination Papers in. By
W. Gallatly, M.A. 4s.
Newton's Principia, The First Three Sections of, with an Appen-
dix and the Ninth and Eleventh Sections. By J. H. Evans, M.A. 6th
;

Edition. Edited by P. T. Main, M.A. 48.

Astronomy, An Introduction to Plane. By P. T. Main, M.A.

Fcap. Svo. cloth. 6th Edition. 4s.

Mathematical Examples. Pure and Mixed. By J. M. Dyer, M.A. ^.

and R. Prowde Smith, M.A. 6s.

Pure Mathematics and Natural Philosophy, A Compendium oi:

Facts and Fommlae in. By G. R. Smalley. 2nd Edition, revised by
J. McDowell, M.A. Fcap. Svo. 2s.
Elementary Course of Mathematics. By H. Goodwin, D.D.
6th Edition. Svo. 16s.
A Collection of Examples and Problems in Arithmetic^
Algebra, Geometry, Log-arithms, Trigonometry, Conic Sections, Mechanics^,.
&c., with Answers. By Rev. A. Wrigley. 20th Thousand. 8s. 6A.
Key. 10s. 6d.
3.2 George Bell and Sons'

FOREIGN CLASSICS.
.A Series for use in Schools, with English Notes, grammatical and
explanatory, and renderings of diffi.cult idiomatic expressions,
Fcap. 8vo,
Schillers's Wallenstein. By Dr. A. Bnchheim. 6th Edit. 5s.
Or the Lager and Piccolomini, 2s. 6d. Wallenstein' s Tod, 2s. 6d.
Maid By Dr. W. Wagner. 3rd Edit. Is, Bd,
of Orleans.
Maria Stnart. By V. Kastner. 3rd Edition. Is, Qd,
•Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea. By E. Bell, M.A., and
E. Wolfel. New Edition, Revised. Is. dd.
'German Ballads, from Uhland, Goethe, and Schiller. By C. L.
Bielefeld. 5th Edition. Is. 6d,

Charles XII., par Voltaire. By L. Direy. 7th Edition. Is. Qd,

Aventures de Telemaque, par F6nelon. By 0. J. Delille. 4th
Edition. 2s. 6d.

Select Fables of La Fontaine. By P. B. A.Gaso. 19th Edit. Is, Qd,

X.B. Saintine. By Dr.Dubuc. 16th Thousand. Is, 6d,
Picciola, by
Lamartine's Le Tailleur de Pierres de Saint-Point. By
J. Boielle, 6th Thousand. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.

Italian Primer. By Kev. A. C. Clapin, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. Is.

FRENCH CLASS-BOOKS.
French Grammar for Public Schools. By Rev. A. C. Clapin, M.A.
b'cap. 8vo. 13th Edition. 2s. 6d. Key to Exercises 3s. 6d.
French Primer. By Rev. A. C. Clapin, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. 9th Ed. Is.
Primer of French Philology. By Rev. A. C. Clapin. Fcap. 8vo.
6th Edit. Is.

Le Nouveau Tresor; or, French Student's Companion. By

Si. E. S. 19th Edition. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.

French Papers for the Prelim. Army Exams. Collected by

J. F. Davis, D.Lit. 2s. 6d.

French Examination Papers in Miscellaneous Grammar and

Idioms. Compiled by A. M. M. Stedman, M.A. 4th Edition. Crown
Svo. 2s. 6d. Key. 6s. (For Teachers or Private Students only.)
Manual of French Prosody. By Arthur Gosset, M.A. Crown
8vo. 3s.
Lexicon of Conversational French. By A. HoUoway. 3rd
Edition. Crown Svo. 3s. 6d.

PROF. A. BARRERE'S FRENCH COURSE.

Junior Graduated French Course. Crown Svo. Is. 6d,
Elements of French Grammar and First Steps in Idiom.
Crown Svo. 2s.
Precis of Comparative French Grammar. 2nd Edition. Crown
8vo. 3s. 6d.
:ilecits Militaires. From 1792 to 1870. With English Notes, for
OauJIidate? for the Army Exams. Crown Svo. 3s.
 Educational Works, 13

F. E. A. GASC'S FEENCH COURSE. y^

First French Book. Crown 8vo. llCtli Thousand, l.s*.

Second French Book. 52nd Thousand. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6rf.

Key to First and Second French Books. 5th Edit. Fcp. 8vo. 3s. 6^.
French Fables for Beginners, in Prose, with Index. 16th Thousand.
12mo. 1.8. 6d.

Select Fables of La Fontaine. 18th Thousand. Fcap.8vo. Is.GcZ.

Histoires Amusantes et Instructives. With Notes. 17th Thou-

sand. Fcap. 8vo. 2.S.

Practical Guide to Modern French Conversation. 18th Thou-

sand. Fcap. 8vo. Is. Qd
French Poetry for the Young. With Notes. 5th Ed. Fcp. 8vo. B".
Materials for French Prose Composition; or, Selections from
the best English Prose Writers. 2 1st Thous. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. Key, 6s.

Prosateurs Contemporains. With Notes. 11th Edition, re-

vised. 12mo. 3s. 6d.

Le Petit Compagnon ; a French Talk-Book for Little Children.

14tli Edition. 16mo. Is. QA.
An Improved Modern Pocket Dictionary of the French and
English Languages. 47bh Thousand, lemo. 2s. 6cl.
Modern French-Enghsh and English-French Dictionary. 5th
Edition, revised. 10s. 6d. In use at Harrow, Rugby, Westminster,
Shrewsbury, Radley, &c.
The ABCBy
Wants.
Tourist's
F. E. A. Gasc.
French Interpreter of
Is.
all Immediate

MODERN FRENCH AUTHORS.

Edited, with Introductions and Notes, by James Boielle, Senior
French Master at Dulwich College.
Daudet's La Belle Nivernaise.
2s. 6d. For Beginners,
Claretie. by Jules Claretie. 2s.. 6d. For Beginners.
Pierrille,
Hugo's Bug Jargal. 3s. For Advanced Students,
Balzac's Ursula Mirouet. 3s. For Advanced Students,

GOMBERT'S FRENCH DRAMA.

Being a Selection of the best Tragedies and Comedies of Moliere.
Racine, Comeille, and Voltaire. With Arj^ments and Notes by A.
Gombert. New Edition, revised by F. K. A. Gkiso. Fcap. 8vo. la. each ;
^^^^*^' Contents.
MoLi&RE — Le Misanthrope. L'Avare. Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. Le
:

Tartnife. Le Malade Iraaginaire. Lea Femmes Savantes. Les Fourberies

do Scapin. Les Pr^ieuses Ridicules. L'Ecole dea Femmes. L'Ecole des
Maris. Le M^decin malgr^ Lui.
Racine :—Ph6dre. Esther. Athalie. Iphig^nie. Les Plaideurs. La
TWbaide; on, Les Frdres Ennemis. Andromaque. Britannicus.
P. GOBNEiLLE — Le Oid. Horace. Cinna. Polyeucte.
:

VoLTAiEE :—Zaire.
14 George Bell and Sons^

GERMAN CLASS-BOOKS.
Materials for German Prose Composition. By Dr. Bnchheim.
14th Edition. Fcap. 4<?.6d. Key, Parts and II., 3s. Parts III. and IV.,
I.

Goethe's Faust. Part I. Text, Hay ward's Prose Translation, and

Notes. Edited by Dr. Bnchlieim. 5s.

German. The Candidate's Vade Mecum. Five Hundred Easy

Sentences and Idioms. By an Army Tutor. Cloth, Is. For Army Exams,
Wortfolge, or Rules and Exercises on the Order of Words in
Oerman Sentences. By Dr. F. Stock. Is. 6d.

A German Grammar for Public Schools. By the Rev. A. C.

Clapinand F. HoU MOller. 5th Edition. Fcap. 2s. 6d.

A German Primer, with Exercises. By Rev. A. C. Clapin.

2nd Edition. Is.

Kotzebue's Der Gefangene. With Notes by Dr. W.Stromberg. Is.

German Examination Papers in Grammar and Idiom. By
R. J. Morich. 2nd Edition. 2s. 6d, Key for Tutors only, 58.

By Frz. Lange, Ph.D., Professor R.M. A., Woolwich, Examiner

in German to the Coll. of Preceptors, and also at the
Victoria University, Manchester.
A Concise German Grammar. In Three Parts. Part I., Ele-
mentary, 2s. Part II., Intermediate, 2s. Part III., Advanced, 3s. 6(i.

German Examination Course. Elementary, 2s, Intermediate, 2s,

Advanced, Is. 6d.
German Reader. Elementary, Is. 6d, Advanced, 3s.

MODERN GERMAN SCHOOL CLASSICS.

Small Crown 8vo.
Hey's Fabela Fiir Kinder. Edited, with Vocabulary, by Prof.
F. Lange, Ph.D. Pnnted in Roman characters. Is. Qd,
The same with Phonetic Transcription of Text, &c. 2s.
Benedix's Dr. Wespe. Edited by F. Lange, Ph.D. 2s. 6d,
HoflOaian's Meister Martin, der Kiifner. By Prof. F. Lange, Ph.D.
ls.6cl.
Heyse's Hans Lange. By A. A. Macdonell, M.A., Ph.D. 2s.
Auerbach's Auf Wache, and Roquette's Der Gefrorene Kuss.
By A. A. MacdoneU, M.A. 2s.
Moser's Der Bibliothekar. By Prof. F. Lange, Ph.D. 3rd Edi-
tion. 2s.

Ebers' Eine Frage. By F. Storr, B.A. 2s.

Freytag's Die Joumalisten. By Prof. F. Lange, Ph.D. 2nd Edi-
tion, revised. 2s. 6d.
Gutzkow's Zopf und Schwert. By Prof. F. Lange, Ph.D. 2s.
German Epic Tales. Edited by Karl Neuhaus, Ph.D. 2s. 6d.
Scheffel's Ekkehard. Edited by Dr. H. Hager. 3s.
 Educational Works. 15

DIVINITY.
By the late Eev. F. H. Scriyener, A.M., LL.D., D.G.L.

Novum Testamentum G-rsBoe. Editio major. Being an enlarged

Edition, containing- the Readings of Bishop Westcott and Dr. Hort, and
those adopted by the Revisers, &c. 7s. 6d. (For other Editions see 'page 3.)
A Plain Introduction to the Criticism of the New Testament.
With Forty Facsimiles from Ancient Manuscripts. 4th Edition, revised
by Rev. E. Miller, M.A. 8vo. lln tlv press.
Codex Bezffi Cantabrlgiensis. 4to. 10«. 6d.

The New Testament for English Readers. By the late H. Alford,

D.D. Vol. I. Part I. 3rd Edit. 12s. Vol. I. Part II. 2nd Edit. 10s. 6d.
Vol. II. Part I. 2nd Edit. 16s. Vol. II. Part II. 2nd Edit. 16s.

The Greek Testament. By the late H. Alford, D.D. Vol. I. 7th

Edit. 11. 8s. Vol. II. Slh Edit. 11. 48. Vol. III. 10th Edit. 18s. Vol. IV,
Part I. 5th Edit. 18s. Vol. IV. Part II. 10th Edit. 14s. Vol. IV. 11. 128.

Companion to the Greek Testament. By A. C. Barrett, M.A.

5th Edition, revised. Fcap. 8vo. 5s.

Guide to the Textual Criticism of the New Testament, By

Rev. E. Miller, M.A. Crown 8vo. 4s.

The Book of Psalms. A New Translation, with Introductions, &c.

By the Rt. Rev. J. J. Stewart Perowne, D.D., Bishop of Worcester. 8vo.
Vol. I. 8th Edition, 18s. Vol. II. 8th Edit. 168.
Abridged for Schools. 7th Edition. Crown 8yo. 10*. 6d.

History of the Articles of Religion. By C. H. Hardwick. 8rd

Edition. Post 8vo. 5s.

History of the Creeds. By Eev. Professor Lumby, D.D. 3rd

Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.

Pearson on the Creed. Carefully printed from an early edition.

With Analysis and Index by B. Walford, M.A. Post 8vo. 5s.
Liturgies and OfBces of the Church, for the Use of English
Readers, in Illustration of the Book of Common Prayer. By the Rev.
Edward Burbidge, M.A. Crown 8vo. 9s.
An Historical and Explanatory Treatise on the Book of
Common Prayer. By Rev. W. Q. Humphry, B.D. 6th Edition, enlarged.
Small Post 8vo. 2s. 6d. j Cheap Edition, Is.
A Commentary on the Gospels, Epistles, and Acts of the
Apostles. By Rev. W. Denton, A.M. New Edition. 7 vols. 8vo. 9s. each.

Notes on the Catechism. By Bt. Bev. Bishop Barry. 9th Edit.

Fcap. 2s.

The Wlnton Church Catechist. Questions and Answers on the

Teaching of the Church Catechism. By the late Rev. J. S. B. Monsell,
LL.D. 4th Edition. Cloth, 3s. ; or in Four Parts, sewed.
The Church Teacher's Manual of Christian InstructioD. By
Rev. M. F. Sadler. 43rd Thousand. 28. 6d.
 16 George Bell and Sons^

TECHNOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS.
Edited by Sir H. Trueman Wood, Secretary of the Society of Arts.
Dyeing and Tissue Printing. By W. Crookes, F.B.S. 5s.
Glass Manufacture. By Henry Chance, M.A.; H. J. Powell, B.A.;
and H. G. Harris. 3s. 6cl.

Cotton Spinning. By Eichard Marsden, of Manchester. 4th

Edition, revised. 6s. 6d.

Chemistry of Coal- Tar Colours. By Prof. Benedikt, and Dr.

Knecht of Bradford Technical College. 2nd Edition, enlarged. Qs. Qd.

Woollen and Worsted Cloth Manufacture. By Professor

Roberts Beaumont, The Yorkshire College, Leeds. 2nd Edition. 7s. 6d.
Silk Dyeing. By G. H. Hurst, F.C.S. With numerous coloured
specimens. 7s. 6d.

Cotton Weaving. By E. Marsden. [Preparing,

Bookbinding. By J. W. Zaehnsdorf, with eight plates and many
illustrations. 5s.

Printing. By 0. T. Jacobi, Manager of the Chiswick Press. 5s.

Plumbing. By S. Stevens Hellyer. 5s.

Soap Manufacture. By W. Lawrence Gadd, F.I.C, F.C.S. 5s.

BELUS AGRICULTURAL SERIES.

The Farm and the Dairy. By Prof. Sheldon. 2s. 6d.
Soils and their Properties. By Dr. Fream. 2s. 6d
The Diseases of Crops. By Dr. Griffiths. 2s. 6d.
Manures and their Uses. By Dr. Griffiths. 2s. M.
Tillage and Implements. By Prof. W. J. Maiden. 2s. 6d.
Fruit Culture. By J. Cheal, F.E.H.S. 2s. 6d.
Others in preparation.

HISTORY.
Modern Einrope. By Dr. T. H. Dyer. 2nd Edition, revised and
continued. 6 vols. Demy 8vo. 21. 12s. QA.
The Decline of the Roman Republic. By G. Long. 6 vols.
8vo. 5s. each.
Select Historical Documents of the Middle Ages. Collected
and Translated by Ernest F. Henderson, Ph.D. Small post 8vo. 5s.
The Intermediate History of England. For Army and Civil
Service Candidates. By H. F. Wright, M.A., LL.M. Crown 8vo. Qs.
historical Maps of England. By C. H. Pearson. Folio. 3rd
Edition revised. 31s. 6d.
England in the Fifteenth Century. By the late Kev. W.
Denton, M.A. Demy Svo. 12s.
Feudalism : Its Else, Progress, and Consequences. By Judge
Ahdy. 7s. 6d.
 Educational Works, 17

History of England, 1800-46. By Harriet Martineau, with new

and copious Index. 5 vols. 3s. 6d. each.

A Practical Synopsis of English History. By A. Bowes. 9th

Edition, revised. 8vo. Is.

Lives of tne Queens of England. By A. Strickland. Library

Edition, 8 vols. 7s. 6d. each. Cheaper Edition, 6 vols. 5s. each. Abridged
Edition, 1 vol. 6s. Qd. Mary Queen of Scots, 2 vols. 5s. each. Tudor and
Stuart Princesses, 5s.
History and Geography Examination Papers. Compiled by
C. H. Spence, M.A., Clifton College. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.

FoY other Historical Boolcs, see Catalogue of Bohn's Libraries^ sent free on
apx>lico,tion.

PSYCHOLOGY AND ETHICS.

The Student's Manual of Psychology and Ethics. By F. Ey-
land, M.A., lat\B Scholar of St. John's College, Cambridge. Specially
adapted for London Examinations. Fifth Edition, with Listslof Books
for Students, and Examination Papers. 3s. 6d.

Ethics : An Introductory Manual for University Students. By

F. Ryland, M.A. 3s. 6d

DICTIONARIES.
WEBSTER'S INTERNATIONAL DICTIONARY of the
English Language. Including Scientific, Technical,
and Biblical "Words and Terms, with their Signi-
fications, Pronunciations, Etymologies, Alternative
Spellings, Derivations, Synonyms, and numerous
illustrative Quotations, with various valuable literary / "WEBSTER^S
Appendices and 83 extra pages of Illustrations grouped I
INTERNATIONAI,
and classified, rendering the work a Complete \ rviprrnMAWv
LiTEEART AND SCIENTIFIC B,EFERENCE-BOOK. NeW \ ^'i^AAUWAni
Edition (1890). Thoroughly revised and enlarged
under the supervision of Noah Porter, D.D., LL.D.
1 vol. (2118 pages, 3500 woodcuts), 4to. cloth, 31s. 6d. ; half calf, 21. 2s. ^
half russia, 21. 5s. ; calf, 21. 8s. ; full sheep with patent marginal Index^
21. 8s. ; or in 2 vols, cloth, 11. 14s. ; half russia, 21. 18s.
Prospectuses, with specimen pages, sent free on application,

Kluge's Etymological Dictionary of the German Language.

Translated from the 4th German edition by J. F. Davis, D.Lit., M.A.
(Lond.). Crown 4to. half buckram, 18s.

Dictionary of the French and English Languages, with more

than Fifteen Thousand New Words, Senses, &c. By F. E. A. Gasc. With
New Supplements. 5th Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Demy 8vo.
10«. 6d. In use at Harrow, Rugby, Shrewsbury, &c.

Pocket Dictionary of the French and English Languages.

By F. E. A. Gasc. Containing more than Five Thousand Modem and
Current Words, Senses, and Idiomatic Phrases and Renderings, not found
in any other dictionary pf the two languages. New edition, with addi-
tions and corrections. 49th Thousand. 16mo. Cloth, 2s. 6d.
 ;

18 George Bell and Sons'

ENGLISH CLASS-BOOKS.
Comparative Grammar and Philology. By A. C. Price, M.A., J

Grammar School. 2s, 6d.

Assistant Master at Leeds
'*

The Elements of the English Language. By B. Adams, Ph.D.

25th Edition. Revised by J. F. Davis, D.Lit., M.A. Post 8vo. 4s. 6cl.
The Rudiments of English Grammar and Analysis. By
B. Adams, Ph.D. 19th Thousand. Fcap. 8vo. Is.
A Concise System of Parsing. By L. E. Adams, B.A. Is. ^d.
Examples for Grammatical Analysis (Verse and Prose). Se-
lected, &c., by F. Edwards. New edition. Cloth, Is.
Questions for Examination in English Literature. With brief
hints on the study of English. By Professor W. W. Skeat, Litt.D. Crown
8vo. 2s. 6d.
Ten Brink's History of Enghsh Literature. Vol. I. Early Eng-
lisb,Literature (to Wiclif). Translated by H. M. Kennedy. 3s. 6d.
Vol. II. (Wiclif, Chaucer, Earliest Drama, Ilenaissance). Translated by
W. Clarke Robinson, Ph.D. 3s. 6d.
Notes on Shakespeare's Plays. By T. Duf Barnett, B.A.
Midsummer Night's Dream, Is. Julius C^sar, Is. Henry V., Is.
; ;

Tempest, Is. ; Macbeth, Is. Merchant of Venice, Is. ; Hamlet, Is.

; ;
Richard II.,1s. ; King John Is.; King Lear, Is. j Coriolanus, Is,

GRAMMARS.
By 0. P. Mason, Fellow of Univ. Coll. London.
First Notions of Grammar for Young Learners. Foap. 8yo.
75th Thousand.Revised and enlarged. Cloth. Is.
First Steps in English arammar for Jnnlor Classes. Demy
18mo. 54th Thousand. Is.
Outlines of English Grammar for the Use of Junior Classes.
87th Thousand. Crown 8vo. 2s.
English Grammar, including the Principles of Grammatioal
Analysis. 34th Edition. 143rd Thousand. Crown 8vo. Ss. 6d.
Practice and Help in the Analysis of Sentences. 2«.
A Shorter English Grammar, with copious Exercises. 49th
to 53rd Thousand. Crown Svo. 3s. 6d.
English Grammar Practice, being the Exercises separately. 1$,
Code Standard GrammEurs. Parts I. and II., 2d, each. Parts III.,
lY., and v., 3d. each.

Notes of Lessons, their Preparation, &c. By Jos6 Biokard,

Park Lane Board School, Leeds, and A. H. Taylor, Bodley Board
School, Leeds. 2nd Edition. Crown Svo. 2s. 6d.
A Syllabic System of Teaching to Bead, combining the advan-
tages of the * Phonic * and the * Look-and-Say * Systems. Crown Svo. Is.
Practical Hints on Teaching. By Bev. J. Menet, M.A. 6th Edit.
revised. Crown Svo. paper, 2s.
Test Lessons in Dictation. 4th Edition. Paper cover, 1«. 6^.
Picture Sohool-Books. With numerous Illustrations. Royal 16mo.
The Infant's Primer. 8d.— School Primer. Gd.—School Reader. By J.
Tilleard. Is. —Poetry Book for Schools. Is.—The Life of Joseph. Is.—
The Scripture Parables. By the Rev. J. B. Clarke. Is.—The Scripture
Miracles. Is.-The New Testament History. Is.—The Old Testament
History. By the Rev. J. G. Wood, M.A. Is.- The Life of Martin
Luther. By Sarah Crompton. Is.
 Educational Works. 19

BOOKS FOR YOUNG READERS.

A Series ofReading Books designed to facilitate the acquisition ofthepower
of Reading by very yoimg Children, In 10 vols, clothe 6d, each.

Those with an asterisk have a Frontispiece or other Illustrations.

The Old Boathouse. Bell and Fan; or, A Cold Dip.

*Tot and the Cat. A Bit of Cake. The Jay. The
Black Hen's Nest. Tom and Ned, Mrs. Bee. Suitable
The Cat and the Hen. Sam and his Dog Redleg. for
Infants.
A Wreck.
Bob and Tom Lee.
The New-born Lamb. The Rosewood Box. Poor
Fan. Sheep Dog.
*The Two Parrots. A Tale of the Jubilee. By M. E,
Wintle. 9 Illustrations.
*The Story of Three Monkeys.
Suitable
*Story of a Cat. Told by Herself. for
The Blind Boy, The Mute Girl. A New Tale of Standards
I. & II.
Babes in a Wood.
* Queen Bee and Busy Bee.
* Gull's Crag.
/
Syllabic Spelling. By 0. Barton. In Two Parts. Infants, Sd.
Standard I., 3cl.

GEOGRAPHICAL READING-BOOKS.
By M. J. Babbington Wabd, M.A. With numerous Illustrations.
The Child's Geography. For the Use of Schools and for Home
Tuition. 6d.

The Map and the Compass. A Reading-Book of Geography.

For Standard New Edition, revised. 8d. cloth.
I.

The Bound World. A Keading-Book of Geography, For

Standard II. New Edition, revised and enlarged. lOd.
About England. A Reading-Book of Geography for Standard
III, With numerous Illustrations and Coloured Map. Is. 4d.

The Child's Geography of England. With Introductory Exer-

cises on the British Isles and Empire, with Questions. 2s. 6d,

ELEMENTARY MECHANICS.
By J. C. HoBOBiN, B.A., Principal of Homerton Training College.
Stage I. With numtrous Illuitrations, Is. 6d.
II. With numerous Ulustrottona. Is. 6d,
Stage III. [Preparing.
 .

20 George Bell and Sons' Educational Works.

BELL'S READING-BOOKS.
FOR SCHOOLS AND PAROCHIAL LIBRARIES.
Post%vo. Strongly hound in cloth^ Is. each.

*Adventures of a Donkey.
"Life of Columbus.
* Grimm's G-erman Tales. (Selected.) Suitah e
for
"^Andersen's Danish Tales. Illustrated. (Selected.)
III.
*Uncle Tom's Cabin.
* Great Englishmen. Short Lives for Young Children

Great Englishwomen. Short Lives of.

Great Scotsmen. Short Lives of.
Parables flrom Nature. (Selected.) By Mrs. Gatty.
Standard'
Lyrical Poetry. Selected by D. Munro. IV.
*Edgeworth's Tales. (A Selection.)
Scott's Talisman. (Abridged.)
*Poor Jack. By Captain Marryat, R.N. Abgd.
Dickens's Little Nell. Abridged from the The Old *

Curiosity Shop.'
Oliver Twist. By Charles Dickens. (Abridged.) Standard
V.
*Masterman Ready. ByCapt. Marryat. Illus. (Abgd.)
Gulliver's Travels. (Abridged.)
Arabian Nights. (A Selection Rewritten.)

The Vicar of Wakefield. '

Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare. (Selected.)

Robinson Crusoe. Illustrated.
Settlers in Canada. By Capt. Marryat. (Abridged.) Standards
VI., &
Southey's Life of Nelson. (Abridged.) VII,
Life of the Duke of Wellington, with Maps and Plans.
Sir Roger de Coverley and other Essays from the
Spectator.
Tales of the Coast. By J. Runciman.
* Tliese Volumes are Illustrated.

Uniform with the Series, in limp cloth, M. each.

Shakespeare's Plays. Kemble's Reading Edition. With Ex-

planatory Notes for School Use.
JULIUS C^SAR. THE MERCHANT OF VENICE. KING JOHN.
HENRY THE FIFTH. MACBETH. AS YOU LIKE IT.
 RETURN TO the circulation desk of any
University of California Library

or to the

NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY

BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station
University of California
Richmond, CA 94804-4698

ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS

• 2-month loans may be renewed by calling

(510)642-6753
• 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing
books to NRLF
• Renewals and recharges may be made
4 days prior to due date

DUE AS STAMPED BELOW

NOV 2 4 ?005

DD20 12M 1-05

THE NEW WEBSTER.
A,n entirely New Edition, thoroughly
Revised, considerabXy Enlarged, and Reset
.in new type.

GO
g
o
UJ
CD
O
Q. O

357» 46

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY